RXYMQ-AVMK Service Manual

SiME332106E
Service
Manual
RXYMQ-A Series
Heat Pump 50/60 Hz
SiME332106E
Introduction .................................................................................... 1
1. Safety Cautions.......................................................................................2
1.1 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Workers.............................2
1.2 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Users.................................4
2. Icons Used ..............................................................................................6
3. Revision History ......................................................................................7
Part 1 General Information ............................................................ 8

1. Model Names ..........................................................................................9
1.1 Outdoor Unit .............................................................................................9
1.2 VRV Indoor Unit .......................................................................................9
2. External Appearance.............................................................................10
2.1 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................10
2.2 VRV Indoor Unit .....................................................................................10
3. Capacity Range.....................................................................................11
3.1 Connection Ratio....................................................................................11
3.2 Outdoor Unit Combinations ....................................................................11
4. Specifications ........................................................................................12
Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit............................................................. 14

1. Refrigerant Circuit (Piping Diagrams) ...................................................15
1.1 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................15
1.2 VRV Indoor Unit .....................................................................................18
2. Functional Parts Layout ........................................................................20
2.1 RXYMQ4AVMK ......................................................................................20
2.2 RXYMQ4/5/6AYFK.................................................................................22
Part 3 Remote Controller ............................................................. 24

1. Applicable Models .................................................................................25
2. Names and Functions ...........................................................................27
2.1 BRC1E63 ...............................................................................................27
2.2 BRC1H81 Series ....................................................................................29
2.3 BRC4M Series........................................................................................31
3. Main/Sub Setting...................................................................................34
3.1 Wired Remote Controller (BRC1E63) ....................................................34
3.2 Wired Remote Controller (BRC1H81 Series) .........................................35
3.3 When Wireless Remote Controller is Used Together.............................36
4. Address Setting for Wireless Remote Controller...................................37
4.1 Setting for Signal Receiver PCB ............................................................37
4.2 Setting for BRC4M Series ......................................................................38
4.3 Multiple Settings A/b...............................................................................39
5. Centralized Control Group No. Setting..................................................40
5.1 BRC1E63 ...............................................................................................40
5.2 BRC1H81 Series ....................................................................................42
5.3 Group No. Setting Example....................................................................43
6. Service Settings Menu, Maintenance Menu..........................................44
6.1 BRC1E63 ...............................................................................................44
6.2 BRC1H81 Series ....................................................................................48
i Table of Contents
SiME332106E
Part 4 Functions and Control ....................................................... 49

1. Operation Flowchart..............................................................................50
2. Stop Control ..........................................................................................51
2.1 Abnormal Shutdown ...............................................................................51
2.2 When System is in Stop Control.............................................................51
3. Standby Control ....................................................................................52
3.1 Restart Standby......................................................................................52
3.2 Crankcase Heater Control......................................................................52
4. Startup Control ......................................................................................53
4.1 Cooling Startup Control ..........................................................................53
4.2 Heating Startup Control..........................................................................53
5. Normal Control ......................................................................................54
5.1 List of Functions in Normal Control ........................................................54
5.2 Compressor Control ...............................................................................55
5.3 Compressor Capacity Control ................................................................56
5.4 Compressor Step Control.......................................................................57
5.5 Electronic Expansion Valve Control .......................................................58
5.6 Step Control of Outdoor Fans ................................................................58
6. Protection Control .................................................................................59
6.1 High Pressure Protection Control...........................................................59
6.2 Low Pressure Protection Control............................................................60
6.3 Discharge Pipe Protection Control .........................................................60
6.4 Inverter Protection Control .....................................................................61
6.5 Heating Operation Prohibition ................................................................64
6.6 Overload Protection Control ...................................................................64
7. Special Control......................................................................................65
7.1 Pump Down Residual Control ................................................................65
7.2 Oil Return Control...................................................................................65
7.3 Defrost Control .......................................................................................67
8. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit) .............................................................68
8.1 Set Temperature and Control Target Temperature................................68
8.2 Thermostat Control.................................................................................69
8.3 Automatic Airflow Rate Control ..............................................................72
8.4 Airflow Direction Control.........................................................................73
8.5 Auto Draft Reducing Control (FXFSQ-AR only) .....................................74
8.6 Eco Full Automatic Control (FXFSQ-AR only)........................................74
8.7 Drain Pump Control................................................................................75
8.8 Freeze-Up Prevention Control................................................................77
8.9 Dew Condensation Prevention Control ..................................................78
8.11 Circulation Airflow (FXFSQ-AR only) .....................................................80
8.12 Hot Start Control (In Heating Operation Only)........................................81
8.13 Heater Control (Optional PCB KRP1B series is required.).....................82
Part 5 Field Settings and Test Operation .................................... 83

1. Field Settings for Indoor Unit.................................................................84
1.1 Field Settings with Remote Controller ....................................................84
1.2 List of Field Settings for Indoor Unit .......................................................90
1.3 Applicable Field Settings ........................................................................92
1.4 Details of Field Settings for Indoor Unit..................................................93
Table of Contents ii
SiME332106E
1.5 Operation Control Mode .......................................................................106

2. Field Settings for Outdoor Unit............................................................108
2.1 Function Setting ...................................................................................108
2.2 Settings by DIP Switches .....................................................................109
2.3 Settings by BS Buttons.........................................................................112
2.4 Normal Mode........................................................................................114
2.5 Monitor Mode (Mode 1) ........................................................................115
2.6 Setting Mode (Mode 2).........................................................................118
2.7 Eco Mode Setting .................................................................................130
2.8 Night-Time Low Noise Operation and Demand Operation...................131
3. Test Operation ....................................................................................135
3.1 Checks before Test Operation .............................................................135
3.2 Checkpoints..........................................................................................135
3.3 Test Operation Procedure ....................................................................136
3.4 Turn Power ON ....................................................................................138
Part 6 Service Diagnosis ............................................................ 139

1. Servicing Items to be Confirmed .........................................................142
1.1 Troubleshooting....................................................................................142
1.2 Precautions for Maintenance................................................................142
1.3 Refrigerant Properties (R-410A)...........................................................143
2. Symptom-based Troubleshooting .......................................................144
2.1 With Optional Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor.....................................147
2.2 For All Outdoor Units............................................................................148
3. Error Code via Remote Controller.......................................................149
3.1 BRC1E63 .............................................................................................149
3.2 BRC1H81 Series ..................................................................................150
3.3 BRC4M Series......................................................................................151
4. Error Code via Outdoor Unit PCB .......................................................152
5. Troubleshooting by Error Code ...........................................................153
5.1 Error Codes and Descriptions ..............................................................153
5.2 Error Codes (Sub Codes).....................................................................155
5.3 External Protection Device Abnormality ...............................................160
5.4 Indoor Unit PCB Abnormality ...............................................................161
5.5 Drain Level Control System Abnormality..............................................162
5.6 Indoor Fan Motor Lock, Overload.........................................................164
5.7 Indoor Fan Motor Abnormality..............................................................166
5.8 Power Supply Voltage Abnormality ......................................................172
5.9 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality, Dust Clogging ..............175
5.10 Humidifier System Abnormality ............................................................176
5.11 Auto Grille Unit Error ............................................................................177
5.12 Defective Capacity Setting ...................................................................178
5.13 Transmission Abnormality (between Indoor Unit PCB and
Fan PCB)..............................................................................................179
5.14 Transmission Error ...............................................................................181
5.15 Transmission Error (between Indoor Unit PCB and Auto Grille
Control PCB) ........................................................................................182
5.16 Thermistor Abnormality ........................................................................184
5.17 Combination Abnormality (between Indoor Unit PCB and Fan PCB)...185
5.18 Capacity Setting Abnormality ...............................................................186
iii Table of Contents

SiME332106E
5.20 Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor Error ..................................................188

5.21 Remote Controller Thermistor Abnormality ..........................................193
5.22 Outdoor Unit Main PCB Abnormality....................................................194
5.23 Current Leakage Detection ..................................................................195
5.24 Missing of Leakage Detection Core .....................................................196
5.25 Activation of High Pressure Switch ......................................................197
5.26 Activation of Low Pressure Sensor ......................................................199
5.27 Compressor Motor Lock .......................................................................200
5.28 Outdoor Fan Motor Abnormality ...........................................................202
5.29 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality.......................................205
5.30 Discharge Pipe Temperature Abnormality ...........................................206
5.31 Wet Alarm.............................................................................................208
5.32 Refrigerant Overcharged......................................................................210
5.33 Harness Abnormality (between Outdoor Unit Main PCB and
Inverter PCB)........................................................................................211
5.34 OL Activation (Compressor Overload) .................................................212
5.35 Outdoor Fan PCB Abnormality.............................................................214
5.37 High Pressure Sensor Abnormality ......................................................217
5.38 Low Pressure Sensor Abnormality .......................................................218
5.39 Inverter Circuit Abnormality ..................................................................219
5.40 Momentary Power Failure during Test Operation ................................221
5.41 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Rise Abnormality .........................222
5.42 Compressor Instantaneous Overcurrent ..............................................224
5.43 Compressor Overcurrent......................................................................226
5.44 Compressor Startup Abnormality .........................................................228
5.45 Transmission Error between Microcomputers on Outdoor Unit
Main PCB .............................................................................................230
5.46 Transmission Error between Inverter PCB and Outdoor Unit
Main PCB .............................................................................................231
5.47 Inverter Circuit Capacitor High Voltage ................................................233
5.48 Power Supply Voltage Imbalance ........................................................234
5.49 Reactor Temperature Abnormality .......................................................236
5.50 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Abnormality .................................237
5.51 Field Setting after Replacing Outdoor Unit Main PCB Abnormality or
Combination of PCB Abnormality.........................................................239
5.52 Refrigerant Shortage Warning (Cooling) ..............................................240
5.53 Refrigerant Shortage Warning (Heating)..............................................241
5.54 Refrigerant Shortage Abnormality (Heating Only)................................243
5.55 Open Phase .........................................................................................246
5.56 Power Supply Insufficient or Instantaneous Abnormality .....................247
5.57 Check Operation Not Executed............................................................251
5.58 Transmission Error between Indoor Units and Outdoor Units..............252
5.59 Transmission Error between Remote Controller and Indoor Unit.........255
5.60 Transmission Error between Outdoor Units .........................................256
5.61 Transmission Error between Main and Sub Remote Controllers .........260
5.62 Other Indoor Units and Outdoor Unit Abnormality................................261
5.63 Improper Combination of Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit,
Indoor Unit and Remote Controller.......................................................262
5.64 Address Duplication of Centralized Controller......................................265
5.65 Transmission Error between Centralized Controller and Indoor Unit ...266
5.66 System Not Set Yet ..............................................................................269
5.67 System Abnormality, Refrigerant System Address Undefined .............270
Table of Contents iv
SiME332106E
6. Check ..................................................................................................271
6.1 High Pressure Check ...........................................................................271
6.2 Low Pressure Check ............................................................................272
6.3 Superheat Operation Check.................................................................273
6.4 Power Transistor Check .......................................................................275
6.5 Refrigerant Overcharge Check.............................................................278
6.6 Refrigerant Shortage Check.................................................................279
6.7 Vacuuming and Dehydration Procedure ..............................................280
6.8 Thermistor Check .................................................................................281
6.9 Pressure Sensor Check .......................................................................284
6.10 Broken Wire Check of the Relay Wires ................................................285
6.11 Fan Motor Connector Check (Power Supply Cable) ............................285
6.12 Fan Motor Connector Check (Signal Cable) ........................................287
6.13 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Check ...............................................288
Part 7 Appendix .......................................................................... 290

1. Wiring Diagrams..................................................................................291
1.1 Outdoor Unit .........................................................................................291
1.2 VRV Indoor Unit ...................................................................................293
v Table of Contents
SiME332106E
Introduction
1. Safety Cautions.......................................................................................2
1.1 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Workers.............................2
1.2 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Users.................................4
2. Icons Used ..............................................................................................6
3. Revision History ......................................................................................7
Introduction 1
Safety Cautions SiME332106E
1. Safety Cautions
Be sure to read the following safety cautions before conducting repair work.
After the repair work is complete, be sure to conduct a test operation to ensure that the
equipment operates normally, and explain the cautions for operating the product to the
customer.
This manual is for the
person in charge of
maintenance and
inspection.
Caution Items The caution items are classified into Warning and Caution. The Warning items are
especially important since death or serious injury can result if they are not followed closely. The
Caution items can also lead to serious accidents under some conditions if they are not
followed. Therefore, be sure to observe all the safety caution items described below.
Pictograms This symbol indicates an item for which caution must be exercised.
The pictogram shows the item to which attention must be paid.
This symbol indicates a prohibited action.
The prohibited item or action is shown in the illustration or near the symbol.
This symbol indicates an action that must be taken, or an instruction.
The instruction is shown in the illustration or near the symbol.
1.1 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Workers

Warning
Do not store equipment in a room with fire sources (e.g., naked
flames, gas appliances, electric heaters).
Be sure to disconnect the power cable from the socket before

disassembling equipment for repair.
Working on equipment that is connected to the power supply may cause
an electrical shock.
If it is necessary to supply power to the equipment to conduct the repair or
inspect the circuits, do not touch any electrically charged sections of the
equipment.
If refrigerant gas is discharged during repair work, do not touch the
discharged refrigerant gas.
Refrigerant gas may cause frostbite.
When disconnecting the suction or discharge pipe of the

compressor at the welded section, evacuate the refrigerant gas
completely at a well-ventilated place first.
If there is gas remaining inside the compressor, the refrigerant gas or
refrigerating machine oil discharges when the pipe is disconnected, and it
may cause injury.
If refrigerant gas leaks during repair work, ventilate the area.
Refrigerant gas may generate toxic gases when it contacts flames.
Be sure to discharge the capacitor completely before conducting

repair work.
The step-up capacitor supplies high-voltage electricity to the electrical
components of the outdoor unit.
A charged capacitor may cause an electrical shock.
2 Introduction
SiME332106E Safety Cautions
Warning
Do not turn the air conditioner on or off by plugging in or
unplugging the power cable.
Plugging in or unplugging the power cable to operate the equipment may
cause an electrical shock or fire.
Be sure to wear a safety helmet, gloves, and a safety belt when

working in a high place (more than 2 m).
Insufficient safety measures may cause a fall.
In case of R-32 / R-410A refrigerant models, be sure to use pipes,

flare nuts and tools intended for the exclusive use with the R-32 /
R-410A refrigerant.
The use of materials for R-22 refrigerant models may cause a serious
accident, such as a damage of refrigerant cycle or equipment failure.
Do not mix air or gas other than the specified refrigerant (R-32 /
R-410A / R-22) in the refrigerant system.
If air enters the refrigerant system, an excessively high pressure results,
causing equipment damage and injury.
Caution
Do not repair electrical components with wet hands.
Working on the equipment with wet hands may cause an electrical shock.
Do not clean the air conditioner with water.

Washing the unit with water may cause an electrical shock.
Be sure to provide an earth / grounding when repairing the

equipment in a humid or wet place, to avoid electrical shocks.
Be sure to turn off the power switch and unplug the power cable
when cleaning the equipment.
The internal fan rotates at a high speed, and may cause injury.
Be sure to conduct repair work with appropriate tools.

The use of inappropriate tools may cause injury.
Be sure to check that the refrigerating cycle section has cooled

down enough before conducting repair work.
Working on the unit when the refrigerating cycle section is hot may cause
burns.
Conduct welding work in a well-ventilated place.

Using the welder in an enclosed room may cause oxygen deficiency.
Introduction 3
Safety Cautions SiME332106E
1.2 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Users

Warning
Do not store the equipment in a room with fire sources (e.g., naked
flames, gas appliances, electric heaters).
Be sure to use parts listed in the service parts list of the applicable
model and appropriate tools to conduct repair work. Never attempt
to modify the equipment.
The use of inappropriate parts or tools may cause an electrical shock,
excessive heat generation or fire.
If the power cable and lead wires are scratched or have deteriorated,
be sure to replace them.
Damaged cable and wires may cause an electrical shock, excessive heat
generation or fire.
Do not use a joined power cable or extension cable, or share the

same power outlet with other electrical appliances, since it may
cause an electrical shock, excessive heat generation or fire.
Be sure to use an exclusive power circuit for the equipment, and

follow the local technical standards related to the electrical
equipment, the internal wiring regulations, and the instruction
manual for installation when conducting electrical work.
Insufficient power circuit capacity and improper electrical work may cause
an electrical shock or fire.
Be sure to use the specified cable for wiring between the indoor and
outdoor units.
Make the connections securely and route the cable properly so that there
is no force pulling the cable at the connection terminals.
Improper connections may cause excessive heat generation or fire.
When wiring between the indoor and outdoor units, make sure that
the terminal cover does not lift off or dismount because of the cable.
If the cover is not mounted properly, the terminal connection section may
cause an electrical shock, excessive heat generation or fire.
Do not damage or modify the power cable.

Damaged or modified power cables may cause an electrical shock or fire.
Placing heavy items on the power cable, or heating or pulling the power
cable may damage it.
Do not mix air or gas other than the specified refrigerant (R-32 /
R-410A / R-22) in the refrigerant system.
If air enters the refrigerant system, an excessively high pressure results,
causing equipment damage and injury.
If the refrigerant gas leaks, be sure to locate the leaking point and
repair it before charging the refrigerant. After charging the
refrigerant, make sure that there is no leak.
If the leaking point cannot be located and the repair work must be
stopped, be sure to pump-down, and close the service valve, to prevent
refrigerant gas from leaking into the room. Refrigerant gas itself is
harmless, but it may generate toxic gases when it contacts flames, such
as those from fan type and other heaters, stoves and ranges.
When relocating the equipment, make sure that the new installation
site has sufficient strength to withstand the weight of the
equipment.
If the installation site does not have sufficient strength or the installation
work is not conducted securely, the equipment may fall and cause injury.
4 Introduction
SiME332106E Safety Cautions
Warning
Check to make sure that the power cable plug is not dirty or loose,
then insert the plug into a power outlet securely.
If the plug is dusty or has a loose connection, it may cause an electrical
shock or fire.
When replacing the coin battery in the remote controller, be sure to

dispose of the old battery to prevent children from swallowing it.
If a child swallows the coin battery, see a doctor immediately.
Caution
Installation of a leakage breaker is necessary in some cases
depending on the conditions of the installation site, to prevent
electrical shocks.
Do not install the equipment in a place where there is a possibility of

combustible gas leaks.
If combustible gas leaks and remains around the unit, it may cause a fire.
Check to see if parts and wires are mounted and connected

properly, and if connections at the soldered or crimped terminals
are secure.
Improper installation and connections may cause excessive heat
generation, fire or an electrical shock.
If the installation platform or frame has corroded, replace it.
A corroded installation platform or frame may cause the unit to fall,
resulting in injury.
Check the earth / grounding, and repair it if the equipment is not

properly earthed / grounded.
Improper earth / grounding may cause an electrical shock.
Be sure to measure insulation resistance after the repair, and make

sure that the resistance is 1 M or higher.
Faulty insulation may cause an electrical shock.
Be sure to check the drainage of the indoor unit after the repair.
Faulty drainage may cause water to enter the room and wet the furniture
and floor.
Do not tilt the unit when removing it.

The water inside the unit may spill and wet the furniture and floor.
Introduction 5
Icons Used SiME332106E
2. Icons Used
The following icons are used to attract the attention of the reader to specific information.
Icon Type of Description
Information
Warning Warning is used when there is danger of personal injury.
Warning
Caution Caution is used when there is danger that the reader,
Caution through incorrect manipulation, may damage equipment,
lose data, get an unexpected result or have to restart (part
of) a procedure.
Note Note provides information that is not indispensable, but
Note may nevertheless be valuable to the reader, such as tips
and tricks.
Reference Reference guides the reader to other places in this binder
Reference or in this manual, where he/she will find additional
information on a specific topic.
6 Introduction
SiME332106E Revision History
3. Revision History
Month / Year Version Revised contents
09 / 2021 SiME332106E First edition
Introduction 7
SiME332106E
Part 1
General Information
1. Model Names ..........................................................................................9

1.1 Outdoor Unit .............................................................................................9
1.2 VRV Indoor Unit .......................................................................................9
2. External Appearance.............................................................................10
2.1 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................10
2.2 VRV Indoor Unit .....................................................................................10
3. Capacity Range.....................................................................................11
3.1 Connection Ratio....................................................................................11
3.2 Outdoor Unit Combinations ....................................................................11
4. Specifications ........................................................................................12
8 Part 1 General Information

SiME332106E Model Names
1. Model Names
1.1 Outdoor Unit
Capacity range HP 4 5 6
Power
kW 11.3 14.1 16.0 supply,
Standard
Capacity index 100 125 150
Heat Pump 4A — — VMK
RXYMQ
4A 5A 6A YFK
VMK: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz (for Middle East)

YFK: 3 phase, 380-415/400 V, 50/60 Hz (for Middle East)
1.2 VRV Indoor Unit

Capacity range kW 2.2 2.8 3.6 4.5 5.6 7.1 9.0 11.2 14.0 16.0
Power supply,
HP 0.8 1 1.25 1.6 2 2.5 3.2 4 5 6 Standard
Capacity index 20 25 31.25 40 50 62.5 80 100 125 140
Ceiling Round flow cassette
mounted with sensing FXFSQ — 25AR 32AR 40AR 50AR 63AR 80AR 100AR 125AR 140AR V1
cassette
Ceiling Slim duct (Standard 20PD 25PD 32PD — — — — — — —
concealed type) with drain pump FXDQ VM
duct — — — 40ND 50ND 63ND — — — —
Middle-high static — — — 40PB 50PB 63PB 80PB 100PB 125PB 140PB
pressure duct FXMQ V1
— — — 40AR 50AR 63AR 80AR 100AR — —
Wall mounted FXAQ 20AR 25AR 32AR 40AR 50AR 63AR — — — — VM
Power supply and standard symbols

V1, VM: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz
Part 1 General Information 9

External Appearance SiME332106E
2. External Appearance
2.1 Outdoor Unit
4, 5, 6 HP
RXYMQ4AVMK
RXYMQ4AYFK RXYMQ5AYFK RXYMQ6AYFK
2.2 VRV Indoor Unit

Ceiling mounted cassette
Round flow cassette with sensing
FXFSQ-AR
Ceiling concealed duct

Slim duct (Standard type) Middle-high static pressure duct
FXDQ-PD FXMQ-PB
FXDQ-ND FXMQ-AR
Wall mounted
Wall mounted
FXAQ-AR

SiME332106E Capacity Range
3. Capacity Range
3.1 Connection Ratio
Total capacity index of the indoor units
Connection ratio =
Capacity index of the outdoor units
Type Min. connection ratio Max. connection ratio

Single outdoor units 50% 130%
3.2 Outdoor Unit Combinations

RXYMQ4AVMK
Model RXYMQ5AYFK RXYMQ6AYFK
RXYMQ4AYFK
kW 11.3 14.1 16.0
HP 4 5 6
Capacity index 100 125 150
Total capacity index Combination (%) 50% 50 62.5 75
of connectable
indoor units 100% 100 125 150
130% 130 162.5 195
Maximum number of connectable indoor units 6 8 9

Specifications SiME332106E
4. Specifications
Model name RXYMQ4AVMK RXYMQ4AYFK
Power supply 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz 3 phase, 380-415/400 V, 50/60 Hz
(1)
Cooling capacity at T1 1 Capacity kW 11.3 11.3
Capacity Btu/h 38,500 38,500
EER kW/kW 4.10 4.07
EER Btu/W·h 14.00 13.90
PI kW 2.75 2.77
(2)
EER kW/kW 4.13 4.09
EER Btu/W·h 14.10 13.95
PI kW 2.73 2.76
Cooling capacity at T3 1 Capacity kW 10.4 10.6
EER kW/kW 3.14 3.14
EER Btu/W·h 10.70 10.70
PI kW 3.31 3.38
CSPF 3 W/W 5.80 5.70
Power factor 0.9 0.9
EER kW/kW 2.96 2.97
EER Btu/W·h 10.10 10.15
PI kW 3.41 3.39
Heating capacity at H1 1 Capacity kW 12.6 12.6
COP kW/kW 4.70 4.50
COP Btu/W·h 16.04 15.37
PI kW 2.68 2.80
Allowed indoor capacity Nom. 100 100
index connection Min. 50 50
Max. 130 130
Dimensions Unit mm 870×1,100×460 870×1,100×460
(H×W×D) Packed unit mm 1,010×1,190×560 1,010×1,190×560
Mass Unit kg 100 120
Packed unit kg 114 134
Heat Type
Cross fin coil Cross fin coil
exchanger
Fan Type Propeller Propeller
Discharge direction Side Side
Motor Quantity 1 1
Model Brushless DC Brushless DC
Output/pcs W 234 600
Airflow Cooling m³/min 87 123
rate Heating m³/min 94 145
Compressor Quantity 1 1
Motor Quantity 1 1
Model Inverter Inverter
Type Hermetically sealed swing type Hermetically sealed swing type
Refrigerant Refrigerant name R-410A R-410A
Charge kg 4.2 4.95
Piping Liquid Type Flare connection Flare connection
connections Diameter (OD) mm 9.5 9.5
Gas Type Flare connection Brazing connection
Diameter (OD) mm 15.9 15.9
Safety devices High pressure switch, Fan driver overload protector,
High pressure switch, Fan driver overload protector, Inverter overload protector, Fuse,
Inverter overload protector, Fuse,
Bimetal thermostat (external overload relay),
Bimetal thermostat (external overload relay) Over/under voltage protection PCB
Standard accessories Installation manuals, Operation manual, Installation manuals, Operation manual,
Ferrite core, etc. Auxiliary pipe, etc.
Drawing No. C: 2D135391B C: 2D135391B
Notes:
1. The above data are based on the following conditions.
Condition Indoor DB (°C) Indoor WB (°C) Outdoor DB (°C) Outdoor WB (°C) Reference standard
(1)
T1 27.0 19.0 35.0 — ISO 15042:2011
(2)
T1 26.6 19.4 35.0 — AHRI-1230
T3 29.0 19.0 46.0 — ISO 15042:2011
T4 26.6 19.4 48.0 — AHRI-1230
H1 20.0 — 7.0 6.0 ISO 15042:2011
2. For detailed contents, see installation/operational manual.

3. Cooling seasonal performance factor for hot climates at T3 condition as per ISO 16358-1:2013/AMD 1:2019

SiME332106E Specifications
Model name RXYMQ5AYFK RXYMQ6AYFK

Power supply 3 phase, 380-415/400 V, 50/60 Hz 3 phase, 380-415/400 V, 50/60 Hz
(1)
EER kW/kW 3.91 3.90
EER Btu/W·h 13.35 13.30
PI kW 3.60 4.10
(2)
EER kW/kW 3.94 3.94
EER Btu/W·h 13.45 13.45
PI kW 3.57 4.05
EER kW/kW 2.97 2.96
EER Btu/W·h 10.15 10.10
PI kW 4.29 4.90
CSPF 3 W/W 5.40 5.35
Power factor 0.9 0.9
EER kW/kW 2.99 3.00
EER Btu/W·h 10.20 10.25
PI kW 3.92 4.29
Heating capacity at H1 1 Capacity kW 16.0 18.0
COP kW/kW 4.35 4.25
COP Btu/W·h 14.85 14.50
PI kW 3.67 4.24
Allowed indoor capacity Nom. 125 150
index connection Min. 62.5 75
Max. 162.5 195
Dimensions Unit mm 870×1,100×460 870×1,100×460
(H×W×D) Packed unit mm 1,010×1,190×560 1,010×1,190×560
Mass Unit kg 120 120
Packed unit kg 134 134
Heat Type
Cross fin coil Cross fin coil
exchanger
Fan Type Propeller Propeller
Discharge direction Side Side
Motor Quantity 1 1
Model Brushless DC Brushless DC
Output/pcs W 600 600
Airflow Cooling m³/min 123 123
rate Heating m³/min 145 145
Compressor Quantity 1 1
Motor Quantity 1 1
Model Inverter Inverter
Type Hermetically sealed swing type Hermetically sealed swing type
Refrigerant Refrigerant name R-410A R-410A
Charge kg 5.4 5.4
Piping Liquid Type Flare connection Flare connection
connections Diameter (OD) mm 9.5 9.5
Gas Type Brazing connection Brazing connection
Diameter (OD) mm 15.9 19.1
Safety devices High pressure switch, Fan driver overload protector, High pressure switch, Fan driver overload protector,
Inverter overload protector, Fuse, Inverter overload protector, Fuse,
Bimetal thermostat (external overload relay), Bimetal thermostat (external overload relay),
Over/under voltage protection PCB Over/under voltage protection PCB
Standard accessories Installation manuals, Operation manual, Installation manuals, Operation manual,
Auxiliary pipe, etc. Auxiliary pipe, etc.
Drawing No. C: 2D135391B C: 2D135391B
Notes:
1. The above data are based on the following conditions.
Condition Indoor DB (°C) Indoor WB (°C) Outdoor DB (°C) Outdoor WB (°C) Reference standard
(1)
T1 27.0 19.0 35.0 — ISO 15042:2011
(2)
T1 26.6 19.4 35.0 — AHRI-1230
T3 29.0 19.0 46.0 — ISO 15042:2011
T4 26.6 19.4 48.0 — AHRI-1230
H1 20.0 — 7.0 6.0 ISO 15042:2011
2. For detailed contents, see installation/operational manual.

3. Cooling seasonal performance factor for hot climates at T3 condition as per ISO 16358-1:2013/AMD 1:2019

SiME332106E
Part 2
Refrigerant Circuit
1. Refrigerant Circuit (Piping Diagrams) ...................................................15

1.1 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................15
1.2 VRV Indoor Unit .....................................................................................18
2. Functional Parts Layout ........................................................................20
2.1 RXYMQ4AVMK ......................................................................................20
2.2 RXYMQ4/5/6AYFK.................................................................................22
14 Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit

SiME332106E Refrigerant Circuit (Piping Diagrams)
1. Refrigerant Circuit (Piping Diagrams)

1.1 Outdoor Unit
No. in
Electric
piping symbol Name Function
diagram
(1) M1C Compressor motor Compressor is operated in multi-steps according to Te.
(2) M1F Fan motor The fan rotation speed is varied by using the inverter.
Electronic expansion Fully open during cooling operation.
(3) Y1E
valve (Main)
Electronic expansion PI control is applied to keep the outlet superheating degree of subcooling heat
(4) Y2E valve (Injection) exchanger constant.
Electronic expansion Used in heating operation to control inverter fin temperature by adjusting the
(5) Y3E
valve (Refrigerant jacket) refrigerant flow.
Electronic expansion Used to control refrigerant charging speed during refrigerant auto charge
(6) Y4E valve (Refrigerant auto operation and to stop refrigerant charge automatically.
charge)
Solenoid valve (Four way Used to switch the operation mode between cooling and heating.
(7) Y1S valve
(8) S1NPH High pressure sensor Used to detect high pressure.
(9) S1NPL Low pressure sensor Used to detect low pressure.
High pressure switch In order to prevent the increase of high pressure when an error occurs, this switch
(10) S1PH is activated at high pressure of 4.0 MPa or more to stop the compressor
operation.
Pressure regulating valve This valve opens at a pressure of 4.0 MPa for prevention of pressure increase,
(11) — thus resulting in no damage of functional parts due to the increase of pressure in
transportation or storage.
Double tube heat Used to subcool liquid refrigerant from the electronic expansion valve.
(12) — exchanger (Subcooling
heat exchanger)
Thermistor Used to detect outdoor air temperature, correct discharge pipe temperature, and
(13) R1T (Outdoor air: Ta) for other purposes.
Thermistor Used to detect discharge pipe temperature, make the temperature protection
(14) R21T (Discharge pipe: Tdi1) control of compressor, and for other purposes.
(15) R3T Thermistor Used to detect suction pipe temperature, and for other purposes.
(Suction pipe: Ts)
Thermistor This detects temperature of liquid pipe between the air heat exchanger and main
(16) R4T (Heat exchanger liquid electronic expansion valve. Used to make judgments on the recover or discharge
pipe: Tf) refrigerants to the refrigerant regulator.
Thermistor This detects temperature of liquid pipe after subcooling heat exchanger.
(Subcooling heat
(17) R5T
exchanger liquid pipe:
Tsc)
Thermistor This detects temperature of gas pipe on the evaporation side of subcooling heat
(18) R6T (Subcooling heat exchanger. Used to exercise the constant control of superheating degree at the
exchanger gas pipe: Tsh) outlet of subcooling heat exchanger.
Thermistor Used to detect liquid pipe temperature of air heat exchanger.
(19) R7T (Heat exchanger deicer:
Tb)
Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit 15

Refrigerant Circuit (Piping Diagrams) SiME332106E
RXYMQ4AVMK
C: 3D132648A
(13)
(2)
(10)
(14)
(8)
(19)
(16)
(7)
(1)
(5)
(3)
(11)
(4)
(18)
(12)
(9)
(6)
(15)
(17)

RXYMQ4/5/6AYFK
C: 3D132707A
(13)
(2)
(10)
(14)
(8)
(19)
(16)
(7)
(1)
(5)
(3)
(11)
(4)
(15)
(18)
(12)
(9)
(6)
(17)

Refrigerant Circuit (Piping Diagrams) SiME332106E
1.2 VRV Indoor Unit

No. in piping Electric
diagram Name symbol Applicable model Function
Electronic expansion valve All indoor units Used for gas superheating degree
(1) Y1E control while in cooling or subcooling
degree control while in heating.
(2) Suction air thermistor R1T All indoor units Used for thermostat control.
Indoor liquid pipe thermistor All indoor units Used for gas superheating degree
(3) R2T control while in cooling or subcooling
degree control while in heating.
(4) Indoor gas pipe thermistor R3T All indoor units Used for gas superheating degree
control while in cooling.
 FXFSQ-AR  FXDQ-PD, FXDQ-ND
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(4)
C: 4D121746
C: 4D115598B
 FXMQ-PB  FXMQ-AR
(4) (4)
(3) (3)
(2) (2)
(1) (1)
C: 4D110285 C: 4D097585B

 FXAQ20/25/32/40/50AR  FXAQ63AR
(1) (3) (1) (3)
(2) (2)
(4) (4)
C: 4D121516A C: 4D122027A

Functional Parts Layout SiME332106E
2. Functional Parts Layout

2.1 RXYMQ4AVMK
Top View
Thermistor (Subcooling
heat exchanger gas pipe)
(R6T)
Thermistor (Suction pipe)

(R3T)
High pressure sensor Electronic expansion valve

(S1NPH) (Refrigerant auto charge)
(Y4E)
High pressure switch Thermistor (Discharge pipe)

(S1PH) (R21T)
Side View
Low pressure sensor

(S1NPL)
Solenoid valve (Four way valve)

(Y1S)
Thermistor (Outdoor Air)

(R1T)
Electronic expansion
valve (Inverter cooling)
(Y3E)
Compressor
valve (Injection)
(M1C)
(Y2E)
Electronic expansion valve

(Main)
(Y1E)
heat exchanger liquid pipe)
(R5T)
C: 1P627964E

SiME332106E Functional Parts Layout
Back view
Thermistor
(Heat exchanger deicer)
(R7T)
Thermistor
(Heat exchanger liquid pipe)
(R4T)
C: 1P627964E

Functional Parts Layout SiME332106E
2.2 RXYMQ4/5/6AYFK
Top View
Thermistor (Suction pipe)

(R3T)
High pressure sensor

(S1NPH)
High pressure switch

(S1PH)
Thermistor (Discharge pipe)

(R21T)
Side View
heat exchanger gas pipe)
(R6T)
Low pressure sensor

Solenoid valve (Four way valve)
(S1NPL)
(Y1S)
Thermistor (Outdoor Air)

(R1T)

(Refrigerant auto charge)
(Main) (Y4E)
(Y1E)
valve (Inverter cooling)
(Y3E)
heat exchanger liquid pipe)
(R5T) valve (Injection)
(Y2E)
Compressor
(M1C)
C: 1P642649E

SiME332106E Functional Parts Layout
Back view
Thermistor
(Heat exchanger deicer)
Thermistor (R7T)
(Heat exchanger liquid pipe)
(R4T)
C: 1P642649E

SiME332106E
Part 3
Remote Controller
1. Applicable Models .................................................................................25

2. Names and Functions ...........................................................................27
2.1 BRC1E63 ...............................................................................................27
2.2 BRC1H81 Series ....................................................................................29
2.3 BRC4M Series........................................................................................31
3. Main/Sub Setting...................................................................................34
3.1 Wired Remote Controller (BRC1E63) ....................................................34
3.2 Wired Remote Controller (BRC1H81 Series) .........................................35
3.3 When Wireless Remote Controller is Used Together.............................36
4. Address Setting for Wireless Remote Controller...................................37
4.1 Setting for Signal Receiver PCB ............................................................37
4.2 Setting for BRC4M Series ......................................................................38
4.3 Multiple Settings A/b...............................................................................39
5. Centralized Control Group No. Setting..................................................40
5.1 BRC1E63 ...............................................................................................40
5.2 BRC1H81 Series ....................................................................................42
5.3 Group No. Setting Example....................................................................43
6. Service Settings Menu, Maintenance Menu..........................................44
6.1 BRC1E63 ...............................................................................................44
6.2 BRC1H81 Series ....................................................................................48
24 Part 3 Remote Controller

SiME332106E Applicable Models
1. Applicable Models
Wired remote controller Wireless remote controller
Series
Navigation Madoka Remote controller Receiver
FXFSQ-AR
BRC7M632F-6
(1)
FXDQ-PD
FXDQ-ND BRC1H81W7
BRC1E63 BRC4M150W16
BRC1H81S7 BRC4M61-6
FXMQ-PB
FXMQ-AR
FXAQ-AR BRC7N618-6
Note(s) 1. Some functions are not available depending on the remote controller type. Refer to page 26
for details.
Part 3 Remote Controller 25

Applicable Models SiME332106E
Function list
FXFSQ-AR
Category Function
BRC1E63 BRC4M150
ON/OFF operation ● ●
Operation mode switching ● ●
Setting temperature ● ●
Swing pattern selection ● ●
Switchable fan speed (Ventilation amount) ● ●
Display switching function ● —
Basic performance
Backlight function ● ●
Display automatic OFF ● —
Multilingual correspond ● ●
Timer function (Time schedule display) ● —
Key lock function ● —
Contrast adjustment ● —
Automatic Eco airflow rate ● ●
Eco infrared floor temperature sensor ● —
Sensing sensor stop mode ● —
Sensing sensor low mode ● —
Setpoint range set ● —
Setback ● —
Energy saving function
OFF timer (programmed) ● —
Weekly schedule timer ● —
ON/OFF timer — ●
Setting temperature automatic recovery ● —
VRTsmart control ● —
VRT control ● —
Active circulation airflow ● —
Forced cooling ON operation ● —
Automatic cooling/heating changeover ● —
Independent up-and-down airflow ● —
Automatic direct air (when human sensing) ● —
Hot start function ● ●
Draft prevention ● —
Comfortable function
Two selectable temperature sensors ● —
Application for high ceiling ● —
Service contact display ● —
Model name display (indoor/outdoor) ● —
Filter sign/reset ● ●
Operation time accumulation time display ● —
Operation data display ● —
●: Available
—: Not available

SiME332106E Names and Functions
2. Names and Functions

2.1 BRC1E63
(1) Mode Selector button (6) Right button

Used to select the operation mode. Used to highlight the next items on the
right-hand side.
(2) Airflow Setting button Display contents are changed to next
Used to indicate the Airflow Rate (Air screen per page.
Volume / Fan Speed) / Airflow Direction
screen. (7) Left button
Used to highlight the next items on the
(3) Menu/Enter button left-hand side.
Used to indicate the Main menu. Display contents are changed to
(For details of Main menu, refer to the previous screen per page.
operation manual.)
Used to enter the selected item. (8) ON/OFF button
Press to start the system.
(4) Up button Press this button again to stop the
Used to increase the set temperature. system.
Used to highlight the item above the
current selection. (9) Operation lamp (Green)
(The highlighted items will be scrolled This lamp lights up during operation. The
through when the button is pressed lamp blinks if an error occurs.
continuously.)
Used to change the selected item. (10) Cancel button
Used to return to the previous screen.
(5) Down button Press and hold this button for 4
Used to decrease the set temperature. seconds or longer to display Service
Used to highlight the item below the Settings menu.
current selection.
(The highlighted items will be scrolled (11) LCD (with backlight)
through when the button is pressed The backlight will be lit for about 30
continuously.) seconds by pressing any button.
Used to change the selected item.

Names and Functions SiME332106E
Mode Access Operation

On power-up, the message Checking the connection. Please stand by. will be displayed on
the remote controller screen. Then that message will disappear and the basic screen will be
displayed. To access a mode from the basic screen, refer to the figure below.
When any of the operation buttons is pressed, the backlight will come on and remains lit for
about 30 seconds. Be sure to press a button while the backlight is on (this does not apply to the
On/Off button.)
Main Menu
• Circulation airflow
• Airflow direction
• Individual air direction
• Quick start
• Ventilation
• Energy saving options
• Schedule
• Filter auto clean
Main Menu screen • Maintenance information
• Configuration
• Current settings
• Clock & Calendar
Press Press Cancel • Language
Menu/Enter button once.
button once.
Basic Screen
• Operation mode changeover
 The items on each menu vary
• Temperature setting
depending on the connected
• Airflow rate
models.
• Airflow direction
• Menu display
• Confirmation of each setting
• On
• Off
• Cancel Basic screen
• Operation lamp
Press Cancel button Press Cancel
for 4 seconds or more. button once.
Press Cancel
button once.
Press Cancel button
for 4 seconds or more.
Service Settings screen Maintenance Menu screen
Service Settings Menu Maintenance Menu

• Test Operation • Model name
• Maintenance contact • Operation hours
• Field settings • Indoor unit status
• Demand • Outdoor unit status
• Min setpoints differential • Forced defrost
• External input interlock • Error display
• Group address • Swap unit No.
• Indoor unit AirNet address • Addressed sensor value
• Outdoor unit AirNet address
• Error history
• Indoor unit status
• Outdoor unit status
• Forced fan ON
• Switch main sub controller
• Filter indicator
• Test filter auto clean
• Brush/Filter ind
• Disable filter auto clean

2.2 BRC1H81 Series

(1)
- +
(5)
(3) (2) (4)
(1) ON/OFF
 When OFF, press to turn ON the system. As a result, the status indicator (5) will turn ON too.
 When ON, press to turn OFF the system. As a result, the status indicator (5) will turn OFF
too.
(2) ENTER/ACTIVATE/SET
 From the home screen, enter the main menu.
 From the main menu, enter one of the submenus.
 From their respective submenu, activate an operation/ventilation mode.
 In one of the submenus, confirm a setting.
(3) CYCLE/ADJUST
 Cycle left.
 Adjust a setting (default: decrease).
(4) CYCLE/ADJUST
 Cycle right.
 Adjust a setting (default: increase).
Note(s) For a full description of the behavior of the status indicator, see the installer and user reference
guide.
Home screens Depending on installer configuration, the controller either has a standard or a detailed home
screen. In most cases, the standard home screen gives you only the active operation mode,
messages (if any), and the setpoint temperature (in case of Cooling, Heating, or
Auto operation mode). The detailed home screen gives you all kinds of information through
status icons.
Standard Detailed
(1) (1) 19
(2) (2)
(3) (3)
(1) Messages
(2) Active operation mode
(3) Setpoint temperature
Note(s) The controller is equipped with a power saving function that causes the screen to go blank after
a period of inactivity. To make the screen light up again, press one of the buttons.

Status icons
Icon Description Icon Description
System operation. Indicates that the system is Periodic inspection. Indicates that the indoor or
operating. outdoor unit is being inspected.
Bluetooth. Indicates that the controller is Backup. Indicates that in the system an indoor unit is
communicating with a mobile device, for use with the set as backup indoor unit.
Daikin Control Assistant app.
Individual airflow direction. Indicates that the
Centralized control. Indicates that the system is
individual airflow direction setting is enabled.
controlled by central control equipment (optional
accessory) and that control of the system by the Information. Indicates that the system has a
controller is limited. message to convey. To see the message, go to the
Changeover under centralized control. Indicates information screen.
that the cooling/heating changeover is under Warning. Indicates that an error occurred, or that an
centralized control by another indoor unit, or by an indoor unit component needs to be maintained.
optional cool/ heat selector that is connected to the
outdoor unit. Demand control. Indicates that the system's energy
Defrost/Hot start. Indicates that the defrost/hot start consumption is being limited, and that it is running
mode is active. with restricted capacity.
End of demand control. Indicates that the system's
Timer. Indicates that the schedule timer or OFF timer energy consumption is no longer being limited, and
is enabled. that it is no longer running with restricted capacity.
Clock not set. Indicates that controller's clock is not Rotation. Indicates that Rotation mode is active.
set.
Self-cleaning filter operation. Indicates that self- Setback. Indicates that the indoor unit is operating
cleaning filter operation is active. under setback conditions.
Inspection. Indicates that the indoor or outdoor unit is Ventilation. Indicates that a heat reclaim ventilation
being inspected. unit is connected.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and use of such marks by Daikin Europe N.V. is under license. Other trademarks and trade
names are those of their respective owners.

2.3 BRC4M Series

2.3.1 Remote Controller
13
2
1
6
3
7 4
8
5
9
10
11
12
18
17
15
14
16 19
20
DISPLAY (SIGNAL TRANSMISSION) FAN SPEED CONTROL BUTTON

1 10
This blinks when a signal is being transmitted. Press this button to select the fan speed.
TEMPERATURE SETTING BUTTON
DISPLAY (OPERATION MODE) 11
Use this button for SETTING TEMPERATURE.
2 This display shows the current OPERATION BACKLIGHT BUTTON
MODE. Operation modes supported depend 12
on the model that is connected. Press this button to turn the backlight on or off.
SIGNAL TRANSMITTER
DISPLAY NOT AVAILABLE (displayed when 13
operation is not supported) This sends the signals to the indoor unit.
3 When a button for a function that is not PROGRAMMING TIMER BUTTON
supported on the connected model is pressed, 14 Use this button for programming “START and/
this displays for 2 seconds. or STOP” time.
DISPLAY (SET TEMPERATURE) 15 TIMER MODE ON/OFF BUTTON

4 16 TIMER RESERVE/CANCEL BUTTON
This display shows the set temperature.
17 AIRFLOW DIRECTION ADJUST BUTTON
DISPLAY (PROGRAMMED TIME)
OPERATION MODE SELECTOR BUTTON
5 This display shows PROGRAMMED TIME of
the air conditioner start or stop. Press this button to select OPERATION
18 MODE. (COOLING), (HEATING),
6 DISPLAY (AIRFLOW BLADE) (AUTOMATIC), (FAN),
DISPLAY (FAN SPEED) (PROGRAM DRY).
7
The display shows the set fan speed. FILTER SIGN RESET BUTTON
DISPLAY (INSPECTION) 19 Refer to the section of MAINTENANCE in the
When the INSPECTION BUTTON is pressed, operation manual attached to the indoor unit.
8
the display shows the system mode is in. INSPECTION BUTTON
Do not operate this button during normal use. This button is used only by qualified service
20
ON/OFF BUTTON persons for maintenance purposes.
Press the button and the air conditioner will Do not operate this button during normal use.
9
start. Press the button again and the air
conditioner will stop.

2.3.2 Signal Receiver Unit

EMERGENCY OPERATION SWITCH
21 This switch is readily used if the remote
controller does not work.
RECEIVER
22 This receives the signals from the remote
controller.
OPERATING INDICATOR LAMP (Red)
This lamp stays lit while the air conditioner
23
runs. It flashes when the air conditioner is in
trouble.
TIMER INDICATOR LAMP (Green)
24
This lamp stays lit while the timer is set.
AIR FILTER CLEANING TIME INDICATOR
25 LAMP (Red)
Lights up when it is time to clean the air filter.
DEFROST OPERATION LAMP (Orange)
26
Lights up when the defrost control has started.
FXFSQ-AR (BRC7M632F-6)
26 25
21
22
23 24
FXDQ-PD/ND, FXMQ-PB/AR (BRC4M61-6)
21
23 25
24 22
26
FXAQ-AR (BRC7N618-6)
23
22
24
25
21
26

2.3.3 How to Check Initial Set Value

Press the INSPECTION button to check the initial set value.
Press the INSPECTION button twice to return to the normal mode.
Initial set value
Indoor unit model type Initial set value

Round flow cassette with sensing FXFSQ-AR 2111
Slim duct (Standard type) FXDQ-PD
FXDQ-ND 2000
Middle-high static pressure duct FXMQ-PB

2000
FXMQ-AR
Wall mounted FXAQ-AR 1010

Main/Sub Setting SiME332106E
3. Main/Sub Setting
Main/Sub setting is necessary when 1 indoor unit is controlled by 2 remote controllers. The
remote controllers are set at factory to Main, so you have to change one remote controller from
Main to Sub. To change a remote controller from Main to Sub, proceed as follows:
3.1 Wired Remote Controller (BRC1E63)

3.1.1 Field Settings
The designation of the main and sub remote controllers can be swapped. Note that this change
requires turning the power OFF and then ON again.
Basic screen
is displayed.
Select Main RC or
Press and hold Press the Cancel Sub RC using the
the Cancel button once. / (Up/Down)
button for 4 buttons, and then
seconds or more. press the
Select Switch Main Sub Menu/Enter button.
Controller and press the Press the
Service Menu/Enter button. Menu/Enter button.
Item 2 is Item 2 is
settings menu displayed. displayed.
Press the Cancel button.
is displayed.
3.1.2 When an Error Occurred

U5: there are 2 main remote controllers when power is turned ON
Change the setting from Main to Sub on the remote controller you want to be Sub.
U8: there are 2 sub remote controllers when power is turned ON
Change the setting from Sub to Main on the remote controller you want to be Main.
How to confirm Main/Sub setting

The Main/Sub setting of the remote controller is displayed on the bottom of the screen while
Checking the connection. Please stand by. is displayed.
Checking the connection.

Please stand by.
Confirm the remote controller
Main/Sub setting after power
Main RC
is turned ON.
How to change Main/Sub setting

You may change the Main/Sub setting of the remote controller while Checking the connection.
Please stand by. is displayed by pressing and holding the Mode Selector button for 4 seconds
or longer.
Error Code: U5
Checking the connection. Checking the connection.
Please stand by. Please stand by. Fan
Press and hold for 4 seconds
or longer the Mode Selector
button of sub remote
Main RC Sub RC
controller side.
Note(s) 1. It is not possible to change the Main/Sub setting from Main to Sub when only one remote
controller is connected.

SiME332106E Main/Sub Setting
2. When 2 remote controllers are being used, it is not possible to change the setting from Main
to Sub if one of the remote controllers is already set as Main.
3.2 Wired Remote Controller (BRC1H81 Series)

When using 1 remote controller
Once the controller is powered, it will automatically start up:
If it is the first and only controller that is connected to the indoor unit, it will automatically get
designated as master controller.
a c
a Outdoor unit
b Indoor unit
c Master remote controller
When using 2 remote controller

For a second controller to get designated as slave controller, manual action is required.
a c d
a Outdoor unit
b Indoor unit
c Master remote controller
d Slave remote controller
1. Connect a second controller.
Result: It will start up automatically.
2. Wait for a U5 or U8 error to appear on the screen.

3. When the U5 or U8 error appears, press and keep it pressed until "2" appears on the
screen.

Main/Sub Setting SiME332106E
Result: The controller is now designated as slave.
Note(s) The following functions are not available for slave controllers:
 Auto operation mode
 Individual airflow direction
 Filter auto clean
 Setback temperature setpoints
 Draft prevention
 Duty rotation
3.3 When Wireless Remote Controller is Used Together

When using both a wired and a wireless remote controller for 1 indoor unit, the wired controller
should be set to Main. Therefore, the Main/Sub switch (SS1) of the signal receiver PCB must be
set to Sub.
Main/Sub Main Sub
Main/Sub switch S S
(SS1) M M
The side painted black indicates

the switch knob position.
Transmitter assembly
S
M
2 3
1
SS1
SS2

SiME332106E Address Setting for Wireless Remote Controller
4. Address Setting for Wireless Remote Controller

If setting multiple wireless remote controllers to operate in one room, perform address setting
for the receiver and the wireless remote controller.
(This includes an individual remote controller control using the group operation.)
(For the wiring for the group operation, please refer to the installation manual attached to the
indoor unit and technical guide.)
4.1 Setting for Signal Receiver PCB

The address for the receiver is set to 1 at the factory. To change the setting, set the wireless
address switch (SS2) on the signal receiver PCB according to the table below.
Unit No. No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
3
Wireless address 3
3
switch (SS2)
2
2
2
1
1
1
The side painted black indicates
the switch knob position.
Transmitter assembly
S
M
2 3
1
SS1
SS2

Address Setting for Wireless Remote Controller SiME332106E
4.2 Setting for BRC4M Series

The address for the wireless remote controller is set to 1 at the factory. To change the setting,
proceed as follows:
1. Hold down the FILTER SIGN RESET button and the INSPECTION button for at least 4
seconds to get the Field Setting mode.
(Indicated in the display area in the figure.)
2. Press the SELECT button and select a multiple setting (A/b). Each time the button is
pressed the display switches between A and b.
3. Press the TEMP buttons to set the address.
Address can be set from 1 to 6, but set it to 1-3 and to same address as the receiver. (The
receiver does not work with address 4-6.)
4. When the RESERVE button is pressed, the setting is confirmed and the usual display
returns.
Address
Multiple setting
2
4

SiME332106E Address Setting for Wireless Remote Controller
4.3 Multiple Settings A/b

The command such as operation mode or temperature setting by this remote controller will be
rejected when the target indoor unit operation is restricted as by an external control such as
centralized control.
Since the setting acceptance is hard to discriminate with such circumstances there are two
setting options provided to enable discriminating by a beeping sound according to the operation:
“A: Standard” or “b: Multi System”. Set the setting according to the customer's intention.
Remote Controller Indoor Unit
Multiple Display on Behavior to the remote controller operation Other than the left
setting remote controller when the functions are restricted as by an
external control.
A: Standard All items Accepts the functions except restricted. Accepts all items
(factory set) displayed. (Sounds one long beep or three short transmitted (Sounds two
beeps) short beeps)
There may be a difference from the indoor The remote controller
unit status with remote controller display. display agrees with the
indoor unit status.
b: Multi Display only <When some restricted functions are
System items included in the transmitted items>
transmitted for a Accepts the functions except restricted.
while. (Sounds one long beep or three short
beeps)
There may be a difference from the indoor
unit status with remote controller display.
<When no restricted function is

included>
Accepts all items transmitted (Sounds two
short beeps)
The remote controller display agrees with
the indoor unit status.

Centralized Control Group No. Setting SiME332106E
5. Centralized Control Group No. Setting

5.1 BRC1E63
Group No. Setting (Group)
Basic screen
is displayed.
Press and hold Press the Cancel
the Cancel button button once.
for 4 seconds or
more. Select Group Address
and then press the
Service Menu/Enter button.
Item 2 is
settings menu Press the Cancel displayed.
is displayed. button once.
Select Group Press the Cancel
Address (Group) button once.
and then press
the Menu/Enter
button.
Item 2 is
displayed.
Select the desired
Group No. using Press the Menu/Enter
the / (Up/Down) button.
buttons, and then
press the
Menu/Enter
button.
Item 2 is
displayed.

SiME332106E Centralized Control Group No. Setting
Group No. Setting (Unit)

Basic screen
is displayed.
Press and hold Press the Cancel
the Cancel button button once.
for 4 seconds or
more. Select Group Address
and then press the
Service Menu/Enter button.
Item 2 is
settings menu Press the Cancel displayed.
is displayed. button once.
Select Group Press the Cancel
Address (Unit) button once.
and then press the
Menu/Enter
button.
Item 2 is
displayed.
Select the desired
Group No. using Press the Menu/Enter
the / (Up/Down) button.
buttons, and then
press the
Menu/Enter
button.
Item 2 is
displayed.

Centralized Control Group No. Setting SiME332106E
5.2 BRC1H81 Series

Group address
To control the system with central control equipment, you need to set addresses for:
 Groups (Group) and/or
 Units (Group (Unit)).
The Group address menu has two levels. You define groups and/or units in the first level, and
set or release addresses for those groups and/or units in the second.
First level
Group (Group): A group is a group of indoor units.
Unit (Group (Unit)): A unit is an individual indoor

unit.
Define the indoor unit for which you want to set an

address.
Second level
Define an address for the indoor unit.
To SET an address, make sure is selected
Apply settings.
To RELEASE an address that was previously set,

change to and then apply settings.

SiME332106E Centralized Control Group No. Setting
5.3 Group No. Setting Example

Outdoor unit
Indoor/Outdoor
F1 F2
F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2
RC
Group Control by Remote Controller
1-00 Main RC RC Sub RC
(automatic unit address)
1-01 1-02
F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2
No Remote Controller
RC
1-03
1-04
Caution When turning the power supply on, the unit may often not accept any operation after all
indications were displayed once for about 1 minute on the liquid crystal display. This is not an
operative fault.

Service Settings Menu, Maintenance Menu SiME332106E
6. Service Settings Menu, Maintenance Menu

6.1 BRC1E63
Operating the remote controller allows service data to be acquired and various services to be
set.
Basic
screen is
displayed.
Press and
hold the Press the Cancel
Cancel button button once.
for 4 seconds Select an item from Service Select the desired item from
or more. settings menu and press the Item 2 sub menu, and
Menu/Enter button. press Menu/Enter button.
Service
Press the Item 2 is Item 3 is
settings menu
Cancel displayed. displayed.
is displayed. Press Cancel button. Press Cancel button.
button.
Press and
hold the
Cancel button
for 4 seconds
or more. Select the desired item from the
Maintenance menu, and then Select the desired Unit No.
Maintenance press the Menu/Enter button. using the / (Up/Down)
Item 2 is
menu is buttons. The corresponding
displayed. data will be displayed.
displayed. Press the Cancel button.

SiME332106E Service Settings Menu, Maintenance Menu
6.1.1 Service Settings Menu

Service settings menu Item 2 Remarks
Test Operation — —
Maintenance Contact None —
Maintenance Contact —, 0 to 9 (in order)
Field Settings Indoor Unit No. —
Mode No. —
First Code No. —
Second Code No. —
Demand Enable/Disable Enable, Disable
Settings 40%, 70%
Start time (by the unit of 30 minutes)
Ending time (by the unit of 30 minutes)
Min setpoints Differential None, Single SP, 0 to 8°C —
Group Address Group Address (Group) Gr Addr. Set
Group Address (Unit) Unit No., Gr Addr. Set
Indoor unit Airnet Address Unit No., Address Set —
Outdoor unit Airnet Address Unit No., Address Set —
Error History RC Error History Unit No., Error, Date, Time
(Up to 10 errors received by the remote
controller can be displayed.)
Indoor Unit Error History Unit No., Error, Date, Time
(Up to 5 errors from the indoor unit error
record can be displayed.)
Indoor Unit Status Unit No. —
Th1 Suction air thermistor
Th2 Heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor
Th3 Heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor
Th4 Discharge air thermistor
Th5 —
Th6 —
Outdoor Unit Status Unit No. —
Th1 Outdoor air thermistor
Th2 Heat exchanger thermistor
Th3 Discharge pipe thermistor
Th4 —
Th5 —
Th6 —
Forced Fan ON Unit No. —
Switch Main Sub controller — —
Filter Indicator — —
Test Filter Auto Clean — —
Brush / Filter Ind — —
Disable Filter Auto Clean No, Yes —

6.1.2 Maintenance Menu

Maintenance Item 2 Remarks
Menu
Model Name Unit No. Select the unit number you want to check.
Indoor unit The model names are displayed.
(A model code may be displayed instead, depending on
Outdoor unit the particular model.)
R-32 mark display BRC1E63 only
Operation Unit No. Select the unit number you want to check.
Hours
Indoor unit operation hours All of these are displayed in hours.
Indoor fan operation hours
Indoor unit energized hours
Outdoor unit operation hours
Outdoor fan 1 operation hours
Outdoor fan 2 operation hours
Outdoor compressor 1
operation hours
Outdoor compressor 2
operation hours
Indoor Unit Unit No. Select the unit number you want to check.
Status
FAN Fan tap
Speed Fan speed (rpm)
FLAP Airflow direction
EV Degree that electronic expansion valve is open (pulse)
MP Drain pump ON/OFF
EH Electric heater ON/OFF
Hu Humidifier ON/OFF
TBF Anti-freezing control ON/OFF
FLOAT FLOAT SWITCH ON/OFF
T1/T2 T1/T2 input from outside ON/OFF
Th1 Suction air thermistor 1
Th2 Indoor liquid pipe thermistor
Th3 Indoor gas pipe thermistor
Th4 Discharge air thermistor 2
Th5 Infrared floor sensor 3
Th6 Control temperature 4
Outdoor Unit Unit No. Select the Unit No. you want to check.
Status
FAN step Fan tap
COMP Compressor power supply frequency (Hz)
EV1 Degree that electronic expansion valve is open (pulse)
SV1 Solenoid valve ON/OFF
Pe Low pressure (MPa), BRC1E63 only
Pc High pressure (MPa), BRC1E63 only
Th1 —
Th2 —
Th3 —
Th4 —
Th5 —
Th6 —
Error Display Display error ON Displays the error on the screen.
Display error OFF Displays neither errors nor warnings.
Display warning ON Displays a warning on the screen if an error occurs.
Display warning OFF No warning is displayed.
Swap Unit Current Unit No. A unit No. can be transferred to another.
No.
Transfer Unit No.

SiME332106E Service Settings Menu, Maintenance Menu
Maintenance
Item 2 Remarks
Menu
Addressed Unit No.: 0 - 15 Select the unit number you want to check.
Sensor
Value Code
00: Remote controller thermistor (°C)
01: Suction air thermistor (°C) 5
02: Heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor (°C)
03: Heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor (°C)
04: Indoor unit address No.
05: Outdoor unit address No.
06: BS unit address No.
07: Zone control address No.
08: Cooling/Heating batch address No.
09: Demand/low-noise address No.
22: Displays human presence detection rate (%) (see 7) in
Area 1 (see 6). Display value × 10%. Displays 15 for
units with no sensing type mounted.
26: Infrared sensor (°C) (See 8). Displays – for units with
no sensing type mounted.
Data The corresponding data will be displayed, based on the
Unit No. and Code selected.
1: Displays suction air temperature after correction for all models.
2: Displays temperature only for applicable models.
3: Displays floor temperature used for control (including correction) when the sensor kit is
connected.
4: Displays control temperature (temperature near the person when the sensor kit is
connected).
5: Displays suction air temperature after correction when the sensor kit is connected.
6: Areas mean four areas shown on the below.
7: For human presence detection rate (%), human motion is recognized by digital output
ranging from 0 to 5 V. (5 V is output when no human presence is detected, and 0 V is output
when human presence is detected.)
4
1 3
2
Detection areas of presence sensor
(Corresponding to the punched mark
80 cm above the floor on the inner frame of the panel:
~)
Reference
(1) 0% detection rate: Human presence is not detected at all.
(2) 25% detection rate: Human presence is detected, but the sensor does not recognize human
presence.
(3) 50% detection rate: The sensor recognizes human presence (small human motion).
(4) 75% detection rate: The sensor recognized human presence (large human motion).
(5) 100% detection rate: The sensor constantly outputs 0 V. Continuing this condition will
display an error.
8: Directly displays a measured value sent from the adaptor PCB.

6.2 BRC1H81 Series

6.2.1 To enter the installer menu
Press and keep it pressed until the information screen appears.

The presence of icons on the information screen depends on operation
status. The controller may display more or less icons than are indicated
here.
From the information screen, press and simultaneously and keep

them pressed until you enter the installer menu.
6.2.2 Installer menu

Category Icon Settings Category Icon settings
Screen Brightness Miscellaneous Group
settings settings address and
Airnet
address
Contrast Extremal
input
interlock
Status Intensity Force fan

indicator ON
settings
Field Indoor unit Switch

settings field settings Cooking/
Heating
master
Remote Information
controller
field settings

SiME332106E
Part 4
Functions and Control
1. Operation Flowchart..............................................................................50
2. Stop Control ..........................................................................................51
2.1 Abnormal Shutdown ...............................................................................51
2.2 When System is in Stop Control.............................................................51
3. Standby Control ....................................................................................52
3.1 Restart Standby......................................................................................52
3.2 Crankcase Heater Control......................................................................52
4. Startup Control ......................................................................................53
4.1 Cooling Startup Control ..........................................................................53
4.2 Heating Startup Control..........................................................................53
5. Normal Control ......................................................................................54
5.1 List of Functions in Normal Control ........................................................54
5.2 Compressor Control ...............................................................................55
5.3 Compressor Capacity Control ................................................................56
5.4 Compressor Step Control.......................................................................57
5.6 Step Control of Outdoor Fans ................................................................58
6. Protection Control .................................................................................59
6.1 High Pressure Protection Control...........................................................59
6.2 Low Pressure Protection Control............................................................60
6.3 Discharge Pipe Protection Control .........................................................60
6.4 Inverter Protection Control .....................................................................61
6.5 Heating Operation Prohibition ................................................................64
6.6 Overload Protection Control ...................................................................64
7. Special Control......................................................................................65
7.1 Pump Down Residual Control ................................................................65
7.2 Oil Return Control...................................................................................65
7.3 Defrost Control .......................................................................................67
8. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit) .............................................................68
8.1 Set Temperature and Control Target Temperature................................68
8.2 Thermostat Control.................................................................................69
8.3 Automatic Airflow Rate Control ..............................................................72
8.4 Airflow Direction Control.........................................................................73
8.5 Auto Draft Reducing Control (FXFSQ-AR only) .....................................74
8.6 Eco Full Automatic Control (FXFSQ-AR only)........................................74
8.7 Drain Pump Control................................................................................75
8.8 Freeze-Up Prevention Control................................................................77
8.9 Dew Condensation Prevention Control ..................................................78
8.11 Circulation Airflow (FXFSQ-AR only) .....................................................80
8.12 Hot Start Control (In Heating Operation Only)........................................81
8.13 Heater Control (Optional PCB KRP1B series is required.).....................82
Part 4 Functions and Control 49

Operation Flowchart SiME332106E
1. Operation Flowchart
For detailed description of each function in the flow below, refer to the details on related function
on the following pages.
Stop control
(1) Abnormal shutdown
(2) When system is in stop control
Special control
Standby control
(1) Restart standby
(2) Crankcase heater control
(1) Pump down residual control
(note 2)
Thermostat ON
Startup control
(include pressure equalization before startup)
(1) Cooling startup control
(2) Heating startup control
Thermostat OFF
Abnormality
End of
startup
control
Normal control
(1) List of functions in normal control
(2) Compressor control
(3) Compressor capacity control
(4) Compressor step control
(5) Electronic expansion valve control Conditions met for oil return
(6) Step control of outdoor unit fans (2) Oil return control (note 1)
Protection control
(1) High pressure protection control
(2) Low pressure protection control Conditions met for defrosting
(3) Defrost control (note 1)
(3) Discharge pipe protection control
(4) Inverter protection control
(5) Heating operation prohibition
(6) Overload protection control
Note(s) 1. If the indoor unit stops or the thermostat turns OFF while in oil return control or defrost
control, pump down residual operation is performed on completion of the oil return operation
or defrost control.
2. Not performed during cooling mode.
50 Part 4 Functions and Control

SiME332106E Stop Control
2. Stop Control
2.1 Abnormal Shutdown
In order to protect compressors, if any of the abnormal state occurs, the system will make "stop
with thermostat OFF" and the error will be determined according to the number of retry times.
(Refer to Error Codes and Descriptions on page 153 for the items to determine the error.)
2.2 When System is in Stop Control

The four way valve retains the condition before it was stopped.

Standby Control SiME332106E
3. Standby Control
3.1 Restart Standby
Used to forcedly stop the compressor for a period of 5 minutes, in order to prevent the frequent
ON/OFF of the compressor and equalize the pressure within the refrigerant system.
In addition, the outdoor fan carry out the residual operation for a while to accelerate pressure
equalizing and to suppress melting of the refrigerant to the evaporator.
3.2 Crankcase Heater Control

In order to prevent the refrigerant from melting in the compressor oil in the stopped mode, this
mode is used to control the crankcase heater.
• Ta 26°C

• Ta > 26°C
& • Time-up
• V2 < (Ta – Ta_30)/30 < V1
OR • V2 < (Ta – Ta_60)/60 < V1

• Ta > 26°C
& • (Ta – Ta_30)/30 V1
• (Ta – Ta_60)/60 V1

Crankcase heater Crankcase heater
OFF ON
• Ta > 26°C

& • Time-up
• V2 < (Ta – Ta_30)/30 < V1
OR • V2 < (Ta – Ta_60)/60 < V1

• Ta > 26°C
& • (Ta – Ta_30)/30 V2
• (Ta – Ta_60)/60 V2

 Ta_30, Ta_60: Outdoor air temperature 30 minutes before and 60 minutes before,
respectively.
V1 V2
2Y350 0.05664 –0.15151
2Y420 0.03021 –0.08081

SiME332106E Startup Control
4. Startup Control
This control is used to equalize the pressure in the front and back of the compressor prior to the
startup of the compressor, thus reducing startup loads. Furthermore, the inverter is turned ON
to charge the capacitor.
To avoid stresses to the compressor due to oil return or else after the startup, the following
control is made and the position of the four way valve is also determined.
Pc : High pressure sensor detection value
Pe : Low pressure sensor detection value
Ta : Outdoor air temperature
Te : Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature
Td : Discharge temperature
4.1 Cooling Startup Control

Frequency step up
5 sec. interval
0 Hz
Compressor (M1C)
480 pulse (fully open)
Electronic expansion 0 pulse
valve (Main)
(Y1E) 480 pulse (fully open)
valve (Refrigerant jacket)
(Y3E)

valve (Injection)
(Y2E) Ta < 20°C: OFF +1step/15 sec. (Pc > 2.16 MPa)
Step4 Ta 20°C: Step4 –1step/15 sec. (Pc < 1.77 MPa)
Inverter fan (M1F)
& INV 20 rps

Pc – Pe 0.42 MPa & Te < 10°C
Te < Th2() – 10
OR
& INV > 20 rps Th2 in "Pre-pressure
Pc – Pe 0.32 MPa equalization"
4.2 Heating Startup Control

+15 Hz/20 sec. Normal control
Min.
step
0 Hz 15 sec.
Compressor (M1C)
T (Ta – Te) control

valve (main) (Y1E)
Step 7Y
Step 4
Fan motor (M1F)
15 min. elapsed 45 sec. elapsed

OR & Four way valve ON OR & 10 sec. elapsed
Td – Te > 10°C Inverter frequency matched

Normal Control SiME332106E
5. Normal Control
5.1 List of Functions in Normal Control
Tc : High pressure equivalent saturation temperature
Cooling
Electric
Part Name RXYMQ-A Function
Symbol
Compressor motor M1C  PI control by Te target.
Fan motor M1F  Fan speed 9 steps to keep minimum Tc target 41°C.
Electronic expansion valve 0 pulse: closed (thermostat OFF)
(Main) Y1E  0-480 pulses: open (thermostat ON)
Electronic expansion valve 0-480 pulse at compressor ON
(Injection) Y2E 
Electronic expansion valve 480 pulse

Y3E 
(Refrigerant jacket)
Electronic expansion valve Y4E  Minimum pulse
Four way valve Y1S  OFF
: equipped
—: not equipped
Heating
Part Name Electric RXYMQ-A Function

Symbol
Compressor motor M1C  PI control by Tc target.
Fan motor Fan step 7Y (normal Tc & Te) or Fan step 8 (high
M1F 
load).
Electronic expansion valve 0 pulse: closed (thermostat OFF),
(Main) Y1E  0-480 pulses: SH control 5K
Electronic expansion valve Y2E  0-480 pulses at compressor ON: based on indoor
(Injection) demand.
Electronic expansion valve Y3E  0 pulse: closed
(Refrigerant jacket) 0-480 pulse: open (when fin temperature increases)
Electronic expansion valve Minimum pulse
Y4E 
Four way valve Y1S  ON
: equipped
—: not equipped

SiME332106E Normal Control
5.2 Compressor Control

In order to provide a steady capacity, the compressor capacity is controlled to achieve
temperature Te (or Tc) during cooling (or heating) operation.
During cooling (or heating) operation
The compressor capacity is controlled so Te (or Tc) approaches TeS (or TcS) (target value of
temperature).
1. VRTsmart Control
 When all the connected indoor units are VRTsmart control applicable models
Applicable models: FXFSQ-AR, FXDQ-PD, FXDQ-ND, FXMQ-PB, FXAQ-AR
The required capacity is calculated based on the operation condition of each individual indoor
unit and this data is transmitted to the outdoor unit. The outdoor unit adjusts the refrigerant
temperature of the whole system to an adequate value according to the indoor unit that needs
the most capacity.
In case of target evaporation (or condensation) temperature adjustment, first the capacity is
adjusted by changing the indoor unit airflow to L tap. If the capacity is still too much, the target
evaporation (or condensation) temperature is elevated further to adjust.
2. VRT Control
 When one or more of the connected indoor units are not VRTsmart control applicable
models
If the required capacity becomes low (or high) in all indoor units (Room temperature Th1 - set
temperature), the target evaporation (or condensation) temperature is elevated further to adjust.
In the outdoor unit, the difference of temperature (∆T) in all indoor units is checked and the set
temperature is changed. Unlike VRTsmart control, there is no airflow control of the indoor units.
3. Te fix Control (for cooling)

The target evaporation temperature is not changed.
Te value (Set in mode 2-8)
Standard
(Factory setting) High
6 7 8 9 10 11
Te: Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature (°C)
TeS: Te target value (varies according to Te setting, compressor operation frequency, etc.)
4. Tc fix Control (for heating)

The target condensation temperature is not changed.
Tc value (Set in mode 2-9)
High
Low Standard (Factory setting)
41 43 46
Tc: High pressure equivalent saturation temperature
TcS: Tc target value (varies according to Tc setting)

5.3 Compressor Capacity Control

Capacity steps
The compressor rotation speed is changed according to the control pressure.
 Cooling: suction pressure sensor value is converted into evaporation saturated temperature
(relation between pressure and evaporating temperature based on characteristics of
refrigerant R-410A). For detailed explanation refer to chapter field settings (Details of
Setting Mode (Mode 2) on page 122 and installation manual outdoor chapter Energy saving
and optimum operation).
 Initial selection is made between Automatic, Fixed or High sensible.
 During operation, the outdoor target evaporating temperature can be changed based on
the selected sub function, taking indoor load into account.
 Heating: discharge pressure sensor value is converted into condensing saturation
temperature.
 Initial selection is made between Automatic, Fixed, or High sensible.
 During operation, the outdoor target condensing temperature can be changed based on
the selected sub function, taking indoor load into account.
 The initial target saturated temperature can be changed. For details refer to Details of
Setting Mode (Mode 2) on page 122 for Cooling: Te set based on field setting 2-8, for
heating: Tc set based on field setting 2-9.
 During operation, outdoor control will take into account the pressure drop so that at indoor
units, the preset target temperature is reached (average). The estimated pressure drop is
calculated based on:
 Pressure drop characteristics found during test-operation outdoor (step 7). At several
evaporating temperatures, outdoor control stores difference between outdoor
evaporating temperature and average of indoor heat exchanger (indoor evaporating
temperature).
 To have judgment of gas speed in main suction pipe, control takes the capacity step of
the outdoor unit into account. In function of pressure drop characteristics at the different
compressor capacity steps, control concludes the category of system pipe lay out (long,
medium, short).
 Target Te outdoor (cooling) = Te set – estimated pressure drop – A.
 Target Tc outdoor (heating) = Tc set + estimated pressure drop + A.
 Correction factor A depends on the absolute value of the difference between indoor air inlet
temperature and a set temperature after startup period.

SiME332106E Normal Control
5.4 Compressor Step Control

 The actual rotation speed per second of the compressor (rps) depends on the type of
compressor.
 The control can skip a number of steps to reach faster the target saturation temperature.
RXYMQ4AVMK RXYMQ4-6AYFK
Frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz)
Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No.
Cooling Heating Cooling Heating Cooling Heating Cooling Heating
1 27.0 27.0 67 117.2 117.2 1 22.4 22.4 67 124.6 124.6
2 27.6 27.6 68 119.4 119.4 2 23.1 23.1 68 127.3 127.3
3 28.1 28.1 69 121.5 121.5 3 23.8 23.8 69 130.0 130.0
4 28.8 28.8 70 123.5 123.5 4 24.7 24.7 70 132.4 132.4
5 29.7 29.7 71 125.7 125.7 5 25.8 25.8 71 134.7 134.7
6 30.6 30.6 72 127.8 127.8 6 26.9 26.9 72 136.7 136.7
7 31.5 31.5 73 130.2 130.2 7 28.0 28.0 73 138.7 138.7
8 32.3 32.3 74 132.5 132.5 8 29.4 29.4 74 140.9 140.9
9 32.8 32.8 75 135.0 135.0 9 30.7 30.7 75 143.4 143.4
10 33.5 33.5 76 137.4 137.4 10 32.1 32.1 76 145.9 145.9
11 34.2 34.2 77 139.7 139.7 11 33.6 33.6 77 148.6 148.6
12 35.1 35.1 78 142.2 142.2 12 35.0 35.0 78 151.2 151.2
13 36.0 36.0 79 144.8 144.8 13 36.1 36.1 79 153.7 153.7
14 36.9 36.9 80 147.5 147.5 14 37.0 37.0 80 156.4 156.4
15 37.7 37.7 81 150.3 150.3 15 38.1 38.1 81 159.1 159.1
16 38.2 38.2 82 153.0 153.0 16 39.2 39.2 82 162.0 162.0
17 38.6 38.6 83 155.7 155.7 17 40.1 40.1 83 164.9 164.9
18 39.1 39.1 84 158.4 158.4 18 40.8 40.8 84 168.0 168.0
19 39.6 39.6 85 161.3 161.3 19 41.7 41.7 85 171.0 171.0
20 40.4 40.4 86 164.4 164.4 20 42.6 42.6 86 173.9 173.9
21 41.3 41.3 87 — 167.4 21 43.7 43.7 87 177.0 177.0
22 42.2 42.2 88 — 170.3 22 44.8 44.8 88 180.1 180.1
23 43.2 43.2 89 — 173.4 23 46.0 46.0 89 183.5 183.5
24 44.3 44.3 90 — 176.4 24 46.9 46.9 90 187.1 187.1
25 45.6 45.6 25 47.5 47.5 91 190.4 190.4
26 46.8 46.8 26 48.0 48.0 92 193.8 193.8
27 47.9 47.9 27 48.7 48.7 93 197.2 197.2
28 49.0 49.0 28 49.3 49.3 94 200.8 200.8
29 50.1 50.1 29 50.2 50.2 95 204.6 204.6
30 51.3 51.3 30 51.3 51.3 96 208.4 208.4
31 52.8 52.8 31 52.5 52.5 97 212.0 212.0
32 54.2 54.2 32 53.8 53.8 98 215.8 215.8
33 55.8 55.8 33 55.2 55.2 99 219.6 219.6
34 57.5 57.5 34 56.7 56.7 100 223.2 223.2
35 58.9 58.9 35 58.3 58.3 101 227.0 227.0
36 60.3 60.3 36 59.6 59.6 102 231.0 231.0
37 62.0 62.0 37 61.0 61.0 103 235.2 235.2
38 63.8 63.8 38 62.3 62.3 104 239.7 239.7
39 65.7 65.7 39 63.9 63.9 105 244.2 244.2
40 67.5 67.5 40 65.7 65.7 106 248.5 248.5
41 69.3 69.3 41 67.5 67.5 107 252.5 252.5
42 71.1 71.1 42 69.5 69.5 108 — 256.3
43 72.9 72.9 43 71.5 71.5 109 — 260.3
44 74.7 74.7 44 73.3 73.3 110 — 264.6
45 76.5 76.5 45 75.1 75.1 111 — 268.8
46 78.3 78.3 46 77.1 77.1
47 80.1 80.1 47 79.3 79.3
48 81.9 81.9 48 81.8 81.8
49 83.7 83.7 49 84.0 84.0
50 85.5 85.5 50 86.3 86.3
51 87.3 87.3 51 88.5 88.5
52 89.1 89.1 52 90.8 90.8
53 90.9 90.9 53 93.0 93.0
54 92.7 92.7 54 95.2 95.2
55 94.5 94.5 55 97.5 97.5
56 96.3 96.3 56 99.7 99.7
57 98.1 98.1 57 102.0 102.0
58 100.1 100.1 58 104.2 104.2
59 102.3 102.3 59 106.4 106.4
60 104.4 104.4 60 108.7 108.7
61 106.4 106.4 61 110.9 110.9
62 108.2 108.2 62 113.2 113.2
63 109.8 109.8 63 115.4 115.4
64 111.5 111.5 64 117.6 117.6
65 113.3 113.3 65 119.9 119.9
66 115.2 115.2 66 122.1 122.1

5.5 Electronic Expansion Valve Control

Electronic expansion valve Y1E
 Cooling: electronic expansion valve is used only at fully closed or fully open condition:
 Compressor(s) OFF: fully closed (0 pulse).
 Compressor ON:
 Fully open (480 pulses)
 Normally, the control is used to reduce the PCB temperature.
Compressor
0 Hz
Main 480
Y1E pulses
0
 Heating: electronic expansion valve is used in PID control suction superheat:

 Compressor(s) OFF: fully closed (0 pulse).
 Compressor ON:
 At startup: closed (check suction pressure drops)
 Modulated opening by:
- Suction superheat = accumulator inlet °C – evaporating temperature.
- Discharge superheat = discharge compressor °C – condensing temperature.
- Preventive change when compressor capacity step changes.
- Limited opening when condensing temperate exceeds target condensing.
Compressor
0 Hz
Main 480
Y1E pulses
0
5.6 Step Control of Outdoor Fans

Used to control the revolutions of outdoor fans in the steps listed in table below, according to
condition changes.
Fan revolutions (rpm)
Step No. RXYMQ4AVMK RXYMQ4-6AYFK
Cooling Heating Cooling Heating
0 0 0 0 0
1 200 200 440 440
2 250 250 440 440
3 300 300 440 440
4 360 370 440 440
5 420 440 480 550
6 490 515 550 660
7Y 560 590 650 780
7X 630 670 830 940
8 700 750 960* 1,060
* When the system detects that outdoor air temperature (Ta) reaches 41°C or more, the control
of fan revolutions will be changed to 1,060 rpm automatically.
Note(s)  Table shown above is for external static pressure level 0. In case of high external static
pressure, the unit will re-adjust fan revolutions automatically and values may differ.
 When capacity priority mode is set, values may differ.

SiME332106E Protection Control
6. Protection Control
6.1 High Pressure Protection Control
This high pressure protection control is used to prevent the activation of protection devices due
to abnormal increase of high pressure and to protect compressors against the transient
increase of high pressure.
Cooling
The following control is performed in the entire system.
Normal control
Pc: High pressure sensor detection
Pc > 3.55 MPa Pc < 3.04 MPa value for each outdoor unit.
Reduce compressor capacity step
Pc > 3.72 MPa

When occurring 3 times within 40
minutes, high pressure switch is
High pressure standby activated without high pressure standby,
thus outputting the error code E3.
Heating
The following control is performed in the entire system.
Normal operation
Pc > 3.04 MPa Pc < 2.89 MPa
Pc > 3.72 MPa

High pressure standby minutes, high pressure switch is
activated without high pressure standby,
thus outputting the error code E3.

Protection Control SiME332106E
6.2 Low Pressure Protection Control

This low pressure protection control is used to protect compressors against the transient
decrease of low pressure.
Cooling
Because of common low pressure, the following control is performed in the system.
Normal control
Pe < 0.35 MPa Pe > 0.40 MPa Pe: Low pressure sensor detection
value for master unit.
Pe < 0.07 MPa

Low pressure standby
minutes, the error code E4 is output.
Heating
The following control is performed in the system.
Normal operation
Pe < 0.17 MPa Pe > 0.23 MPa
Pe < 0.07 MPa
Low pressure standby When occurring 3 times within 60

minutes, the error code E4 is output.
6.3 Discharge Pipe Protection Control

This discharge pipe protection control is used to protect the compressor internal temperature
against an error or transient increase of discharge pipe temperature.
Normal control
Discharge pipe Discharge pipe

temperature > 108°C temperature < 95°C
Discharge pipe temperature > 135°C

Discharge pipe temperature standby minutes, the error code F3 is output.
(Sub code - 01)

6.4 Inverter Protection Control

Inverter current protection control and radiation fin temperature control are performed to prevent
tripping due to an abnormality, or transient inverter overcurrent, and fin temperature increase.
Inverter overcurrent protection control by primary current [CTi1]
Normal control
A B
Reduce compressor step
Cooling
Primary current [CTi1] (A)

Condition
Ta < 43 °C Ta ≥ 43 °C
A > 27.0 > CTi1 in graph A
B ≤ 25.0 ≤ CTi1 in graph B
Heating
Condition Primary current [CTi1] (A)

A > 26.5
B ≤ 24.5
Graph A
26
24
22
20
18
CTi1 (A)
16
14
12
10
8
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
Ta (°C)

Graph B
24
22
20
18
16
CTi1 (A)
14
12
10
6
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
Ta (°C)
Inverter overcurrent protection control by secondary current [CTi2]
Normal control
Compressor max step

A D
OR Next compressor rps is lower than current rps
&
E
Set current step as max limit
Reduce compressor step
Inverter current standby
Cooling
Condition Secondary current [CTi2] (A)

A > 17.5 (90 sec) or > 18.0
B > 18.5 (90 sec) or > 19.0
C > 22.1
D ≤ 14.5
E ≤ 18.5
Heating
Condition Secondary current [CTi2] (A)

A > 18.0 (90 sec) or > 18.5
B > 19.0 (90 sec) or > 19.5
C > 22.1
D ≤ 15.0
E ≤ 19.0

Radiation fin temperature control

This control is performed for each compressor.
Normal control
A B
Reduce compressor capacity

Fin temperature standby minutes, the error code L4 is output.
Cooling
Condition All compressors

A more than 91 °C
B less than 89 °C
C more than 110 °C
Heating
Condition All compressors

A more than 86.5 °C
B less than 83.5 °C
C more than 110 °C

6.5 Heating Operation Prohibition

 When outdoor air temperature becomes high, outdoor unit cannot perform heating because:
 Low pressure sensor can give pressure value above upper limit of sensor: error JC.
 Mechanical internal load on compressor increases.
 Low compression ratio can result in insufficient compressor internal oil lubrication.
 Heating is disabled when outdoor air temperature rises above 27°C.
 Forced thermostat-OFF indoor units.
 Outdoor fan operates at step 1.
 Heating returns available when outdoor air temperature drops below 25°C.
6.6 Overload Protection Control

Prevent ignition due to abnormal heating of the compressor when it becomes damaged or
abnormal operation.
Normal control
Compressor body temp. Compressor body temp. 110 °C

&
125 °C Remote controller resets.
Overload standby
(Error code F3 is output)

SiME332106E Special Control
7. Special Control
7.1 Pump Down Residual Control
To avoid refrigerant emigration when outdoor unit stops operation (thermostat or safety), all
electronic expansion valves are closed.
7.2 Oil Return Control

In order to prevent the compressor from running out of oil, the oil return control is conducted to
recover oil that has flowed out from the compressor to the system side.
Ts1: Suction pipe temperature detected by thermistor R3T
Starting conditions
 Oil return control is not conducted before 2 hours have elapsed from the activation of power
supply.
 After 2 hours have elapsed, oil return control starts when the following item meets the
reference value.
• Total amount of oil discharged from the compressor
(The total amount of oil discharged from the compressor is computed from Tc, Te, and
compressor loads.)
 Oil return control starts every 8 hours of cumulative operation of the compressor, even if the
reference value is not met.
7.2.1 Oil Return Control in Cooling Operation

Part Name Electric RXYMQ-A Function
Symbol
Compressor motor M1C  Capacity step PI control
Fan motor M1F  TC control
Electronic expansion valve (Main) Y1E  480 pulse
Electronic expansion valve (Injection) Y2E  0 pulse
(Refrigerant jacket) Y3E 

(Refrigerant auto charge) Y4E 
Four way valve Y1S  ON

Ending conditions
· A lapse of 3 minutes.
& · Ts1–Te < 3°C
OR · A lapse of 6 minutes
while the frequency
is more than that of
oil return control.
Indoor unit actuator Cooling oil return control

Thermostat ON unit Remote controller setting
Fan Non-operating unit OFF
Thermostat OFF unit Remote controller setting
Thermostat ON unit Normal control
Non-operating unit 224 pulse
Thermostat OFF unit Normal control with forced thermostat
ON

Special Control SiME332106E
7.2.2 Oil Return Control in Heating Operation

Electric
Symbol
Compressor motor M1C  RXYMQ4AVMK: 70 rps
RXYMQ4-6AYFK: 79 rps
Fan motor M1F  With high pressure
OFF ←→ Step 4 ←→ Step 6
Electronic expansion valve 480 pulses
Y1E 
(Main)
Y2E 
(Injection)
(Refrigerant jacket) Y3E  (0-480 pulse, when radiation fin temperature
increases)
Y4E 
Ending conditions
• A lapse of 6 min.
OR • Ts–Te < 3°C
Indoor unit actuator Heating oil return control

Thermostat ON unit OFF
Fan Stopping unit OFF
Thermostat OFF unit OFF
Thermostat ON unit Oil return EV opening degree
Electronic expansion valve Stopping unit Oil return EV opening degree
Thermostat OFF unit Oil return EV opening degree

SiME332106E Special Control
7.3 Defrost Control

To defrost the outdoor heat exchanger while in evaporator, the defrost control is conducted to
recover the heating capacity.
Starting conditions
 Defrost control is not conducted before 40 minutes have elapsed from the start of heating
operation.
 After 40 minutes have elapsed, defrost control starts when the following items meet the
reference values.
 Heat transfer coefficient of the outdoor heat exchanger
(The heat transfer coefficient of the outdoor heat exchanger is computed from Tc, Te,
and compressor loads.)
 Outdoor heat exchanger deicer temperature (Tb)
 Defrost control starts every 2 hours, even if the reference values are not met.
Electric
Symbol
Compressor motor RXYMQ4AVMK: 70 rps
M1C 
RXYMQ4-6AYFK: 79 rps
Fan motor With high pressure
M1F 
OFF ←→ Step 4 ←→ Step 6
Electronic expansion valve Y1E  480 pulses
(Main)
Y2E 
(Injection)
Electronic expansion valve Y3E  0 pulse: closed
(Refrigerant jacket) 0-480 pulse: open (when fin temperature increases)
Electronic expansion valve Minimum pulse
(Refrigerant auto charge) Y4E 

Ending conditions
A lapse of 15 minutes
OR Tb>11°C continues for 30 seconds or more
Indoor unit actuator During defrost

Thermostat ON unit OFF
Fan Stopping unit OFF
Thermostat OFF unit OFF
Thermostat ON unit Defrost EV opening degree
Electronic expansion valve Stopping unit Defrost EV opening degree
Thermostat OFF unit Defrost EV opening degree

Outline of Control (Indoor Unit) SiME332106E
8. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)

8.1 Set Temperature and Control Target Temperature
8.1.1 Without Optional Infrared Floor Sensor
The relationship between remote controller set temperature and control target temperature is
described below.
 When the suction air thermistor is used for controlling (Factory setting), the control target
temperature is determined as follows to prevent insufficient heating in heating operation.
Control target temperature = remote controller set temperature + 2°C.
 The temperature difference for cooling  heating mode switching is 5°C.
 The above also applies to automatic operation.
 When setting the suction air thermistor (Factory setting)
Temperature 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35°C
Remote controller set temperature

Cooling
Control target temperature
Heating
 When using the remote controller thermistor (Field setting is required)
Temperature 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35°C

Cooling
Heating
Examples are given to illustrate a control target temperature that satisfies the remote controller
set temperature.
8.1.2 With Optional Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor

The relationship between remote controller set temperature and control target temperature is
described below.
 The temperature difference for cooling  heating mode switching is 5°C.
 When using the floor temperature as the control target, the remote controller set temperature
is equal to the actual control target temperature in heating operation.
 The above also applies to automatic operation.
 When setting the suction air thermistor (Factory setting)
Temperature 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 ˚C

Cooling
Heating
 When using the remote controller thermistor (Field setting is required)
Temperature 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 ˚C

Cooling
Heating
Examples are given to illustrate a control target temperature that satisfies the remote controller
set temperature.

SiME332106E Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)
Regarding control target temperature

When using the infrared presence/floor sensor, the temperature around people will be treated
as the control target temperature for operation.
What is the temperature around people?

The temperature around people refers to the temperature of the living space, obtained from the
temperature around the ceiling and the temperature underfoot. The temperature is calculated
using the detected values of the suction air thermistor and the infrared presence/floor sensor.
It is difficult to use only suction air temperature control for underfoot air conditioning.
8.2 Thermostat Control

8.2.1 Without Optional Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor
The thermostat ON/OFF condition is determined by the difference between the remote
controller set temperature and the actual detected room temperature (1).
 Normal operation
 Cooling operation
ΔT ≤ –1.0°C
Normal operation
Thermostat OFF
(Thermostat ON)
ΔT ≥ +1.0°C
 Heating operation
T  1.0°C
Normal operation
Thermostat OFF
(Thermostat ON)
T  –1.0°C
 Dry operation
 When Tro  24.5°C
Tr < Tro – 1.0°C
Dry operation Thermostat OFF
Tr > Tro + 1.0°C
 When Tro > 24.5°C

Tr < Tro – 1.5°C
Tr > Tro + 0.5°C
: Description of symbols
ΔT = Detected room temperature – Remote controller set temperature
Tro: Detected room temperature at the start of dry operation
Tr: Determined by the room temperature detected by the thermistor
Note(s) 1: The thermistor used to detect room temperature is according to the field setting 10(20)-2.

8.2.2 With Optional Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor

The thermostat ON/OFF condition is determined by the difference between the remote
controller set temperature and the detected temperature around people.
 Normal operation
 Cooling operation
ΔT ≤ –1.0°C
Normal operation
Thermostat OFF
(Thermostat ON)
ΔT ≥ +1.0°C
 Heating operation
T  1.0°C
Normal operation
Thermostat OFF
(Thermostat ON)
T  –1.0°C
 Dry operation
 When Tro ≤ 24.5°C
Tr < Tro – 1.0°C
Tr > Tro + 1.0°C
 When Tro > 24.5°C

Tr < Tro – 1.5°C
Tr > Tro + 0.5°C
: Description of symbols
ΔT = Detected room temperature – Remote controller set temperature
Tro: Detected room temperature at the start of dry operation
Tr: Determined by the room temperature detected by the thermistor
Control range of temperature around people

When the floor temperature is very low, operation using the temperature around people may
cause the suction air temperature to operate outside of use range.
To avoid the above condition, a limit based on the suction air temperature is set for the use
range of the temperature around people.
 Cooling operation
 When the floor temperature is lower than suction air thermistor detection temperature (R1T),
R1T will be treated as the control target temperature for operation.
 When the temperature around people is 15°C or lower, R1T will be treated as the control
temperature for operation.
 Heating operation
 When the floor temperature is higher than suction air thermistor detection temperature
(R1T), R1T will be treated as the control target temperature in operation.
 When the temperature around people is 33°C or higher, R1T will be treated as the control
temperature for operation.

8.2.3 Thermostat Control with Operation Mode Set to "AUTO"

When the operation mode is set to "AUTO" on the remote controller, the system will conduct the
temperature control shown below.
Furthermore, setting changes of the differential value (D°C) can be made according to
information in the Field Settings from Remote Controller on page 84 and later.
Mode First code Second code No.

Description
No. No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
12 0°C
4 Automatic mode differential 1°C 2°C 3°C 4°C 5°C 6°C 7°C
(22) 
: Factory setting
Set heating temperature Set cooling temperature

(A – D)°C A°C
D°C
Cooling thermostat ON
Cooling thermostat OFF
Display change
Cooling → Heating
Display change
Heating → Cooling
Heating thermostat OFF

Heating thermostat ON
3°C
(D
2 + 2)°C
(Ex.) When automatic cooling temperature is set to 27°C:

Differential value: 0°C Differential value set to 4°C
Set cooling/ Set heating temp. Set cooling temp.
heating temp.
23°C 27°C
27°C
25°C 30°C Cooling mode 26°C Cooling mode
Control temp. Control temp.
Heating mode Heating mode
Differential value set to 1°C Differential value set to 5°C

Set heating temp. Set cooling temp. Set heating temp. Set cooling temp.
26°C 27°C 22°C 27°C
24.5°C 29°C Cooling mode 22.5°C 25°C Cooling mode

25°C 27°C 21°C 27°C
24°C 28°C Cooling mode 22°C 24°C Cooling mode

24°C 27°C 20°C 27°C
23.5°C Cooling mode 21.5°C 23°C Cooling mode

8.3 Automatic Airflow Rate Control

The automatic airflow rate control (Five steps from H to L) is based on the difference between
control target temperature and set temperature.
Conditions When airflow rate is set Automatic airflow rate
Cooling Thermostat ON The fan tap is determined
Set by the difference between control target
temperature and set temperature.
Thermostat OFF The fan keeps rotating at
Set (1) the speed as just before
the thermostat off (1)
Heating Thermostat ON The fan tap is determined
Set by the difference between control target
temperature and set temperature.
Thermostat OFF LL LL
Program dry Thermostat ON L L
Thermostat OFF OFF OFF
Fan Set M
Stop OFF OFF
1. LL airflow for FXFSQ-AR
Fan tap <Change in airflow rate under
automatic airflow rate control>
Except for FXFSQ-AR,

HM and ML taps appear
only during the auto
airflow rate control
operation.
H (For FXFSQ-AR,
HM HM and ML taps can be
M manually set with remote
ML controller.)
L
Small Difference between control target Large

temperature and set temperature

8.4 Airflow Direction Control

8.4.1 Without Optional Infrared Floor Sensor
Refer to the table below for controlling the horizontal flap (or the vertical flap) for airflow direction
adjustment.
Conditions FXAQ-AR
Cooling Direction set Thermostat ON Set
Thermostat OFF Set
Swing set Thermostat ON Swing
Thermostat OFF Swing
Program dry Direction set Thermostat ON Set
Thermostat OFF Set
Thermostat OFF Swing
Heating Direction set Thermostat ON Set
Thermostat OFF Horizontal (P0)
Thermostat OFF Horizontal (P0)
Fan Direction set Set
Swing set Swing
8.4.2 With Optional Infrared Floor Sensor

The model can control airflow direction automatically by the difference between suction air
temperature and floor temperature.
FXFSQ-AR
Conditions Automatic airflow rate and eco
When airflow direction is set full automatic control
Cooling Direction set Thermostat ON Set Automatic (P0 or P1)
Thermostat OFF Set Automatic (P0 or P1)
Swing set Thermostat ON Swing —
Thermostat OFF Swing —
Program dry Direction set Thermostat ON Set Automatic (P0 or P1)
Thermostat OFF Set Automatic (P0 or P1)
Thermostat OFF Swing —
Heating Direction set Thermostat ON Set Automatic (P3 or P4)
Thermostat OFF Horizontal (P0) Horizontal (P0)
Thermostat OFF Horizontal (P0) —
Fan Direction set Set Horizontal (P0)
Swing set Swing —
Operation in auto airflow direction control when cooling

The difference between suction air
and floor temperatures is large.
P0 (Horizontal) P1
and floor temperatures is small.
Operation in auto airflow direction control when heating

and floor temperatures is large.
P3 P4 (Downward)
and floor temperatures is small.

Indoor unit
P0
P1
P2
P4 P3
Flap position AIR

(Horizontal view)
8.5 Auto Draft Reducing Control (FXFSQ-AR only)

In the case where both this control is activated and auto airflow direction control (eco full
automatic control) is set, when human presence is detected, the airflow direction is
automatically set to horizontal (P0) to reduce discomfort by direct airflow.
This control works for each airflow outlet individually.
Note: This function is inoperative for the airflow outlet where an individual airflow direction is set.
Absence continues for 5 mins Airflow direction by auto airflow direction

P0 (horizontal) Cooling: P0 or P1
When presence is detected Heating: P3 or P4
8.6 Eco Full Automatic Control (FXFSQ-AR only)

This is a generic term for the setting where both fan speed and airflow direction are set to
"Auto". For detailed control contents, refer to Automatic Airflow Rate Control and Airflow
Direction Control.

8.7 Drain Pump Control

8.7.1 Normal Operation
OFF
Float switch
ON
Thermostat ON
(running)
OFF
ON
Error display
OFF
ON
Drain pump
OFF
5 min.
 The float switch is ON in normal operation.

 When cooling operation starts (thermostat ON), the drain pump turns ON simultaneously.
 After the thermostat turns OFF, the drain pump continues to operate for another 5 minutes.
 The aim of residual operation after thermostat OFF is to eliminate the dew that condenses
on the indoor heat exchanger during cooling operation.
8.7.2 If the Float Switch is OFF with the Thermostat ON in Cooling

Operation
∗1 ∗2 ∗3
OFF
Float switch
ON
Thermostat ON
(running)
OFF
A3
ON
Error display
OFF
ON
Drain pump
OFF
5 min. 5 sec. 5 min. 5 sec.
 When the float switch turns OFF, the thermostat turns OFF simultaneously.
 After the thermostat turns OFF, the drain pump continues to operate for another 5 minutes.
1: If the float switch turns ON again during the residual operation of the drain pump, cooling
operation also turns on again (thermostat ON).
2: If the float switch remains OFF even after the residual operation of the drain pump has
ended, the error code A3 is displayed on the remote controller.
The drain pump turns OFF once residual operation has ended, then turns ON again after 5
seconds.
3: After A3 is displayed and the unit comes to an abnormal stop, the thermostat will remain
OFF even if the float switch turns ON again.

8.7.3 If the Float Switch is OFF with the Thermostat OFF in Cooling
Operation
OFF
Float switch
ON
Thermostat ON
(running)
OFF
A3
ON
Error display
OFF
ON
Drain pump
OFF
5 min. 5 sec.
 When the float switch turns OFF, the drain pump turns ON simultaneously.
 If the float switch remains OFF even after residual operation of the drain pump has ended,
the error code A3 is displayed on the remote controller.
 The drain pump turns OFF once residual operation has ended, then turns ON again after 5
seconds.
8.7.4 If the Float Switch Turns OFF and ON Continuously, or the Float
Switch Turns OFF While AF Displayed
∗1 ∗2 ∗3
} }
OFF
Float switch
ON
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th
Thermostat ON
(running)
OFF
AF A3
ON
Error display
OFF
ON
Drain pump
OFF
5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 sec.
 When the float switch turns OFF, the drain pump turns ON simultaneously.
1: If the float switch continues to turn OFF and ON 5 times consecutively, it is judged as a drain
system error and the error code AF is displayed on the remote controller.
2: The drain pump continues to turn ON/OFF in accordance with the float switch ON/OFF even
after AF is displayed on the remote controller.
3: While the error code AF is displayed, if the float switch remains OFF even after the residual
operation of the drain pump has ended, the error code A3 will be displayed on the remote
controller.

8.8 Freeze-Up Prevention Control

Freeze-Up Prevention by Off Cycle (Indoor Unit Individual Control)
When the temperature detected by liquid pipe temperature thermistor of the indoor heat
exchanger drops too low, the unit enters freeze-up prevention control in accordance with the
following conditions, and is also set in accordance with the conditions given below. (Thermostat
OFF)
When freeze-up prevention is activated, the airflow rate is fixed to L tap. When the following
conditions for cancelling are satisfied, it will reset.
Conditions for starting:

Liquid pipe temperature ≤ – 1°C (for total of 40 minutes)
or
Liquid pipe temperature ≤ – 5°C (for total of 10 minutes)
Condition for cancelling:

Liquid pipe temperature ≥ +7°C (for 10 minutes continuously)
Liquid pipe 10 min.
temperature
+7ºC
0ºC
–5ºC
Freeze-up prevention control
Forced OFF by thermostat Normal operation
10 min.
Start Cancel
Concept of freeze-up prevention control

System avoids freeze-up
 For comfort, system avoids unnecessary thermostat ON/OFF
 For ensuring compressor reliability, system avoids unnecessary compressor ON/OFF
When freeze-up prevention control starts, system makes sure the frost is completely removed.
 System avoids water leakage.
Note(s) When the indoor unit is a round flow or multi flow type, if the air outlet is set as dual-directional
or tri-directional, the starting conditions will be changed as follows.
Liquid pipe temperature  1°C (for total of 15 minutes)
or
Liquid pipe temperature  0°C (for 1 minute continuously)
During freeze-up prevention control, the airflow rate is fixed to LL.
(The cancelling conditions are same as the standard.)

8.9 Dew Condensation Prevention Control

8.9.1 FXFSQ-AR Models
Indoor operation under a certain condition will limit the swing range of the flaps.
Position P0 continues
Dew condensation for 30 minutes.
Dew condensation
prevention control OFF prevention control in action
Thermostat OFF
Refer to the table below for flap action under this control.
Indoor unit
P0
P1
P2
P4 P3
Flap position AIR
(Observed horizontally)
Dew condensation prevention control

Flap setting OFF In action
P0 P0 P1
P1 P1 P1
P2 P2 P2
P3 P3 P3
P4 P4 P4
Swing P0 – P4 P1 – P4
8.9.2 FXAQ-AR Models

In cooling and dry operation, the following control is carried out in order to prevent dew
condensation when the horizontal blade blows air downward.
Starting condition
● Horizontal blade is set to downward flow (Position A)

&
● Cooling operation (compressor operation) continues for B minutes.
Dew condensation prevention control
Dry operation with horizontal airflow (Position C) is carried out for 1 hour.
Indoor unit
P0
P1
P2
P4 P3
Flap position AIR
(Observed horizontally)
FXAQ-AR
Position A P4
B (minutes) 20
Position C P3
Note(s) When there is any change to fan operation, airflow direction and operation ON/OFF state during
dew condensation prevention control, this control is canceled.

8.10 Electronic Expansion Valve Control

Electronic expansion valves in indoor units have the functions of conducting superheating
degree control in cooling operation and subcooling degree control in heating operation.
However, if the indoor units receive any control command such as a protection control
command or a special control command from the outdoor unit, the units will give a priority to the
control command.
 Superheating degree control in cooling operation
This function is used to adjust the opening of the electronic expansion valve so that
superheating degree (SH), which is calculated from the detection temperature (Tg) of the gas
pipe thermistor (R3T) and the detection temperature (Tl) of the liquid temperature thermistor
(R2T) of the indoor unit, will come close to a target superheating degree (SHS).
At that time, correction to the superheating degree is made according to the differences (T)
between set temperature and suction air temperature.
SH = Tg – Tl
Where,
SH: Evaporator outlet superheating degree (°C)

Tg: Indoor unit gas pipe temperature (R3T)
Tl: Indoor unit liquid pipe temperature (R2T)
SHS (Target superheating degree)

 Normally 5°C.
 As T (Remote controller set temp. – Suction air temp.) becomes larger, SHS becomes
lower.
 As T (Remote controller set temp. – Suction air temp.) becomes lower, SHS becomes
larger.
 Subcooling degree control in heating operation
This function is used to adjust the opening of the electronic expansion valve so that the high
pressure equivalent saturated temperature (Tc), which is converted from the detected pressure
of the high pressure sensor in the outdoor unit, and the subcooling degree (SC), which is
calculated from the detected temperature (Tl) of the liquid temperature thermistor (R2T) in the
indoor unit, will come close to the target subcooling degree (SCS).
At that time, corrections to the subcooling degree are made according to differences (T)
between set temperature and suction air temperatures.
SC = Tc – Tl
Where,
SC: Condenser outlet subcooling degree (°C)

Tc: High pressure equivalent saturated temperature detected by the high pressure sensor
(S1NPH)
Tl: Indoor unit liquid pipe temperature (R2T)
SCS (Target subcooling degree)

 Normally 5°C.
 As T (Remote controller set temp. – Suction air temp.) becomes larger, SCS becomes
lower.
 As T (Remote controller set temp. – Suction air temp.) becomes lower, SCS becomes
larger.

8.11 Circulation Airflow (FXFSQ-AR only)

Unevenness of room temperature and the startup time are improved by repeating 2-direction
horizontal blow-off and swing alternately.
8.11.1 Initiation Conditions of Circulation Operation

When operation starts (in the startup state)
Circulation airflow operation is performed.
During normal operation

The unit automatically determines operation based on the room temperature condition and time
to switch circulation airflow operation and the normal auto airflow rate and direction (eco full
automatic control).
Circulation airflow operation continues for up to 90 minutes
Circulation airflow Auto airflow rate and direction Circulation airflow

Room temp.
Set temp.
Target temp. Δt
Time
8.11.2 Operational Concept (Standard Panel)

Cooling : Factory setting
Movement pattern (a) (b) (c) (d)
01: Pattern 1 120 600 120 600

Appearance
Time 02: Pattern 2 120 600 0 0
(seconds) 03: Pattern 3 0 0 120 600
13 (23)-14
04: Pattern 4 120 600 120 600
Indicates the horizontal flap is in the position of reducing airflow volume (the flap is inverted).
Heating : Factory setting

01: Pattern 1 120 120 120 120

Appearance
Time 02: Pattern 2 120 120 0 0
13 (23)-14
04: Pattern 4 120 0 120 0

8.11.3 Operational Concept (Designer Panel)

01: Pattern 1 120 600 120 600

Appearance
Time 02: Pattern 2 120 600 0 0
13 (23)-14
04: Pattern 4 120 600 120 600

01: Pattern 1 120 120 120 120

Appearance
Time 02: Pattern 2 120 120 0 0
13 (23)-14
04: Pattern 4 120 0 120 0
8.12 Hot Start Control (In Heating Operation Only)

At startup with thermostat ON or after the completion of defrosting in heating operation, the
indoor fan is controlled to prevent cold air from blasting out and ensure startup capacity.
TH2 : Temperature detected with the gas thermistor
Tc : High pressure equivalent saturated temperature
Starting condition Ending condition

· Defrost ending · Lapse of 3 minutes
OR · Oil return ending OR · TH2 > 34˚C
· Thermostat ON · Tc > 52˚C
Hot start control Hot start in progress
H/L remote Normal control

controller setting
Fan
LL
The fan is not OFF before initiating the hot start: LL
The fan is OFF before initiating the hot start: OFF
OFF
Remote controller Normal control
Louver
setting
P0 (Horizontal)

8.13 Heater Control (Optional PCB KRP1B series is required.)

The heater control is conducted in the following manner.
Normal control
While in heating operation, the heater control (ON/OFF) is conducted as shown below.
ON Set temperature
OFF
2ºC 2ºC
Overload control
When the system is overloaded in heating operation, the heater will be turned OFF in the
following two manners.
1. The heater control (ON/OFF) is conducted through the liquid pipe temperature (R2T) of the
indoor unit.
ON 43ºC 50ºC Liquid pipe temperature
OFF
2. The heater control (ON/OFF) is conducted by converting the heater temperature into the
condensing pressure equivalent saturated temperature (Tc) according to the temperature
detection through the high pressure sensor (S1NPH) of the outdoor unit.
ON 50ºC 60ºC Condensing pressure
equivalent saturated
temperature
OFF
Fan residual operation

While the heater turns OFF, in order to prevent the activation of the thermal protector, the fan
conducts residual operation for a given period of time after the heater turns OFF. (This
operation is conducted regardless of with or without heater equipped.)
Residual operation time = 100 seconds on ceiling suspended type or 60 seconds on other types

SiME332106E
Part 5
Field Settings and
Test Operation
1. Field Settings for Indoor Unit.................................................................84
1.1 Field Settings with Remote Controller ....................................................84
1.2 List of Field Settings for Indoor Unit .......................................................90
1.3 Applicable Field Settings ........................................................................92
1.4 Details of Field Settings for Indoor Unit..................................................93
1.5 Operation Control Mode .......................................................................106
2. Field Settings for Outdoor Unit............................................................108
2.1 Function Setting ...................................................................................108
2.2 Settings by DIP Switches .....................................................................109
2.3 Settings by BS Buttons.........................................................................112
2.4 Normal Mode........................................................................................114
2.5 Monitor Mode (Mode 1) ........................................................................115
2.6 Setting Mode (Mode 2).........................................................................118
2.7 Eco Mode Setting .................................................................................130
2.8 Night-Time Low Noise Operation and Demand Operation...................131
3. Test Operation ....................................................................................135
3.1 Checks before Test Operation .............................................................135
3.2 Checkpoints..........................................................................................135
3.3 Test Operation Procedure ....................................................................136
3.4 Turn Power ON ....................................................................................138
Part 5 Field Settings and Test Operation 83

Field Settings for Indoor Unit SiME332106E
1. Field Settings for Indoor Unit

1.1 Field Settings with Remote Controller
Individual function of indoor unit can be changed from the remote controller. At the time of
installation or after service inspection / repair, make the field setting in accordance with the
following description.
Wrong setting may cause error.
(When optional accessory is mounted on the indoor unit, setting for the indoor unit may be
required to change.)
1.1.1 BRC1E63
Basic screen
(1) 1 Press and hold Cancel button for 4

seconds or more.
Service settings menu is displayed.
2 Select Field settings in the service

settings menu, and press Menu/Enter
button.
Field settings screen is displayed.
3 Highlight the mode, and select desired

mode No. by using (Up/Down)
button.
Service settings menu screen
4 In the case of setting per indoor unit
(2) during group control (When Mode No.
such as 20, 21, 22, 23, 25 are
selected), highlight the unit No. and
select indoor unit No. to be set by
using (Up/Down) button. (In the
case of group total setting, this
operation is not needed.)
In the case of individual setting per
indoor unit, current settings are
displayed. And, second code No.
“ - ” means no function.
Press Menu/Enter button.
5 Highlight second code No. of the first
Field settings screen
code No. to be changed, and select
desired second code No. by using
In the case of individual In the case of group total (Up/Down) button. Multiple identical
setting per indoor unit setting
mode number settings are available.
(3) (3) In the case of group total setting, all
(4) (5) of second code No. which may be
set are displayed as “ ”.
(5)
“ ” is changed to second code No.
to be set. And, second code No. “ - ”
means no function.
Second code No.
First code No.
84 Part 5 Field Settings and Test Operation

SiME332106E Field Settings for Indoor Unit
6 Press Menu/Enter button. Setting

Setting confirmation screen
confirmation screen is displayed.
(6)
(7) 7 Select Yes and press Menu/Enter
button. Setting details are determined
and field settings screen returns.
8 In the case of multiple setting

changes, repeat (3) to (7).
9 After all setting changes are

completed, press Cancel button twice.

10 Backlight goes out, and Checking the
connection. Please standby. is
displayed for initialization. After the
initialization, the basic screen returns.
Setting confirmed
CAUTION
When an optional accessory is installed on the indoor unit, settings of the indoor
unit may be changed. See the manual of the optional accessory.
For field setting details of the outdoor unit, see installation manual attached to the
outdoor unit.

1.1.2 BRC1H81 Series (Remote Controller)

The controller allows for making field settings related to the indoor unit, and to the controller
itself.
Screen Field settings
Indoor unit ▪ Define a mode by setting a Mode number
▪ Define the unit to which the setting will apply by setting
a Unit number
▪ Define the setting by setting a SW number
Field settings are composed of the following components.
1. Modes (Mode),
2. Units (Unit),
3. Settings (SW),
4. Values for those settings.

1.1.3 BRC1H81 Series (Smartphone Application)

Set as Installer In order to retrieve the field settings, the Madoka Assistance app has to be set as installer
Mode mode. If already set as installer mode, skip to Making Field Settings.
1. Tap the menu icon.

2. Tap "About".
3. Tap "Application version" 5 times. Installer mode screen is displayed.
4. Select (tap) the length of time the Madoka Assistance app is set as installer mode:
"Temporary" for 30 minutes and "Indefinite" for unlimited time.
Making Field
Settings
1. Tap the settings icon. The "Unit settings" screen appears.

2. Tap "Field settings". The "Field settings" screen appears.
3. Tap and select the type ("Indoor unit" or "Remote controller") for which you want to set the
field settings.
4. Tap and select the desired "Mode No" from the drop down list.
5. In the case of setting per indoor unit during group control (When Mode No. such as 20, 21,
22, 23, 25 are selected), tap and select the "Indoor unit No." which is required to be set. (In
the case of group total setting, this operation is not needed.)
In the case of individual setting per indoor unit, current settings are displayed. And, Second
Code No. "-" means no function.
6. Tap the Second Code No. of the First Code No. to be changed.

7. Select desired “Second Code No.. Multiple identical mode number settings are available.
In the case of group total setting, all of Second Code No. which may be set are displayed as
"*".
"*" is changed to Second Code No. to be set. And, Second Code No. "-" means no function.
Note(s) In case of multiple setting changes, repeat steps 4 through 7.
Applying Field
Settings
1. After finishing the setting(s), tap the "DONE" icon.

2. Tap "Apply" to apply the set field settings.
3. Tap "Apply" to confirm.
4. Tap "Return to field settings" to end the settings.

1.1.4 BRC4M Series
Mode No.
First code Second

No. code No.
4
3
5
1,6
Setting
To set the field settings, you have to change:
 Mode No.
 First code No.
 Second code No.
To change the field settings, proceed as follows:

1. Hold down the INSPECTION button for at least 4 seconds during normal mode to enter the
field setting mode.
2. Press the MODE button to select the desired mode No.
3. Press the FAN or BACK LIGHT button to select the first code No.
4. Press the TEMP button to select the second code No.
5. Press the RESERVE button to set the present settings.
6. Press the INSPECTION button to return to the normal mode.

1.2 List of Field Settings for Indoor Unit

Mode First Second Code No.
Reference
No. Code Description
(2) No. 01 02 03 04 Page
Filter Ultra long life Approx. Approx.

cleaning filter 10,000 5,000
sign interval hrs. hrs.
Long life filter Approx. Approx.
Light
0 
2,500 Heavy 1,250 — — 93
hrs. hrs.
Standard filter Approx.
Approx.
200 100 hrs.
hrs.
Filter type Ultra long life
1 Long life filter — — 93
filter
Remote controller thermistor Remote
controller Only suction air Only remote
2 thermistor + thermistor
controller — 93
Suction air thermistor
10 (20) thermistor
3 Filter cleaning sign Displayed Not displayed — — 95
Information for intelligent Touch
5 Manager / intelligent Touch Refer to the page on the right for details. 95
Controller
6 Remote controller thermistor Not permitted Permitted — — 93

control during group control
Time for absence area
7 detection 30 minutes 60 minutes — — 95
Dry operation time during Continuous

10 VRTsmart control 30 minutes 60 minutes 90 minutes (not returning 96
to cooling)
Low airflow setting when
11 thermostat OFF during Disabled Enabled — — 96
VRTsmart control
Indoor fan settings during
2 cooling/heating thermostat OFF Normal Fan OFF — — 96
Setting of airflow rate when Slightly

3 Standard Increased — 96
heating increased
Setting the rate of human Infrared
6 detection High sensitivity Low sensitivity Standard presence
sensitivity sensor 97
disabled
11 (21)
Automatic airflow adjustment Completion of Start of
7 OFF airflow airflow — 97
adjustment adjustment
Compensating the temperature Suction air Priority given on Priority given
8 around people the suction air Standard on the floor 98
temperature only
temperature temperature
9 Compensating the floor –4°C –2°C 0°C

temperature when heating 2°C 98
Optional accessories output Indoor unit

Operation
0 selection turned ON by — Error output 98
thermostat output
External ON/OFF input External

1 Forced OFF ON/OFF control protection — 99
device input
Thermostat differential
2 1°C 0.5°C — — 99
changeover
12 (22) Airflow setting when heating
3 LL tap Set fan speed — — 99
thermostat is OFF
4 Automatic mode differential Refer to the page on the right for details. 99
5 Auto restart after power failure OFF ON — — 100
6 Airflow setting when cooling LL tap Set fan speed — — 100

thermostat is OFF
Compensating the floor
11 4°C 2°C 0°C –2°C 100
temperature when cooling

Mode First Second Code No.

No. Code Reference
Description Page
(2) No. 01 02 03 04
Ceiling height setting, Setting of
0 Refer to the page on the right for details. 101
normal airflow
1 Airflow direction setting 4-way airflow 3-way airflow 2-way airflow — 101
Swing pattern settings All direction
Facing
2 synchronized — — 102
swing swing
3 Airflow function setting Equipped Not equipped — — —

(5)
4 Airflow direction adjustment Refer to the page on the right for details. 102
range
13 (23) Setting of static pressure High static
5 Standard — — 102
selection pressure
External static pressure
settings
Setting of swing patterns when
cooling thermostat is OFF
13 Setting of circulation airflow Disabled Enabled — — 103
14 Circulation airflow patterns Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3 Pattern 4 104
Switching panel type Standard
15 Designer panel — — 104
panel
Humidification when heating
1 thermostat is OFF Not equipped Equipped — — 104
2 Direct duct connection Not equipped Equipped — — 105

15 (25)
3 Drain pump and humidifier Not
Interlocked — — 105
interlock selection interlocked
5 Individual ventilation setting Normal Individual — — 105
Display of error codes on the Four-digit
4 remote controller — Two-digit display — display 105
1b
14 Setting restricted/permitted of Refer to the page on the right for details. 106
airflow block
0 Room temperature display Not displayed Displayed — — 106
01 Thermostat sensor Indoor unit Controller
(5) thermistor thermistor — — —
1c 12 Window contact B1
(5) Do not use Use — — —
13 Key card contact B2 Do not use Use — — —

(5)
Setback function Heating and
1e 02 No Setback Heating only Cooling only —
Cooling
(5)
07 Rotation overlap time 30 minutes 15 minutes 10 minutes 5 minutes —
1B Daylight saving time Automatic Manual Centralized
08 Disable —
(5) changeover changeover control
Note(s) 1. Settings are made simultaneously for the entire group, however, if you select the mode No. inside
parentheses, you can also set by each individual unit. Setting changes however cannot be checked except
in the individual mode for those in parentheses.
2. The mode numbers inside parentheses cannot be used by wireless remote controllers, so they cannot
be set individually. Setting changes also cannot be checked.
3. Do not make settings other than those described above. Nothing is displayed for functions the indoor unit
is not equipped with.
4. 88 or Checking the connection. Please stand by. may be displayed to indicate the remote controller is
resetting when returning to normal mode.
5. BRC1H81 series only

1.3 Applicable Field Settings

Mode First FXDQ-PD
No. Code No. Setting Contents FXFSQ-AR FXDQ-ND FXMQ-PB FXMQ-AR FXAQ-AR
0 Filter cleaning sign interval     

1 Filter type     ―
2 Remote controller thermistor     
3 Filter cleaning sign     
10 (20) Information for intelligent Touch Manager / intelligent Touch

5     
Controller
6 Remote controller thermistor control during group control     
7 Time for absence area detection  ― ― ― ―
10 Dry operation time during VRTsmart    ― ―
11 Low airflow setting when thermostat OFF during VRTsmart    ― ―
2 Indoor fan settings during cooling/heating thermostat OFF    ― 
3 Setting of airflow rate when heating    ― 
6 Setting the rate of human detection  ― ― ― ―
11 (21)
7 Automatic airflow adjustment ― ― 1 ― ―
8 Compensating the temperature around people  ― ― ― ―
9 Compensating the floor temperature when heating  ― ― ― ―
0 Optional accessories output selection     
1 External ON/OFF input     
2 Thermostat differential changeover     
3 Airflow setting when heating thermostat is OFF     
12 (22)
4 Automatic mode differential     
5 Auto restart after power failure     
6 Airflow setting when cooling thermostat is OFF     
11 Compensating the floor temperature when cooling  ― ― ― ―
0 Ceiling height setting, Setting of normal airflow  ― ― ― 
1 Airflow direction setting  ― ― ― ―
2 Swing pattern settings  ― ― ― ―
3 Airflow function setting  ― ― ― ―
4 Airflow direction adjustment range  ― ― ― 
13 (23) 5 Setting of static pressure selection ―  ― ― ―
6 External static pressure settings ― ―  ― ―
7 Setting of swing patterns when cooling thermostat is OFF  ― ― ― 
13 Setting of circulation airflow  ― ― ― ―
14 Circulation airflow patterns  ― ― ― ―
15 Switching panel type  ― ― ― ―
Humidification setting ON/OFF when heating thermostat is
1     
OFF
15 (25) 2 Direct duct connection  ― ― ― 

3 Drain pump and humidifier interlock selection     
5 Individual ventilation setting     
4 Display of error codes on the remote controller     
1b
14 Setting restricted/permitted for airflow block  ― ― ― ―
0 Room temperature display     
01 Thermostat sensor     
1c
12 Window contact B1     
13 Key card contact B2     
02 Setback function     
1e
07 Rotation overlap time     
1B 08 Daylight saving time     
 : Available
― : Not available
1: Except FXMQ140PB

1.4 Details of Field Settings for Indoor Unit

1.4.1 Filter Cleaning Sign Interval, Filter Type
When the setting 10 (20)-3 is set to 01 (Displayed), filter cleaning sign is displayed on the
remote controller after a certain period of operation time. This setting is used to change the
display interval of filter cleaning sign when the filter contamination is heavy.
The filter cleaning sign interval is determined as follows depending on the combination of Mode
No. 10 (20)-0 and 10 (20)-1.
Filter cleaning sign interval
10 (20)-1 01: Long life filter 02: Ultra long life filter
Setting Filter contamination Light Heavy Light Heavy
heavy/light 10 (20)-0 01 02 01 02
FXFSQ-AR
FXDQ-PD
FXDQ-ND 2,500 hrs. 1,250 hrs. 10,000 hrs. 5,000 hrs.
Model
FXMQ-PB
FXMQ-AR
FXAQ-AR 200 hrs. 100 hrs. 200 hrs. 100 hrs.
1.4.2 Remote Controller Thermistor

Select a thermistor to control the room temperature.
 When the unit is not equipped with an infrared floor sensor:
Mode First Code Second Contents
No. No. Code No.
01 Remote controller thermistor and suction air thermistor

in indoor unit
10 (20) 2
02 Suction air thermistor
03 Remote controller thermistor
The factory setting for the Second code No. is 01 and room temperature is controlled by the
suction air thermistor for indoor unit and remote controller thermistor. When the Second code
No. is set to 02, room temperature is controlled by the suction air thermistor. When the Second
code No. is set to 03, room temperature is controlled by the remote controller thermistor.

36
34 In cooling
32
Set temperature (°C)

Suction air Remote controller Suction air
30 thermistor thermistor thermistor
28 Suction air Remote controller Suction air

thermistor thermistor thermistor
26
24
22
20
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37
Suction air temperature (°C)
32
30
28
26 In heating
thermistor thermistor thermistor
24
22 thermistor thermistor thermistor
20
18
16
14
14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34
Suction air temperature (°C)
When the unit is equipped with an infrared presence/floor sensor:

Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No.
10 (20) 2 01 02 02 02# 02 03
11 (21) 8 01 01 02 03# 04 01
The thermistor to be used
Remote controller thermistor — — — —
Suction air thermistor —
Infrared floor sensor — — —
The infrared floor Priority given to Priority given to the

sensor is not used the suction air floor temperature ()
temperature ()
Only the remote
Only the suction air Standard setting controller thermistor
thermistor is used (Factory setting) is used
Refer to Compensating the temperature around people on page 98.

Note that the control is automatically switched to the one performed only by the suction air
thermistor for indoor unit when the Second code No. is 01 during the group control.
To use the remote controller thermistor control during group control, select the Second code No.
02 in First code No. 6.
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Contents
Remote controller thermistor control is not
01 permitted during group control
10 (20) 6
Remote controller thermistor control is
02 permitted during group control

1.4.3 Filter Cleaning Sign

Whether or not to display the sign after operation of a certain duration can be selected.
Mode First Code Second
Contents
No. No. Code No.
01 Displayed
10 (20) 3
02 Not displayed
1.4.4 Information for intelligent Touch Manager / intelligent Touch

Controller
Contents
No. No. Code No.
Only indoor unit sensor value (or remote controller sensor
01 value, if installed.)
10 (20) 5
02 Sensor values according to 10 (20)-2 and 10 (20)-6.
 When field setting 10 (20)-6-02 is set at the same time as 10 (20)-2-01,02,03, field setting 10
(20)-2 has priority. When field setting 10 (20)-6-01 is set at the same time as 10
(20)-2-01,02,03, field setting 10 (20)-6 has priority for group connection, and 10 (20)-2 has
priority for individual connection.
1.4.5 Time for Absence Area Detection

By selecting the energy-saving operation mode when absent, the target temperature is shifted
to the energy-saving end by 1°C (maximum 2°C) after the state of absence continues for a
certain period of time.
Absent time defined for detection can be selected as follows:
Mode Second Code
No. First Code No. No. Contents
01 30 minutes
10 (20) 7
02 60 minutes
Human detection
State of absence
31
30
29
28
27 Cooling (at 28°C)
26
21
Heating (at 20°C)
20
19
18
17
30 (60)∗ 60 (120)∗
Elapsed time of absence (min.)
∗ The values in parentheses represent the time
when Second code No. is 02.
 The set temperature displayed on the remote controller remains the same even if the target
temperature is shifted.
 As soon as people are detected while the temperature is shifted, this control will be
cancelled (reset).

1.4.6 Dry Operation Time during VRTsmart Control

 If you switch the operation mode to "Dry" while VRTsmart is enabled, the mode will
automatically switch to "Cooling" after a certain period of time is elapsed.
If you want to increase the duration of dry operation, change the Second code No. as
indicated in the following table.
Note 1) Increasing duration of dry operation degrades the energy efficiency
Mode First Second
Contents
No. Code No. Code No.
01 30 minutes
02 60 minutes
10 (20) 10
03 90 minutes
04 Continuous (not returning to cooling)
Note 2) When group control is enabled, all indoor units in the same group have a same set value for
duration of dry operation.
1.4.7 Low Airflow Setting when Thermostat OFF during VRTsmart Control
This setting changes the airflow volume to LL in coordination with the VRTsmart control when
cooling thermostat OFF is set. Also, the airflow direction is changed to horizontal.
When disabled:
12 (22)-6 (the airflow volume setting when cooling thermostat OFF is enabled)
13 (23)-7 (the swing setting when cooling thermostat OFF is enabled) is as set
When enabled: LL when Te ≥ 7°C
No. No. Code No.
01 Disabled
10 (20) 11
02 Enabled
1.4.8 Indoor Fan Settings during Cooling/Heating Thermostat OFF

Mode Second Code
No. First Code No. No. Contents
01 Normal
11 (21) 2
02 Fan OFF
1.4.9 Setting of Airflow Rate when Heating

The fan revolution is changed to maintain the sufficient distance for warm air to reach during the
heating operation. The setting should be changed depending on the installation condition of the
unit.
Mode First Code Second Code
No. No. No. Contents
01 Standard
11 (21) 3 02 Slightly increased
03 Increased
Note that this setting is effective only during the heating operation.

1.4.10 Setting the Rate of Human Detection

Set the sensitivity of the infrared presence/floor sensor.
 The infrared presence/floor sensor can be disabled by selecting the Second code No. 04.
When the infrared presence/floor sensor is disabled, the remote controller menu does not
display some functions such as the automatic draft reduction, energy-saving operation in
absence and halt in absence.
Mode First Second
No. Code No. Code No. Contents
01 High sensitivity
02 Low sensitivity
11 (21) 6
03 Standard sensitivity
04 Infrared presence/floor sensor disabled
1.4.11 Automatic Airflow Adjustment

Make external static pressure setting automatically using automatic airflow adjustment
(11 (21)-7), or manually using external static pressure settings (13 (23)-6).
The volume of blow-off air is automatically adjusted to the rated quantity.
Make settings before performing the test operation of the outdoor unit.
Setting procedure
1. Make sure that electric wiring and duct construction have been completed. In particular, if
the closing damper is installed on the way of the duct, make sure that it is open. In addition,
make sure that a field-supplied air filter is installed within the air passageway on the suction
port side.
2. If there are multiple blow-off and suction ports, adjust the throttle part so that the airflow
volume ratio of each suction/blow-off port conforms to the designed airflow volume ratio. In
that case, operate the unit with the operation mode "fan". When you want to change the
airflow rate, adjust it by pressing the airflow rate control button to select High, Middle or Low.
3. Make settings to adjust the airflow rate automatically. After setting the operation mode to
"fan", enter the field setting mode while operation is stopped and then select the Mode No.
"(21) (11 for batch setting)", set the First Code No. to 7 and the Second Code No. to 03. After
setting, return to the basic screen (to the normal mode in the case of a wireless remote
controller) and press the ON/OFF button. Fan operation for automatic airflow adjustment will
start with the operation lamp turned ON. Do not adjust the throttle part of the suction and
blow-off ports during automatic adjustment. After operation for approximately one to fifteen
minutes, airflow adjustment automatically stops with the operation lamp turned OFF.
4. After operation stopped, make sure that the Second Code No. is set to 02 as in the following
table by indoor unit with the Mode No. of (21). If operation does not stop automatically or the
Second Code No. is not set to 02, return to the step 3. above to make settings again.
Mode First Second Contents
01 OFF
11 (21) 7 02 Completion of airflow adjustment
03 Start of airflow adjustment
Note(s) 1. Make sure that the external static pressure is within the range of specifications before making
settings. If it is outside the range, automatic adjustment fails, which may cause an insufficient
airflow volume or leakage of water.
2. If the air passageway including duct or blow-off ports is changed after automatic adjustment,
make sure to perform automatic airflow adjustment again.

1.4.12 Compensating the Temperature around People

Change the ratio between the suction air temperature and floor temperature used to calculate
the temperature around people.
The temperature around people is calculated using the values of the suction air thermistor and
the infrared floor sensor. The factory setting is "Normal" (the average value of the suction air
temperature and the floor temperature is applied). However, the rate at which the suction air
thermistor and the infrared floor sensor affect the temperature around people can be changed
with this setting.
 To reflect the effect of the temperature around the ceiling, select the "Priorities given on the
suction air temperature" (the Second code No. 02).
 To reflect the effect of the temperature around the floor, select the "Priorities given on the
floor temperature" (the Second code No. 04).
 The infrared floor sensor can be disabled by selecting "Suction air temperature only" (the
Second code No. 01).
Contents
No. No. Code No.
01 Suction air temperature only
02 Priority given on the suction air temperature
11 (21) 8
03 Standard
04 Priority given on the floor temperature
1.4.13 Compensating the Floor Temperature when Heating

Offset the detected value of the infrared floor sensor with a certain temperature. This setting
should be used to have the actual floor temperature detected when, for example, the unit is
installed close to a wall.
Mode First Code Second Code Contents
No. No. No.
01 –4°C
02 –2°C
11 (21) 9
03 0°C
04 2°C
Actual procedure to use the setting

Although the standard setting is normally used with no problem, the setting should be changed
in the following cases:
Operation
Environment Mode Problem Setting Value
- The unit is installed close to a wall or a window. Excessive heating 2°C

- High thermal capacity of the floor (such as
concrete, etc.).
Heating Insufficient
- There are many heat sources including PC. –2°C or –4°C
- There is a non-negligible heat source such as heating
floor heating.
1.4.14 Optional Accessories Output Selection

Using this setting, "operation output signal" and "abnormal output signal" can be provided.
Output signal is output between terminals X1 and X2 of "adaptor for wiring", an optional
accessory.
Mode First Second
Contents
01 Indoor unit thermostat ON/OFF signal is provided.
02 —
12 (22) 0 03 Output linked with ON/OFF of remote controller is provided.
In case of Error Display appears on the remote controller, output is
04 provided.

1.4.15 External ON/OFF Input

This input is used for "ON/OFF operation" and "Protection device input" from the outside. The
input is performed from the T1-T2 terminal of the operation terminal block in the electrical
component box.
F2 T1 T2
Forced OFF
Input A
Mode First Second
Contents
ON: Forced OFF (prohibition of using the remote controller)
01
OFF: Permission of using the remote controller
OFF  ON: Operation
02
12 (22) 1 ON  OFF: Stop
ON: Operation
03 OFF: The system stops, then the applicable unit indicates A0. The
other indoor units indicate U9.
1.4.16 Thermostat Differential Changeover

Set when remote sensor is to be used.
Differential value during thermostat ON/OFF control can be changed.
No. No. Code No.
01 1ºC
12 (22) 2
02 0.5ºC
1.4.17 Airflow Setting when Heating Thermostat is OFF

This setting is used to set airflow when heating thermostat is OFF.
 When thermostat OFF airflow volume up mode is used, careful consideration is required
before deciding installation location.
No. No. Code No.
01 LL tap
12 (22) 3
02 Set fan speed
1.4.18 Automatic Mode Differential

This setting makes it possible to change differential values for mode selection while in automatic
operation mode.
First Code Second Code No.

Mode No. No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
12 (22) 4 0°C 1°C 2°C 3°C 4°C 5°C 6°C 7°C
The automatic operation mode setting is made by the use of the "Operation Mode Selector"
button.

1.4.19 Auto Restart after Power Failure

Mode First Second
Contents
01 OFF
12 (22) 5
02 ON
When the "Auto Restart after Power Failure" setting is turned OFF, all the units will remain OFF
after power failure, or after the main power supply is restored. When this setting is turned ON
(factory setting), the units that were operating before the power failure will automatically restart
operation after power failure, or after the main power supply is restored.
Due to the aforementioned, when the "Auto restart after power failure” setting is ON, be careful
for the following situations that may occur.
1. The air conditioner will start operation suddenly after power failure,
Caution or when the main power supply is restored. The user might be surprised
and wonder why the air conditioner turned ON suddenly.
2. During maintenance, if the main power supply is turned OFF while the
units are in operation, the units will automatically start operation
(the fan will rotate) after the power supply is restored due to completion
of the maintenance work.
1.4.20 Airflow Setting when Cooling Thermostat is OFF

This is used to set airflow to LL airflow when cooling thermostat is OFF.
No. No. No.
01 LL tap
12 (22) 6
02 Set fan speed
1.4.21 Compensating the Floor Temperature when Cooling

Offset the detected value of the infrared floor sensor with a certain temperature. This setting
should be used to have the actual floor temperature detected when, for example, the unit is
installed close to a wall.
No. No. No. Contents
01 4°C
02 2°C
12 (22) 11
03 0°C
04 –2°C
Specific usages of this setting

There is no problem with the standard setting in the usual condition. Change the setting in the
cases indicated in the following table.
Operation
Environment Mode Problem Contents
- The unit is installed close to a wall or a window. Insufficient cooling –2°C

- High thermal capacity of the floor (such as
concrete, etc.).
Cooling
- There are many heat sources including PC. Excessive cooling 2°C or 4°C
- There is a non-negligible heat source such as
floor heating.

1.4.22 Ceiling Height Setting, Setting of Normal Airflow

Make the following setting according to the ceiling height.
 FXFSQ25-80AR
First Second Ceiling Height

Mode
Code Code Contents All round 4-way 3-way 2-way
No.
No. No. outlet Outlets Outlets Outlets
01 Lower than Lower than Lower than Lower than

Standard
2.7 m 3.1 m 3.0 m 3.5 m
13 Lower than Lower than Lower than Lower than
0 02 High Ceiling
(23) 3.0 m 3.4 m 3.3 m 3.8 m
Lower than Lower than Lower than
03 Higher Ceiling 3.5 m 4.0 m 3.5 m —
 FXFSQ100-140AR
First Second Ceiling Height

Mode
Code Code Contents All round 4-way 3-way 2-way
No.
No. No. outlet Outlets Outlets Outlets
01 Lower than Lower than Lower than Lower than

Standard 3.2 m 3.4 m 3.6 m 4.2 m
13 0 Lower than Lower than Lower than Lower than
02 High Ceiling
(23) 3.6 m 3.9 m 4.0 m 4.2 m
Lower than Lower than Lower than
03 Higher Ceiling —
4.2 m 4.5 m 4.2 m
Note(s) 1. The Second Code No. is factory set to Standard/All-direction airflow. For High ceiling (1) or
(2), initial setting by remote controller is required.
2. A closing member kit (optional) is required for 4-, 3-, or 2-direction airflow.
 FXFSQ-AR with Designer panel

Mode First Second FXFSQ25-80AR FXFSQ100-140AR

Code Contents
No. No. Code No. (All round outlet) (All round outlet)
01 Standard Lower than Lower than

2.4 m 3.2 m
13 0 Lower than Lower than
02 High Ceiling (1)
(23) 2.7 m 3.6 m
Lower than Lower than
03 High Ceiling (2)
3.2 m 4.2 m
FXAQ-AR
First
Mode Second
Code Contents
No. Code No.
No.
01 Standard
13
(23) 0 02 Slightly higher
03 High
1.4.23 Airflow Direction Setting

Set the airflow direction of indoor units as given in the table below. (Set when sealing material
kit of air discharge outlet has been installed.) The second code No. is factory set to 01.
Mode First Second
01 4-way airflow

13 (23) 1 02 3-way airflow
03 2-way airflow

1.4.24 Swing Pattern Settings

Set the flap operation in swing mode.
With the factory swing, flaps facing each other are synchronized to operate, and flaps placed
side by side are set to swing in an opposite direction to agitate airflow to reduce temperature
irregularity.
Conventional swing operation (all direction synchronized swing) can be set onsite.
Mode First Second
01 All direction synchronized swing

13 (23) 2 02 —
03 Facing swing
1.4.25 Airflow Direction Adjustment Range

Make the following airflow direction setting according to the respective purpose.
 FXFSQ-AR, FXAQ-AR : Factory setting

01 Draft prevention (Upward)
13 (23) 4 02 Standard
03 Ceiling soiling prevention (Downward)
Note(s) 1. Some indoor unit models are not equipped with draft prevention (upward) function.
2. When the model FXFSQ-AR is attached with a closing member kit, set the Second Code No.
to 02 or 03.
1.4.26 Setting of Static Pressure Selection

 FXDQ-PD, FXDQ-ND
Model First Code Second
Contents
No. No. Code No.
01 Standard (10 Pa)
13 (23) 5
02 High static pressure (30 Pa)

1.4.27 External Static Pressure Settings

Make external static pressure setting automatically using automatic airflow adjustment
(11 (21)-7), or manually using external static pressure settings (13 (23)-6).
 FXMQ-PB
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Contents
01 30 Pa (2) (3)
02 50 Pa
03 60 Pa
04 70 Pa
05 80 Pa
06 90 Pa
07 100 Pa
13 (23) 6 08 110 Pa
09 120 Pa
10 130 Pa
11 140 Pa
12 150 Pa (3)
13 160 Pa (3)
14 180 Pa (1) (3)
15 200 Pa (1) (3)
1 FXMQ40PB cannot be set to 180 or 200 Pa.
2 FXMQ50-125PB cannot be set to 30 Pa.
3 FXMQ140PB cannot be set to 30 Pa and 150-200 Pa.
1.4.28 Setting of Swing Patterns when Cooling Thermostat is OFF

In cooling operation, when the airflow direction is set to swing, flaps swing even when the
thermostat is OFF. This setting allows to change the airflow direction when the thermostat is
OFF.
Mode First Second
No. Code No. Code No. Fixed Swing
01 Set Position Swing

02 Set Position P0
03 P0 P0
13 (23) 7 04 Set Position Swing
05 Set Position P2
06 P2 P2
07 Set Position Swing
1.4.29 Setting of Circulation Airflow

This is to set whether the circulation airflow function is enabled or disabled.
Mode First Second
01 Disabled
13 (23) 13
02 Enabled

1.4.30 Circulation Airflow Patterns

This setting is to change the appearance pattern of the circulation airflow direction depending
on the installation environment of the indoor unit.
01: Pattern 1 120 600 120 600

Appearance
Time (sec.) 02: Pattern 2 120 600 0 0
03: Pattern 3 0 0 120 600
13 (23)-14
04: Pattern 4 120 600 120 600
Indicates the horizontal flap is in the position of reducing airflow volume (where the flap is
reversed).

01: Pattern 1 120 120 120 120

Appearance
Time (sec.) 02: Pattern 2 120 120 0 0
03: Pattern 3 0 0 120 120
13 (23)-14
04: Pattern 4 120 0 120 0
Indicates the horizontal flap is in the position of reducing airflow volume (where the flap is
reversed).
1.4.31 Switching Panel Type

Change this setting depending on the type of the panel connected.
01 Standard panel
13 (23) 15
02 Designer panel
1.4.32 Humidification when Heating Thermostat is OFF

Setting to Equipped turns ON the humidifier if suction air temperature is 20ºC or more and turns
OFF the humidifier if suction air temperature is 18ºC or below when the heating thermostat is
OFF.
No. No. No.
01 Not equipped
15 (25) 1
02 Equipped

1.4.33 Direct Duct Connection

This is used when "fresh air intake kit equipped with fan" is connected by duct directly. The
indoor fan carries out residual operation for 1 minute after the thermostat is stopped. (For the
purpose of preventing dust on the air filter from falling off.) When the second code No. is set to
02: Equipped, heat reclaim ventilation fan conducts the fan residual operation by linking to
indoor unit.
Mode First Second
01 Not equipped

15 (25) 2
02 Equipped
1.4.34 Drain Pump and Humidifier Interlock Selection

This is used to interlock the humidifier with the drain pump. When water is drained out of the
unit, this setting is unnecessary.
Mode First Second
Contents
01 Not interlocked
15 (25) 3
02 Interlocked
1.4.35 Individual Ventilation Setting

This is set to perform individual operation of heat reclaim ventilation using the remote
controller/central unit when heat reclaim ventilation is built in.
(Switch only when heat reclaim ventilation is built in.)
Mode First Second
01 Normal
15 (25) 5
02 Individual
1.4.36 Display of Error Codes on the Remote Controller

 BRC1E Series
Error code (four digits) is displayed for limited products.
Select two-digit display if four-digit display is not preferred.
Contents
No. No. No.
01 —
02 Two-digit display
1b 4
03 —
04 Four-digit display

1.4.37 Setting Restricted/Permitted of Airflow Block

The airflow block function cannot be enabled when closure material kit, fresh air intake kit,
separately installed natural evaporation type humidifier, or branch air duct is equipped, due to
the possibility of dew condensation.
This setting restricts the airflow block function, preventing that the airflow block is inadvertently
set to ON.
Ensure that “Airflow block restricted” is set when using the options listed above.
Mode First Second
Contents
01 Airflow block permitted
02 —
1b 14 03 —
04 —
05 Airflow block restricted
1.4.38 Room Temperature Display

 BRC1E Series
A "Detailed display screen" can be selected as the display screen. This setting is used if you do
not want to display "Room temperature display" on the "Detailed display screen".
01 Not displayed
1c 0
02 Displayed
1.5 Operation Control Mode

The operation control mode is compatible with a variety of controls and operations by limiting
the functions of the operation remote controller. Furthermore, operations such as remote
controller ON/OFF can be limited in accordance with the combination conditions. (Refer to
information on the next page.)
Central remote controller is normally available for operations. (Except when centralized monitor
is connected)
Contents of Control Modes

20 modes consisting of combinations of the following 5 operation modes with temperature and
operation mode setting by remote controller can be set and displayed by operation modes 0
through 19.
 ON/OFF control impossible by remote controller
Used when you want to turn ON/OFF by central remote controller only.
(Cannot be turned ON/OFF by remote controller.)
 OFF control only possible by remote controller
Used when you want to turn ON by central remote controller only, and OFF by remote controller
only.
 Centralized
Used when you want to turn ON by central remote controller only, and turn ON/OFF freely by
remote controller during set time.
 Individual
Used when you want to turn ON/OFF by both central remote controller and remote controller.
 Timer operation possible by remote controller
Used when you want to turn ON/OFF by remote controller during set time and you do not want
to start operation by central remote controller when time of system start is programmed.

How to Select Operation Mode

Whether operation by remote controller will be possible or not for turning ON/OFF, controlling
temperature or setting operation mode is selected and decided by the operation mode given on
the right edge of the table below.
Example
ON by remote OFF by remote
Temperature Operation mode
controller controller OFF by Control
control by setting by
(Unified ON by (Unified OFF by remote mode is "1".
remote controller remote controller
central remote central remote controller
controller) controller)
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Rejection Rejection Rejection Acceptance Acceptance
Control by remote controller
Operation
Control mode Unified operation, Unified OFF, Control mode

individual operation by individual stop by Temperature Operation
OFF control mode setting
central remote central remote
controller, or operation controller, or timer
controlled by timer stop
Acceptance 0
Rejection
ON/OFF control Rejection 10
Rejection
impossible by (Example) Acceptance
remote controller Acceptance (Example) 1 (Example)
(Example)
Rejection (Example) Rejection 11
Acceptance 2
Rejection
OFF control only Rejection (Example) Rejection 12
possible by remote
controller Acceptance 3
Acceptance
Rejection 13
Acceptance 4
Rejection
Rejection 14
Centralized
Acceptance 5
Acceptance
Rejection 15
Acceptance Acceptance
Acceptance 6
Rejection
Rejection 16
Individual Acceptance
Acceptance 7
Acceptance
Rejection 17
Acceptance 8
Rejection
Timer operation Acceptance (During Rejection (During Rejection 18
possible by remote timer at ON position timer at OFF
controller only) position only) Acceptance 9
Acceptance
Rejection 19
Do not select “timer operation possible by remote controller” if not using a remote controller.
Operation by timer is impossible in this case.
BRC1E63
Local remote controllers cannot set
temperature or operation mode when
the system is under centralized control
and the mark for centralized control
appears on the screen.

Field Settings for Outdoor Unit SiME332106E
2. Field Settings for Outdoor Unit

This section shows a list of field setting items possible to set at time of initial startup. For details
of DIP switch setting, setting mode ("mode 2") and monitor mode ("mode 1"), refer to
information on the following pages.
2.1 Function Setting

Following setting may be required to set to comply to specific application requirements.
Setting item Contents and objective of setting Overview of setting procedure
Setting of low A.To reduce operation noise level through reduction of the upper Use the optional board DTA104A61 (1).
noise limit of the fan using external input (use outdoor fan step 8 for Set mode 2-12 to 1.
operation normal control). Choose level by mode 2-25.
(2) 1. Level 1: fan step 8 or less. If required, set the Capacity priority setting
2. Level 2: fan step 7Y or less. ON by setting the mode 2-29 to 1.
3. Level 3: fan step 6 or less.
B.To perform automatic night-time low noise operation. Select required level by mode 2-22.
Start time: selectable from 8:00 PM to 12:00 AM (step by 2 hours). Select start time with mode 2-26.
End time: selectable from 6:00 AM to 8:00 AM (step by 1 hour). Select end time with mode 2-27.
(Note that the set time is estimated according to outdoor air Select capacity priority setting if required by
temperature.) mode 2-29-1.
Setting of 1. Demand 1 Level 1: 60% of rated capacity or less Use the optional board DTA104A61.
demand 2. Demand 1 Level 2: 65% of rated capacity or less Wire external signal(s) to the optional
operation (2) 3. Demand 1 Level 3: 70% of rated capacity or less adaptor DTA104A61.
4. Demand 1 Level 4: 75% of rated capacity or less
5. Demand 1 Level 5: 80% of rated capacity or less Activate input optional board DTA104A61
6. Demand 1 Level 6: 85% of rated capacity or less by setting the mode 2-12 to 1.
7. Demand 1 Level 7: 90% of rated capacity or less Select level of demand 1 by mode 2-30.
8. Demand 1 Level 8: 95% of rated capacity or less Select level of demand 2 by mode 2-31.
9. Demand 2 Level 1: 40% of rated capacity or less If constant demand control is required
10. Demand 2 Level 2: 50% of rated capacity or less (without adaptor DTA104A61), set level by
11. Demand 2 Level 3: 55% of rated capacity or less mode 2-32.
12. Demand 3: Forced thermostat off
Setting of Make AIRNET address when it is connected to AIRNET Set AIRNET address with mode 2-13.
AIRNET monitoring, or to view detail in the map on Service Checker type
address III.
Setting of high Set high static pressure mode in order to operate the system Set mode 2-18 to 0 (Automatic ESP
static pressure with duct to the outdoor unit (used at concealed installation on adjustment).
mode floors or balconies).
Evaporating Setting to choose the reaction time of outdoor control on change Set mode 2-8 to choose cooling capacity
temperature of outdoor and cooling indoor load. control logic between standard and high
setting (cooling sensible.
performance) Set mode 2-81 to choose Te adjustment at
start up between Powerful, Quick, Mild or Eco.
Eco mode Eco mode may be deemed unavailable. Set mode 2-23.
invalid setting 0: Valid
1: Invalid
When this configuration is set, it is not possible to turn this control
ON/OFF using the external control adaptor.
Eco level You may set the Eco level of Eco mode to Standard/Low or You need an external control adaptor. Using
setting for Eco make it unavailable. Depending on the settings, low noise mode 2-11, define if Eco level will be set by
mode by operation or demand operation may not be performed using the the external control adaptor low noise level or
external external control adaptor. demand level. If you short-circuit the terminal
control adaptor (TeS1), Eco level can be set to Standard/Low.
In case of open circuit, the setting will be
unavailable.
Condensing Setting to choose the reaction time of outdoor control on change Set mode 2-9 to choose heating capacity
temperature of outdoor and heating indoor load. control logic between fixed, automatic or high
setting sensible.
(heating Set mode 2-82 to choose Tc adjustment
performance) at start up between Powerful, Quick, Mild or
Eco.
For detailed description about each setting, refer to Details of Setting Mode (Mode 2) on page
122.
Note(s) 1. External control adaptor for outdoor unit.

2. These functions are available when setting mode 2-11 to 0.

SiME332106E Field Settings for Outdoor Unit
2.2 Settings by DIP Switches

2.2.1 DIP Switch Setting when Mounting a Spare PCB
Caution:
 After replacement with spare PCB, be sure to make settings shown in the table below. The
procedure for making settings of spare PCB is different from that used for factory settings
described above. Be sure to refer to the table on the following page in order to make settings
of spare PCB after replacement.
 Enforce a re-initialization of communication: press the RETURN (BS3) button for minimum 5
seconds.
 After initialization, a test operation is required from outdoor unit. Press the SET (BS2) button
until indication t01 appears.
RXYMQ4AVMK
(3) BS button (BS1~BS3) (2) Segment display (SEG1~SEG3)

(4) DIP switch (DS1-1~4) (DS2-1~4)
Initial position of DIP switches ()
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS2 DS1
(1) Microcomputer normal monitor

(HAP, HBP, HCP)

RXYMQ4-6AYFK
(3) BS button (BS1~BS3) (2) Segment display (SEG1~SEG3) (4)

DIP switch
(DS1-1~4)
(DS2-1~4)
Initial position of DIP switches ()
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS1 DS2
(1)
Microcomputer
normal monitor
(HAP)
Connection terminal
for transmission use
(1) Microcomputer normal monitor

This monitor blinks while in normal control, and turns ON or OFF when an error occurs.
(2) 7 segment display
 Used to check the transmission.
 Used to display the transmission state between indoor and outdoor units.
 Used to display the contents of error.
 Used to display the contents of field setting.
(3) BS button
Used to change mode.
(4) DIP switch
Used to make field settings.
The figure below shows the required position of the DIP switches on spare PCB. Change DIP
switches at time of power disconnected.
Application model The setting method (represents the position of switches)
RXYMQ4AVMK Set DS1-2, DS1-4, DS2-1, and DS2-3 to ON.
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS2 DS1
RXYMQ4AYFK Set DS1-2, DS1-4, DS2-1, DS2-2, and DS2-3 to

RXYMQ5AYFK ON
RXYMQ6AYFK ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS1 DS2

‫ ڦ‬5(029,1*0$,13&%
‫ە‬5(029(7+(&29(56&5(:6%()25(5(029,1*7+((/(&75,&$/&20321(17
127'2,1*620$<'$0$*(7+(5()5,*(5$173,3(
‫ە‬5(3/$&(7+(*5($6(217+(+($76,1.:,7+1(:*5($6(
127'2,1*620$<&$86(7+(3&%72)$,/'8(72,168)),&,(17&22/,1*
㻱㻸㻱㻯㻚㻌㻯㻻㻹㻼㻻㻺㻱㻺㼀㻿
㻾㻱㻹㻻㼂㻭㻸㻹㻻㼁㻺㼀㻵㻺㻳㻌㻼㻸㻭㼀㻱
㻲㻵㼄㻭㼀㻵㻻㻺
㻾㻱㻲㻾㻵㻳㻱㻾㻚㻌㻼㻵㻼㻱㻿㻯㻾㻱㼃㻌㻮
㻲㻵㼄㻭㼀㻵㻻㻺㻯㻻㼂㻱㻾
㻿㻯㻾㻱㼃㻌㻭
ձ5(029(),;$7,21 ղ/,)7$1'38//7+(&29(5,1 ճ38//7+(5()5,*(5$17 մ5(029(),;$7,21

6&5(:6$ 7+(',5(&7,212)7+($552: 3,3()25:$5' 6&5(:6%
&$87,21!'2127728&+7+(+$7&+('$5($
$/:$<65(3/$&(7+(*5($6($)7(55(029,1*$1(/(&75,&$/&20321(17
12'()250$7,212)7+(3,3(,6$//2:('
㻿㻵㼆㻱㻌㻿㻿㻵㼆㻱㻌㻸
㻹㻻㼁㻺㼀㻵㻺㻳㻭㻼㻼㻸㼅㻌㻯㻻㻻㻸㻵㻺㻳㻌㻳㻾㻱㻭㻿㻱㻌
㻙㻌㻿㻵㻰㻱㻌㻿㻌㻩㻌㻝㻚㻢㼓㻌㻼㻱㻾㻌㻿㻵㻰㻱㻚㻿㻯㻾㻱㼃㻌㻭㻌㻩㻌㻞㻌㻼㻯㻿㻚㻿㻯㻾㻱㼃㻌㻭㻌㻩㻌㻞㻌㻼㻯㻿㻚
㻙㻌㻿㻵㻰㻱㻌㻸㻌㻩㻌㻞㻚㻝㼓㻌㻼㻱㻾㻌㻿㻵㻰㻱㻚
㻡
㻰㻵㻿㼀㻾㻵㻮㼁㼀㻱㻌
㼀㻴㻱㻌㻳㻾㻱㻭㻿㻱
㻡
㻭㻿㻌㻱㼂㻱㻺㻸㼅㻌
㻭㻿㻌㻼㻻㻿㻵㻮㻸㻱
㼀㻵㻳㻴㼀㻱㻺㻵㻺㻳㻌㼀㻻㻾㻽㼁㻱㻌㻝㻚㻡㻥s㻜㻚㻞㻺㼙
ձ5(029(7+(*5($6( ղ3/$&(7+(&29(521 ճ&/26($1'6/,'(7+(&29(5'2:1:$5'6

$1'$33/<1(:*5($6( 7+(5()5,*(5$173,3( 72),;7+(+22.67,*+7(1),;$7,21
$6,1',&$7(' 6&5(:$627+$77+(&29(535(66(672
7+(3,3(
㸺&$87,21㸼'2127728&+7+(+$7&+('$5($:+(102817,1*7+(5()5,*(5$173,3(
C: 3P473957

2.3 Settings by BS Buttons

The following settings can be made using the BS buttons on the PCB.
BS buttons 7 segment display (SEG1-3)
BS1 BS2 BS3 SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
MODE SET RETURN Normal mode

(TEST) (RESET)
Used to make Used to make Setting mode

setting mode field settings.
changes.
Monitor mode
 Normal mode:
 Blank: If no abnormality is detected and initialization of communication was completed.
 Flashing combination of letter and number (4 digits): Error code detected by outdoor
control or trouble by communication.
 Setting mode: Used to make changes to operating status, performance settings or address
setting.
 Monitor mode: Used to verify contents of settings, quantity of units, current value of some
parameters during operation of outdoor unit.
 Mode changing procedure can be selected using the MODE (BS1) button as shown
below:
Press and hold the
MODE (BS1) button Press the MODE
for 5 seconds or more (BS1) button once
Setting mode Normal mode Monitor mode
Press the MODE
SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 (BS1) button once SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG1 SEG2 SEG3

 Selection between normal mode, monitor mode (Mode 1) and setting mode (Mode 2).
SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
Press MODE (BS1) button for more than 5 sec. Normal mode Press MODE (BS1) button once.
(Initial condition)
Setting mode (Mode 2) Monitor mode (Mode 1)
Select setting item with Select monitoring item

SET (BS2) button. with SET (BS2) button.
Press RETURN (BS3) Press RETURN (BS3)
button once. button once.
Setting condition
Contents display
selection (SET)
Press RETURN (BS3) Press RETURN (BS3)
button once. button once.
Setting condition
(Contents) display
Press RETURN (BS3)
button once. Press MODE (BS1)
button once.
Press MODE (BS1)

button once.

2.4 Normal Mode

1. Indoor/outdoor transmission status: Used to check for the initial status of indoor/outdoor
transmission.
SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
Blinking
Initializing
ON
OFF
Initializing completed
2. Descriptions: Used to display an error content.

SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
Normal
Example: E7-01
Error Error main code

Switching
every
second
Error sub code

2.5 Monitor Mode (Mode 1)

In the monitor mode, information can be retrieved about settings related to performance,
addresses, number of units and actual operation data.
2.5.1 Retrieve data by using BS button on outdoor unit main PCB

SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
Normal
To enter monitor mode, press the
MODE (BS1) button while in BS1
normal mode.
MODE
Selecting monitoring item
Press the SET (BS2) button to select BS2

any of the monitoring item listed in the
following table. SET
BS3
Checking for description of data
Press the RETURN (BS3) button to RETURN
confirm.
The current state of monitoring item will
appear on the 7 segment display.
BS3
RETURN
Press the RETURN (BS3) button to
return to the initial state of monitor mode.
BS1
MODE
Press the MODE (BS1) button to return Normal
to normal mode.
If you become unsure of how to

proceed, press the MODE (BS1)
button and return to normal mode.
Legend Segment : OFF : ON : BLINKS : hold 5 seconds

2.5.2 Overview of Monitor Mode (Mode 1)

Item Contents
No. Display Display
1 Description Description
SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG
1 2 3 1 2 3
Low noise operation state In normal operation 0
1 display 1. 0 1 In low noise operation 1
Demand operation state In normal operation 0
2 display 1. 0 2 In demand operation 1
3 Automatic backup 1. 0 3 OFF 0

operation setting ON 1
Defrost selection setting Slow defrost 0
4 1. 0 4 Normal 1
Quick defrost 2
Te setting Normal 6°C 2
High sensible 7°C 3
5 1. 0 5 High sensible 9°C 5
Tc setting Low sensible 41°C 1
6 1. 0 6 Standard 43°C 3
Low noise/demand Possible 0-31 0
8 1. 0 8
address 3 1
9 AIRNET address 1. 0 9 Possible 0-63 0

6 3
10 Number of connected 1. 1 0 Possible 0-63 0

indoor units (refer to 2) 6 3
13 Number of outdoor units 1. 1 3 Possible 0-63 0

(refer to 3) 6 3
Number of units in zone Possible 0-63 0
15 1. 1 5 6 3
Number of all indoor units Possible 0-128 0
of several systems if “F1F2 1 2 8
16 OUT/D is wired between
1. 1 6
systems (refer to 4)
17 Description of error (latest) 1. 1 7 Refer to information in Error Code via
Outdoor Unit PCB on page 152.
Description of error
18 (1 cycle before) 1. 1 8
19 Description of error 1. 1 9
(2 cycles before)
1: Numbers in the "No." column represent the number of times to press the BS button.
2: Number of indoor units connected: represents the number of indoor units connected to a
single outdoor system.
3: Number of outdoor units: represents the number of outdoor units connected to a single
DIII-NET that is a communication line.
4: Number of terminal units: represents the number of indoor units connected to a single
DIII-NET that is a communication line.

Item Contents
No. Display Display
1 Description Description
SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG SEG
1 2 3 1 2 3
Description of retry Refer to information in Error Code via
23 1. 2 3
(latest) Outdoor Unit PCB on page 152.
Description of retry
24 1. 2 4
(1 cycle before)
25 Description of retry 1. 2 5
(2 cycles before)
Number of outdoor units Possible 0-63
0
28 connected in a multi 1. 2 8 6 3
system
Outdoor unit PCB status 0: judgment in
0
judgment process
32 1. 3 2 1
1: normal 2
2: abnormal
Number of abnormal Possible 0-15 0
33 status judgment outdoor 1. 3 3 1 5
unit PCB
Number of connected RA Possible 0-63 0
38 indoor (through BP unit) 1 3 8 6 3
Cooling comfort setting Possible 0-3 0
40 1. 4 0 3
Heating comfort setting Possible 0-6 0
41 (see mode 2 No. 9) 1 4 1 6
High pressure (MPa) Possible 0.1-9.99 0. 1 0
42 1. 4 2 9. 9 9
43 Low pressure (MPa) 1. 4 3 Possible 0.1-9.99 0. 1 0

9. 9 9
Compressor total 0 0 0
44 1. 4 4 0-999
frequency (Hz) 9 9 9
Opening pulses of main
45 electronic expansion 1 4 5 0-999 0 0 0
9 9 9
valve (Y1E) (pulses/10)
Discharge pipe - 9 9
46 temperature (°C) (Tdi1) 1. 4 6 –99-999 9 9 9
Outdoor air temperature - 9 9
50 (°C) (Ta) 1. 5 0 –99-999 9 9 9
Compressor suction - 9 9
51 temperature (°C) (Ts) 1. 5 1 –99-999 9 9 9
Subcooling heat - 9 9
52 exchanger gas pipe 1. 5 2 –99-999
9 9 9
temperature (°C) (Tsh)
54 Compressor operation 1. 5 4 0-999 0 0 0

(hours/100) 9 9 9
1: Numbers in the "No." column represent the number of times to press the BS button.

2.6 Setting Mode (Mode 2)

2.6.1 How to Make Settings
Press and hold the MODE (BS1) SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
button for 5 seconds or more to
enter setting mode.
Normal
BS1
Selection of setting items MODE

Press the SET (BS2) button to
select any of the setting item listed
in the following table.

confirm. The current state of setting BS2
item blinks.
SET
BS3
RETURN
Selection of setting conditions
Default
Press the SET (BS2) button to select
the setting condition you want.

confirm. BS2
SET
BS3
RETURN
return to the initial state of setting
mode.
BS3
RETURN
BS1
Press the MODE (BS1) button to MODE

return to normal mode.
Normal
If you become unsure of how to
proceed, press the MODE (BS1)
button and return to normal mode.

2.6.2 Overview of Setting Mode (Mode 2)

This overview shows the available settings by using the press buttons on the outdoor unit PCB.
Item Contents
Display Display
No.
Description SEG SEG SEG Description SEG SEG SEG
1 2 3 1 2 3
Low noise/ Used to make address setting for low Address:
2 demand address noise/demand address. 2. 0 2 0~ 0
31 3 1
Indoor fan Used to force the fan of indoor unit to H Normal operation 0
5 2. 0 5
forced H tap. Indoor fan H 1
Forced Used to force all indoor units to operate Normal operation 0
6 2. 0 6
thermostat ON forced thermostat ON. Forced thermostat ON 1
Te setting Used to make setting of targeted Standard: 6°C 2
evaporating temperature for cooling High sensible: 7°C 3
operation. High sensible: 8°C 4
8 2. 0 8
High sensible: 9°C 5
Tc setting Used to make setting of targeted Low sensible: 41°C 1
9 condensing temperature for heating 2. 0 9 Standard: 43°C 3
operation. High sensible: 46°C 6
Defrost selection Used to adjust the defrost start Defrost IN –2° 0
10 setting temperature of outdoor coil, to initiate 2. 1 0 Normal 1
defrosting earlier/later. Defrost IN +2° 2
Eco setting is available from an external input. Unavailable 0
When this configuration is set, it is not possible to turn the Low noise level input 1
Eco refrigerant control ON/OFF using the remote Demand input 2
11 2. 1 1
controller. Also, depending on the settings, low noise
operation or demand operation may not be performed
using the external control adaptor.
External low Used to receive external low noise or Input LNO/DE
12 noise/demand demand signal. 2. 1 2 OFF 0
setting ON 1
AIRNET Used to set address of AIRNET Address:
13 address 2. 1 3 0~ 0
63 6 3
High EST mode High external static pressure mode ON (Auto adjust and 0
for outdoor fan setting re-judge)
OFF (Auto adjust without 1
18 2. 1 8 re-judge)
Forced level 0 2
Forced level 1 3
Forced level 2 4
Refrigerant Used to set the system to refrigerant Refrigerant recovery
21 recovery/ recovery mode (without compressor 2. 2 1 OFF 0
vacuuming run). ON 1
Automatic Automatic night-time low noise OFF 0
night-time low operation. Time for the operation is Level 1 1
22 noise operation subject to the start and end time 2. 2 2 Level 2 2
settings. Level 3 3
Used to set Eco mode invalid. Valid 0
When this configuration is set, it is not possible to turn the Invalid for cooling 1
23 Eco mode ON/OFF using the external control adaptor. 2. 2 3 Invalid for heating 2
Invalid 3

Item Contents
Display Display
No.
1 2 3 1 2 3
External Low noise level when the external low Level 1 1
25 night-time low noise signal is input at option
2. 2 5
Level 2 2
noise operation DTA104A61. Level 3 3
level
Automatic Time to start automatic “night-time low About 8:00 PM 1
night-time low noise” operation. (“Night-time low noise” About 10:00 PM 2
26 2. 2 6
noise operation level setting should also be made.) About 12:00 AM 3
start
Automatic Time to stop automatic “night-time low About 6:00 AM 1
night-time low noise” operation. (“Night-time low noise” About 7:00 AM 2
27 2. 2 7 About 8:00 AM 3
noise operation level setting should also be made.)
stop
Power transistor Used to troubleshoot DC compressor.
check Inverter waveforms are output without
wire connections to the compressor. It is 2. 2 8
OFF 0
28
useful to determine whether the relevant ON (10 Hz) 1
trouble has resulted from the
compressor or inverter PCB.
Capacity priority Cancel the low noise level control if
29 capacity is required while low noise 2. 2 9 OFF 0
operation or night-time low noise ON 1
operation is in progress.
Demand 1 Used to make a change to the targeted Level 1 (60%) 1
setting power consumption level when the Level 2 (65%) 2
demand 1 control signal is inputted. Level 3 (70%) 3
Level 4 (75%) 4
30 2. 3 0 Level 5 (80%) 5
Level 6 (85%) 6
Level 7 (90%) 7
Level 8 (95%) 8
Demand 2 Used to use a targeted power current Level 1 (40%) 1
31 setting level when the demand 2 control signal 2. 3 1 Level 2 (50%) 2
is inputted. Level 3 (55%) 3
Constant Used to set constant demand 1 or 2 OFF 0
32 demand setting control without inputting any external 2. 3 2 Demand 1 (Mode 2-30) 1
signal. Demand 2 (Mode 2-31) 2
Indoor fan upper Forced fan speed to low indoor units Cooling and heating 0
34 limit thermostat ON if total indoor 2. 3 4 Heating only 1
thermostat-ON > index 130. Never 2
Tc target setting To change Tc target cooling. Higher 0
35 2. 3 5 Lower 1
Do not use ~7
Outdoor fan Outdoor fan noise countermeasure (limit Standard 0
42 fan speed). 2. 4 2 Mode A 1
Mode B 2
Defrost four way At time defrost starts/end. Capacity priority 0
43 2. 4 3
valve Compressor OFF 1
Defrost Priority during defrost. Indoor priority 0
50 2. 5 0
Defrost priority 1

Item Contents
Display Display
No.
1 2 3 1 2 3
VRTsmart Used to change upper limit of target Low 1 0
control evaporation temperature in VRTsmart Low 2 1
Te upper limit control. Low 3 2
Low 4 3
76 2. 7 6 Low 5 4
Low 6 5
Standard 6
High 7
VRTsmart Used to change lower limit of target Low 0
control condensation temperature in VRTsmart Standard 1
Tc lower limit control. High 1 2
High 2 3
77 2. 7 7 High 3 4
High 4 5
High 5 6
High 6 7
VRT control Used to change upper limit of target Standard 4
78 Te upper limit evaporation temperature in VRT 2. 7 8 High 6
control.
VRT control Used to change lower limit of target Standard 2
79 Tc lower limit condensation temperature in VRT 2. 7 9 Low 3
control.
Cooling comfort setting ECO 0
Mild 1
81 2. 8 1
Quick 2
Powerful 3
Heating comfort setting ECO 0
82 2. 8 2 Mild 1
Quick 2
Powerful 3
83 Master remote control setting when mix combination 2. 8 3 VRV indoor — — 0

RA indoor 1
Initial indoor EV Initial indoor electronic expansion valve 400 pulse 0
84 opening opening at heating thermostat ON 2. 8 4 500 pulse 1
600 pulse 2
300 pulse 3
Indoor unit Possible for operate system when Disabled 0
90 without power some indoor units are temporary 2. 9 0 Enabled 1
without power supply.
Eco level setting for VRTsmart Standard 0
95 2. 9 5 Middle 1
High 2
Eco level setting for Eco mode by main PCB OFF 0
96 2. 9 6 Low 1
Standard 2
 Setting does not return to factory setting when exit mode 2. To cancel the function, change
setting manually to factory setting.
 Once function is activated t01 appears. To stop current function, press once BS3 “Return”
button.
For detailed description about each setting, refer to Details of Setting Mode (Mode 2) on page
122.
Indication bold means factory setting.

2.6.3 Details of Setting Mode (Mode 2)

 Mode 2-2: Low noise/demand address: address for low noise/demand operation.
 1 or more systems (maximum 10 systems wired by “F1F2 OUT/D”) can operate use the
LNO (Low Noise Operation) or/and the DE (Demand Control) by instruction of field
supplied input to optional board DTA104A61/62.
 To link the system to the corresponding DTA104A61/62, set the address same as the
DIP switches position on the related optional board DTA104A61/62.
 Ensure that also field setting 2-12-1 is set to enable input from optional board
DTA104A61/62.
 Mode 2-5: Cross wiring check.

 Default value: 0. Not active.
 Set 1: force all connected indoor units (except VKM) to operate the indoor fan on high
speed. This setting can be made to check which units are missing in the communication
if the number of indoor units do not correspond to the system lay out. Ensure that after
cross wiring check was confirmed, to return setting to default 2-5-0. Once setting 2-5-1 is
active, it is not automatically returning to default when exit mode 2.
 Mode 2-6: Forced thermostat ON command all connected indoor units.

 Set 1: force all connected indoor units to operate under “Test” (forced thermostat ON
command to outdoor). Ensure that when the forced thermostat ON needs to be ended, to
return setting to default 2-6-0. Once setting 2-6-1 is active, it is not automatically
returning to default when exit mode 2.
 Mode 2-8: Te target temperature for cooling operation. Change the setting in function of
required operation method during cooling. (Mode 2-23 should be 1 or 3)
 Default value: 2 (Te target: 6°C). The refrigerant temperature is fixed to average indoor
evaporating temperature of 6°C, independent from the situation. It corresponds to the
standard operation which is known and can be expected from/under previous VRV
systems.
 Set 3-7: High Sensible. The refrigerant temperature is set higher/lower in cooling
compared to basic operation. The focus under high sensible mode is comfort feeling for
the customer. The selection method of indoor units is important and has to be considered
as the available capacity is not the same as under basic operation. Activate this setting
under cooling operation.
Mode 2-8 Te target
2 6°C (default)
3 7°C
4 8°C
5 9°C
6 10°C
7 11°C
 Mode 2-11: Eco level setting for Eco mode via External control adaptor (Optional).
Mode 2-11 Meaning Level
0 Inactive (default) —
Eco mode active by low noise
1 Standard
terminal short-circuit
2 Eco mode active by demand 2-C short circuit: Low

terminal short-circuit 3-C short circuit: Standard
 Eco mode can be activated by short circuit the terminal on External control adaptor
(Optional) according to 2-11 setting. (2-23 should be “0”)
 This unit can operate with “Te fix control” and “Eco mode”.
 Eco mode means “VRT” & “VRTsmart” control
 If the terminal on external control adaptor is not connected by short circuit and 2-11 is not
0, the system operates according to 2-8 setting.

 Mode 2-12: Enable input “DTA104A61/62”: enable the low noise function and/or power
consumption limitation. If the system needs to be running under low noise operation or under
power consumption limitation conditions when an external signal is sent to the unit, this
setting should be changed. This setting will only be effective when the optional external
control adaptor for outdoor unit (DTA104A61/62) is installed and the address set by DIP
switches on DTA104A61/62 corresponds to the address set on the outdoor unit(s) – set 2-.
 Default value: 0.
 To enable input from DTA104A61/62, change the item 2-12 to 1.
 Mode 2-13: AIRNET address.

 When an AIRNET system will be used, outdoor unit needs an AIRNET address.
 Also to facilitate the recognition of a system in the map lay out of the service checker type
III, set each system a unique address between 1 and 63.
 When duplicating of AIRNET address, UC error code will appear on central control.
 Mode 2-18: Fan high external static pressure mode setting

 Fan revolutions will be adjusted automatically according to external static pressure.
 Default value: 0. Judge external static pressure level during operation check and every
cooling restart standby.
 Set 1: Judge external static pressure level during operation check.
 Set 2-4: Forced external static pressure level 0-2.
 Mode 2-21: Refrigerant recovery / vacuuming.

 Default value: 0. Recovery mode not active.
 Set 1: outdoor and indoor electronic expansion valves are opened fully (except EV3 for
PCM vessel). Compressor(s) do not operate.
 All controllers show “Test” and LED operation-ON, but indoor and outdoor fan do not
operate.
 Outdoor segment display indicates t01.
 By opening indoor and outdoor electronic expansion valves there is a free pathway to
reclaim remaining refrigerant out by using a refrigerant recovery unit to a refrigerant
recovery bottle.
 Prior to launch the recovery mode, ensure:
 To vacuum all lines between service hoses – refrigerant recovery unit and recovery
bottle.
 Weight the refrigerant recovery bottle to know recovered amount when refrigerant
recovery function is terminated.
 To end the refrigerant recovery mode, press BS3 button once. The 7 segment display
returns to normal (all off).
 Mode 2-22: Selection automatic night-time low noise operation level. The outdoor can
switch automatically to a pre-set night-time low noise operation level during night-time
judgment.
 Default value: 0. Auto night-time low noise operation not active.
 Set 1: use level 1.
 Set period: refer to set the item 2-26 for start time and the item 2-27 for end time.
 Mode 2-23: Eco mode invalid setting

 Eco mode becomes invalid by this setting.
 When this configuration is set, it is not possible to turn Eco mode ON/OFF using external
control adaptor or other setting.
 Default value: 0, Eco mode is active.
 Te fix control 2-23: 1 or 3
 Tc fix control 2-23: 2 or 3

 Mode 2-25: Night-time low noise operation level when using external input to optional board
DTA104A61/62.
 If the system needs to be running under low noise operation conditions when an external
signal is sent to the unit, this setting defines the level of low noise that will be applied.
 This setting will only be effective when the optional external control adaptor for outdoor
unit DTA104A61/62 is installed and the setting is enabled (mode 2-12-1).
 When night-time low noise operation is actually performed, conditions can be checked
via mode 1-1.
 The night-time low noise operation will not be performed in one of following conditions:
 Startup of system, or
 During oil return, or
 30 minutes after external input opened, or
 Capacity priority setting is active (refer to mode 2-29-1) and limit condition is met.
 Default value: 2 (level 2)
 Night-time low noise operation level can be selected to 1, 2, or 3 (field setting 2-25-1, 2,
3).
 Mode 2-26: Start time automatic night-time low noise operation. When the auto
night-time low noise operation is active (refer to field setting 2-22) outdoor will start when
start time is reached. The time judgment is taken from outdoor air tendency.
Peak in the outdoor

100% temperature Load %
Operating
8 hrs 10 hrs sound dB(A)
50%
52 dB(A)
Night
quiet mode
Min. 40 dB(A)* *45 dB(A)

40 dB(A)* for 3-phase models
8:00 AM 12:00 PM 4:00 PM 8:00 PM 12:00 AM 4:00 AM 8:00 AM

Night mode STARTS Night mode ENDS
 Default value: 2 (10:00 PM)

 Field setting 1: 8:00 PM, 3: 12:00 AM (midnight).
 Mode 2-27: Stop time automatic night-time low noise operation. When the auto
night-time low noise operation is active (refer to field setting 2-22), outdoor unit will stop the
night-time low noise operation level automatically when stop time is reached.
 Default value: 3 (8:00 AM)
 Field setting 1: 6:00 AM, 2: 7:00 AM
 Mode 2-28: Power transistor check mode. To evaluate the output of the power transistors.
Use this function in case error code is displayed related to defective inverter PCB or
compressor is locked.
 Default value: 0. Power transistor check mode is not active.
 Field setting 1: Power transistor check mode is active.
 Function:
 Inverter circuit gives output of 10 rps in sequence by all 6 transistors. Remove the
U/V/W terminals of the compressor, and connect to the inverter checker module. If all
6 LEDs blink, the transistors switch correctly.
 When the power transistor check mode is set back to 0 (default), after turning off the
power supply, 2 LEDs will light up to indicate discharge of the DC voltage.

 Wait until the LEDs are OFF before returning fasten terminals back to the compressor
terminals.
 Minimum requirements to refer to the result on the inverter checker module:
 Line (for RXYMQ4AVMK) or all 3 phases (for RXYMQ4-6AYFK) and neutral are
available, and
 Inverter circuit is active. Check if the green LED “HBP” on the main PCB (for
RXYMQ4AVMK) or "HAP" on the inverter PCB (for RXYMQ4-6AYFK) is blinking
normally (approximately 1/second). If LED is OFF, need to exit the “standby mode” of
the inverter:
 Disconnect and reconnect power supply control PCB, or
 Forced thermostat ON condition, or
 Make shortly set 2-6-1 (forced thermostat ON indoor), or
 2-20-1 (manual refrigerant charge).
 Once the LED is blinking on the PCB, change related setting immediately back to set
0 to deactivate related function.
 Diode module generates the required 300 VDC (for RXYMQ4AVMK) or 500 VDC (for
RXYMQ4-6AYFK).
 Cautions:
 To stop the power transistor check mode, change setting to default 2-28-0.
 Output to U/V/W will also stop when outdoor unit main PCB decides standby mode of
inverter circuit.
 Below time graphs show the different steps during the power transistor check mode.
 Switching sequence during power transistor check mode:
RXYMQ4AVMK
Disconnect U/V/W from compressor before Power supply

performing the power transistor check. OFF
Power transistor check Power transistor check

mode activate; mode activate;
Mode 2-28 set 0Ѝ1 Mode 2-28 set 1Ѝ0
VAC [U/V/W] VDC [C+/C–]
(310 VAC)
Frequency 10 rps
60 VAC
About 6 minutes
Time
Check 1 Check 2 Check 3 Check 4 Check 5
VAC VDC VDC = VAC VDC
L/N C+/C– 1.42 × VAC U/V/W C+/C–
Check 1: AC power input (L, N on X1M: power supply terminal block) around 220 V
Check 2: DC voltage on inverter circuit capacitor (C+,C–) increases to around 310 V.
Check 3: VDC = 1.42 × VAC power supply (calculation from Check 1 and Check 2)
Check 4: AC U/V/W 10 rps intermediate (at fasten U/V/W) around 10 V
Check 5: DC voltage drop (discharge inverter circuit capacitor DC) check difference between “C+, C–” within 2
LED (V phase) brightness reduce till off.
*Note: Actual voltage value depends on meter characteristics.

RXYMQ4-6AYFK
Disconnect U/V/W from compressor before

performing the power transistor check.
Step 2:
Voltage Mode 2-28
Step 1: output Check 2
Set 02Ѝ01, then
Mode 2-28 U/V/W Frequency: 10 Hz press “Return” twice
Set 01Ѝ02, then OR press “MODE” button
press “Return” twice
±100V
AC*
Check 1 ±6 sec ±3 sec
Check 1 : AC power input 380-415 V unbalance max. 2%.

Check 2 : AC U/V/W 10 Hz intermediate: check difference within 10 V (at fasten U/V/W)
*Note: Actual voltage value depends on meter characteristics

 Mode 2-29: Capacity priority. When the night-time low noise operation is in use,
performance of system might drop because airflow rate of outdoor unit is reduced.
 Default value: 0. Capacity priority cannot be used.
 Field setting 1: capacity priority can temporary cancel the night-time low noise operation.
Capacity priority can be initiated when certain operation parameters approach the safety
setting:
 Raise in high pressure during cooling.
 Drop in low pressure during heating.
 Raise of discharge pipe temperature.
 Raise of inverter current.
 Raise of fin temperature inverter PCB.
 When operation parameters return to normal range, the capacity priority is switched OFF,
enable to reduce airflow rate depending on night-time low noise operation is still required
(end time for low night noise operation is not reached or external input night-time low
noise operation is still closed).
If capacity priority is set in

Operation capacity priority setting, the fan
sound speed will be increased Time set with night-time low
Time set with night-time low according to the load of air noise operation end setting
noise operation start setting conditioning when load is heavier.
Rated
∗Night-time
Level 1
Level 2 ∗Low noise

∗Operation sound mode mode instructing
set with night-time low
noise operation setting
Level 3 Low noise mode ∗Operation sound set with
instructing Operation sound external low noise setting
set with external low noise
setting
8:00 PM 10:00 PM 12:00 AM 6:00 AM 7:00 AM 8:00 AM
Set with night-time low noise operation start Set with night-time low noise operation end
setting. (Factory setting is 10:00 PM.) setting. (Factory setting is 8:00 AM.)

 Mode 2-30: Power consumption limitation level 1. If the system needs to be running
under power consumption limitation conditions via the external control adaptor for outdoor
unit DTA104A61/62. This setting defines the level power consumption limitation that will be
applied for level 1. The level is according the table.
 Default: 3 (70%)
 Field setting:
Mode 2-30 current limit set (%)
1 60
2 65
3 70 (default)
4 75
5 80
6 85
7 90
8 95
 Mode 2-31: Power consumption limitation level 2. If the system needs to be running
under power consumption limitation conditions via the external control adaptor for outdoor
unit DTA104A61/62. This setting defines the level power consumption limitation that will be
applied for level 2. The level is according the table.
 Default: 1 (40%)
 Field setting:
Mode 2-31 current limit set (%)
1 40 (default)
2 50
3 55
 Mode 2-32: Forced, all time, power consumption limitation operation (no external control
adaptor is required to perform power consumption limitation).
 If the system always needs to be running under power consumption limitation conditions,
this setting activates and defines the level power consumption limitation that will be
applied continuously. The level is according to the table.
 Default value:0 (OFF).
Mode 2-32 Restriction reference

0 Function not active (default)
1 Follows 2-30 setting
2 Follows 2-31 setting
 Mode 2-81: Cooling comfort setting. The comfort level is related to the timing and the
effort (power consumption) which is put in achieving a certain room temperature by changing
temporally the refrigerant temperature to different values in order to achieve requested
conditions more quickly.
 Default value: 1 (Mild). Undershoot during cooling operation is allowed compared to the
requested refrigerant temperature, in order to achieve the required room temperature
very fast. The undershoot is not allowed from the startup moment. The startup occurs
under the condition which is defined by the operation mode. In case of cooling operation
the evaporating temperature is allowed to go down to 6°C on temporary base depending
on the situation. When the request from the indoor units becomes more moderate, the
system will eventually go to the steady state condition which is defined by the operation
method above. The startup condition is different from the powerful and quick comfort
setting.
 Field setting:
 0: Eco. The original refrigerant temperature target, which is defined by the Te setting
(field setting 2-8) in cooling mode, is kept without any correction, unless for protection
control.

 2: Quick. Undershoot during cooling operation is allowed compared to the requested

refrigerant temperature, in order to achieve the required room temperature very fast.
The overshoot is allowed from the start up moment. In case of cooling operation the
evaporating temperature is allowed to go down to 6°C on temporary base depending
on the situation. When the request from the indoor units becomes more moderate, the
system will eventually go to the steady state condition which is defined by the
operation method above.
 3: Powerful. Undershoot during cooling operation is allowed compared to the
requested refrigerant temperature, in order to achieve the required room temperature
very fast. The overshoot is allowed from the start up moment. In case of cooling
operation the evaporating temperature is allowed to go down to 3°C on temporary
base depending on the situation. This setting is used in conjunction with setting 2-8.
 The graph below shows the different patterns of target Te according to setting 2-81 “cooling
comfort setting”
Refrigerant temperature
Target Powerful mode
Te
Quick mode
Mild mode
Te 6°C
Te 3°C
time
 Mode 2-82: Heating comfort setting. The comfort level is related to the timing and the effort
(power consumption) which is put in achieving a certain room temperature by changing
temporally the refrigerant temperature to different values in order to achieve requested
conditions more quickly.
 Default value: 1 (Mild). Overshooting during heating operation is allowed compared to
the requested refrigerant temperature, in order to achieve the required room temperature
very fast. The overshoot is not allowed from the startup moment. The startup occurs
under the condition which is defined by the operation mode. In case of heating operation
the condense temperature is allowed to go up to 46°C on temporary base depending on
the situation. When the request from the indoor units becomes more moderate, the
system will eventually go to the steady state condition which is defined by the operation
method above. The startup condition is different from the powerful and quick comfort
setting.
 Field setting:
 0: “Eco”. The original refrigerant temperature target, which is defined by the Tc setting
(field setting 2-9) in heating mode, is kept without any correction, unless for protection
control.
 2: “Quick”. Overshoot during heating operation is allowed compared to the requested
refrigerant temperature, in order to achieve the required room temperature very fast.
The overshoot is allowed from the start up moment. In case of heating operation the
condense temperature is allowed to go up to 46°C on temporary base depending on
the situation. When the request from the indoor units becomes more moderate, the
system will eventually go to the steady state condition which is defined by the
operation method above.
 3: “Powerful”. The overshoot is allowed from the start up moment. In case of heating
operation the condense temperature is allowed to go up to 49°C on temporary base
depending on the situation. This setting is used in conjunction with setting 2-9.
 Mode 2-83: Allocation of cool/heat master logic. When system contains VRV DX indoor
and RA indoor (through BP units), it is required to assign the cool/heat change over logic to
follow.

 Default value: 1. RA cool/heat master logic. Any RA indoor unit that is switched first, is
assigned as cool/heat master as long this unit is in operation (regardless thermostat
status). Only when this indoor unit is switched OFF operation (by remote controller),
other indoor unit can become cool/heat master:
 Priority is given to indoor unit operating in the same mode as the previous cool/heat
master switched OFF operation.
 Only no more indoor unit operate in the same mode as the previous cool/heat master,
other RA indoor unit can become cool/heat master to switch to the other operation
mode.
 RA indoor unit that is operating, but demanding the other operation mode set by the
cool/heat master, enters the “stand-by mode”: operation LED blinks.
 VRV indoor unit change the operation mode immediately when outdoor unit receives
change of operation mode from the current cool/heat master RA indoor unit.
 Field Setting 0: VRV cool/heat master logic.
 At time of first startup, or when cool/heat master was released, one of connected VRV
DX indoor unit can be assigned cool/heat master. The symbol “locked cool/heat
selector” blinks. In case of wireless controller kit is used, the green clock LED
blinks on the receiver.
 Confirm cool/heat master to a VRV DX indoor unit: press once the cool/heat selector
button
on the remote controller of the indoor unit to be set as cool/heat master.
 Mode 2-84: Initial opening electronic expansion valve BP unit heating thermostat-ON:
 Default value: 1 (500 pulse)
 Field setting 0: 400 pulse, 2: 600 pulse, 3: 300 pulse.
 Mode 2-90: Indoor unit without power U4 error generation. In case an indoor unit needs
maintenance or repair on the electric side, it is possible to keep the rest of the VRV DX
indoor units operating without power supply to some indoor unit(s).
 Field setting 1: Possible to operate system when some indoor units are temporary
without power supply. The following conditions must be fulfilled:
 Maximum equivalent piping length of the farthest indoor less than 120 m.
 Index indoor units power simultaneously less than 30% of the nominal outdoor.
 Total capacity is less than 30% of the nominal one of the outdoor unit.
 Operation time is limited to 24 hours period.
 It is recommended to shut down connected indoor units at the same floor.
 Not possible to use service mode operation (e.g. recovery mode).
 Backup operation has priority over this special feature.
 Not possible to use when the indoor unit electronic expansion valve is defective.
 Not possible to use with systems that include BP units.
 It is necessary to wait for 10 min. before shutting down the connected indoor units
after indoor units operation is stopped.
 Mode 2-96: Eco level setting for Eco mode by main PCB
 Default value: 0
Mode 2-96 Eco level setting
0 OFF (default)
1 Low
2 Standard

2.7 Eco Mode Setting

By connecting an external contact input in the input of mode configuration and external control
adaptor (sold separately), you may control Eco mode setting, limiting compressor operation
load and power consumption.
When Eco mode is set as unavailable (Outdoor unit external control adaptor is
unnecessary)
Eco mode control is unavailable during cooling operation.
When the Eco level of Eco mode control is set as Standard/Low or Eco mode control is
set as unavailable by external control adaptor
Setting description Setting mode
Item Condition Description External control adaptor Outdoor unit PCB
Eco level Standard Eco level set as Short-circuit the low Set mode 2-11 to
Standard by low noise noise level terminal in Eco setting by low noise
level the terminal TeS1 level input
Eco level set as Short-circuit the demand Set mode 2-11 to
Standard by demand input terminal 3 – C in Eco setting by demand
control the terminal TeS1 input
Low Eco level set as Low Short-circuit the demand
by demand control input terminal 2 – C in
the terminal TeS1
Eco control unavailable Eco control set as Open the low noise Set mode 2-11 to
unavailable by low level terminal in the Eco setting by low noise
noise level terminal TeS1 level input
Eco control set as Open the demand Set mode 2-11 to
unavailable by input terminal in the Eco setting by demand
demand control terminal TeS1 input
1. Connect the external control adaptor and short-circuit the input terminal TeS1 if necessary.
2. Set mode 2-11 (External Eco Setting) to Eco setting by low noise level input or Eco
setting by demand input according to the short-circuited terminal.
About Eco Level Setting

The upper limit of Te (target evaporation temperature) and the lower limit of Tc (target
condensation temperature) are changed based on the Eco level.
In case of VRTsmart control

VRTsmart control Mode 2-76: Te upper limit Mode 2-77: Tc lower limit
Eco level Standard 22°C 30°C
Low 9°C 42°C
1 The lowest temperature between the above and mode 2-76 VRTsmart control Te upper limit
is set.
2 The highest temperature between the above and mode 2-77 VRTsmart control Tc lower limit
is set.
In case of VRT control

VRT control Mode 2-78: Te upper limit Mode 2-79: Tc lower limit
Standard High Standard Low
Eco level Standard 17°C 21°C 38°C 36°C
Low 16°C 20°C 40°C 38°C
The priority of each setting is as follows:

1. Mode 2-23 (Eco Control Unavailable Setting)
2. Mode 2-11 (External Eco Setting) and external control adaptor input
3. Eco mode setting

2.8 Night-Time Low Noise Operation and Demand Operation

Night-time Low Noise Operation
By connecting the external contact input to the low noise input of the outdoor unit external
control adaptor (optional), you can lower operating noise by 2-3 dB.
Setting Content
Level 1 Set the outdoor fan to Step 8 or lower.
Level 2 Set the outdoor fan to Step 7Y or lower.
Level 3 Set the outdoor fan to Step 6 or lower.
A. When night-time low noise operation is carried out by external contact (with the use of
the external control adaptor for outdoor unit)
1. Connect external control adaptor for outdoor unit and short circuit terminal of night-time low
noise operation (Refer below figure). If carrying out demand or low noise input, connect the
adaptor’s terminals as shown below. External control adaptor for outdoor unit Host computer
Outside wiring indicated monitor panel by dotted line or demand controller
F1 X
F2 X
P3 X
P4 X
External control Demand Low

adaptor for 1 2 3 C noise
outdoor unit X X X X X X
Host computer Outside wiring indicated

monitor panel by dotted line
or demand
controller
2. While in setting mode 2, set the item 2-12 (External low noise or demand setting) to ON.
3. If necessary, while in setting mode 2, select an external low noise level for the item 2-25.
4. If necessary, while in setting mode 2, set the item 2-29 (Capacity priority setting) to ON. (If
the condition is set to ON, when the air conditioning load reaches a high level, the low noise
operation command will be ignored to put the system into normal operation mode.)
B. When night-time low noise operation is carried out automatically (External control
adaptor for outdoor unit is not required)
1. While in setting mode 2, select a night-time low noise operation level for the item 2-22.
2. If necessary, while in setting mode 2, select a starting time of night-time low noise operation
(i.e., 8:00 PM, 10:00 PM, or 12:00 AM) for the item 2-26. (Use the starting time as a guide since
it is estimated according to outdoor temperatures.)
3. If necessary, while in setting mode 2, select an ending time of night-time low noise operation
(i.e., 06:00 AM, 07:00 AM, or 08:00 AM) for the item 2-27. (Use the ending time as a guide since
it is estimated according to outdoor air temperatures.)
4. If necessary, while in setting mode 2, set the item 2-29 (Capacity priority setting) to ON. (If the
condition is set to ON, when the air conditioning load reaches a high level, the system will be put
into normal operation mode even during night-time.)

Image of operation in the case of A
Operation If capacity priority is set in

sound Capacity priority setting, the fan
speed will be increased according
to the load of air conditioning
when load is heavier.
Rated Operation sound
during low noise
Low noise mode instructing mode can be set with
Level 1 The power consumption may External low noise
level setting (Factory
be decreased by about 10%.
setting is level 2.)
Level 2 The power consumption may
Level 3 The power consumption may
Operation sound level set with External low noise setting
Note 1: Above values are reference only (measured in silent room)

Note 2: Target sound level
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
RXYMQ4AVMK 50 dB 45 dB 40 dB
RXYMQ4-6AYFK 55 dB 50 dB 45 dB
Image of operation in the case of B

Operation Capacity priority setting, the fan
sound speed will be increased
Time set with night-time low noise according to the load of air Time set with night-time low
operation start setting conditioning when load is heavier. noise operation end setting
Rated
Operation sound during
night-time low noise
Night-time operation mode can be set
Level 1 with night-time low noise
operation level setting.
(Factory setting is OFF.)
Level 2
Level 3
Operation sound level set with
night-time low noise operation
setting
8:00 PM 10:00 PM 12:00 AM 6:00 AM 7:00 AM 8:00 AM

Set with night-time low noise operation start setting. Set with night-time low noise operation end setting.
(Factory setting is 10:00 PM.) (Factory setting is 8:00 AM.)
Image of operation in the case of A and B

Operation Capacity priority setting, the fan
sound speed will be increased Time set with night-time low noise
Time set with night-time low noise according to the load of air operation end setting
operation start setting conditioning when load is heavier. Operation sound during
Rated low noise mode can be set
with External quiet operation
level setting.
Night-time (Factory setting is level 2.)
Level 1
Operation sound during
night-time low noise operation
Low noise mode can be set with night-time
Level 2 Operation sound level set mode instructing low noise operation level setting.
with night-time low noise (Factory setting is OFF.)
operation setting When external low noise
Level 3 instruction is received during
Low noise mode Operation sound set with
instructing External low noise setting the operation with night-time
Operation sound set with low noise operation mode.
External low noise setting Level 2 precedes level 1 and
level 3 precedes level 2.
8:00 PM 10:00 PM 12:00 AM 6:00 AM 7:00 AM 8:00 AM
Set with night-time low noise operation start setting. Set with night-time low noise operation end setting.
(Factory setting is 10:00 PM.) (Factory setting is 8:00 AM.)

Setting of Demand Operation

By connecting the external contact input to the demand input of the external control adaptor for
outdoor unit (optional), the power consumption of unit operation can be saved suppressing the
compressor operating condition.
Setting content Setting method
External control adaptor
Set item Condition Content for outdoor Outdoor unit PCB
unit
Level 1 The compressor operates at Set the item 2-32 to Demand 1, and the item
60% or less of rating. 2-30 to Level 1.
75% or less of rating. Short circuit "1" and 2-30 to Level 4.
Demand 1 "C" on the terminal strip
Level 5 The compressor operates at (TeS1). Set the item 2-32 to Demand 1, and the item
Demand 2 50% or less of rating. Short circuit "2" and "C". 2-31 to Level 2.
Demand 3 — Forced thermostat OFF Short circuit "3" and "C". —
: However the demand operation does not occur in the following operation modes.
(1) Startup control
(2) Oil return control
(3) Defrost control
(4) Pump down residual control
If carrying out demand or low noise input, connect the adaptor’s terminals as shown below.
F1 X
F2 X
P3 X
P4 X
External control Demand Low

adaptor for 1 2 3 C noise
outdoor unit X X X X X X
Host computer Outside wiring indicated

monitor panel by dotted line
or demand
controller
A. When the demand operation is carried out by external contact (with the use of the
external control adaptor for outdoor unit).
1. Connect external control adaptor for outdoor unit and short circuit terminals as required
(Refer to the figure above).
2. While in setting mode 2, set the item 2-12 (External low noise or demand setting) to ON.
3. If necessary, while in setting mode 2, select a demand 1 level for the item 2-30.
B. When the constant demand operation is carried out. (Use of the external control
adaptor for outdoor unit is not required.)
1. While in setting mode 2, set the item 2-32 (Constant demand setting) to Level 1.
While in setting mode 2, select a demand 1 level for the item 2-30.

Image of operation in the case of A
Power consumption
Rated
Demand level 1 Demand level 2 Demand level 3 The power
instructing instructing instructing consumption
80% during the
demand level 1
70% instructing can be
60% set with the
Power consumption set by "Demand 1 level
"Demand 1 level setting". setting".
40% ("70% of rated
power
consumption" has
been set at
Forced thermostat OFF factory.)
(Fan operation)
Image of operation in the case of B
Power consumption When the

"Normal demand
setting" is set to
ON ("OFF" has
been set at
Rated factory.), the
power
consumption can
80% be set with the
70% "Demand 1 level
setting". ("70% of
60% The power consumption set with "Demand 1 level setting". rated power
consumption" has
been set at
factory.)
Image of operation in the case of A and B

Power consumption The power
consumption can
be set with the
"Demand 1 level
setting". ("70% of
rated power
Rated consumption" has
been set at
80% factory.)
70%
60% The power consumption set with
#Demand level #Demand level
"Demand 1 level setting". 2 instructing 3 instructing
40%
#During constant demand
operation, when the
Forced thermostat OFF external demand
(Fan operation) instruction is received, the
instruction with higher
demand level has the
precedence.

SiME332106E Test Operation
3. Test Operation
3.1 Checks before Test Operation
Before carrying out a test operation, proceed as follows:
Step Action
Make sure the voltage at the primary side of the safety breaker is:
1 220-240 V ± 10% for 1-phase units;
380-415 V ± 10% for 3-phase units.
2 Fully open the liquid and the gas stop valve.
3.2 Checkpoints
To carry out a test operation, check the following:
 Check that the temperature setting of the remote controller is at the lowest level in cooling
mode or use test mode.
 Go through the following checklist:
Checkpoints Cautions or warnings
Are all units securely installed? Dangerous for turning over during storm
Possible damage to pipe connections
Is the earth wire installed according to the applicable Dangerous if electric leakage occurs
local standard?
Are all air inlets and outlets of the indoor and outdoor Poor cooling
units unobstructed? Poor heating
Does the drain flow out smoothly? Water leakage
Is piping adequately heat-insulated? Water leakage
Have the connections been checked for gas Poor cooling
leakage? Poor heating
Stop
Is the supply voltage conform to the specifications on Incorrect operation
the name plate?
Are the cable sizes as specified and according to Damage of cables
local regulations?
Are the remote controller signals received by the No operation
unit?

Test Operation SiME332106E
3.3 Test Operation Procedure

To start smoothly, a crankcase heater is equipped to the unit. To power up the crankcase heater
in advance, be sure to turn on the power supply 6 hours before operation.
Warning Be sure to inform other installers or attach the front panel well before leaving with the power
supply turned on for the outdoor unit.
Before powering ON
 Protect the electronic components with insulating tape in accordance with the Service
Precautions label attached to the front panel.
 All indoor units connected with the outdoor unit will operate automatically after powering on.
To ensure safety, check the indoor unit installation has been completed.
Powering On to Test Operation

 Make sure to perform a test operation first after installation (If the unit is operated with the
indoor unit’s remote controller without performing a test operation, the error code U3 will be
displayed on the remote controller and the unit will not operate normally).
 After turning on the power supply, do not touch any switches excluding push button switches
and DIP switches when setting the outdoor unit PCB (A1P).
(For positions of the button switches (BS1~3) and DIP switches (DS1, 2) on the PCB, refer
to the Service Precautions label)
 Check the state of the outdoor units and fault wiring with this operation.
1. Attach the front panel of the outdoor unit.

Turn on the power supply of the outdoor and indoor units.
2. Make sure all field settings you want are set.
3. Turn ON the power to the outdoor unit and the connected indoor units.
4. Make sure the default (idle) situation is existing. Push BS2 for 5 seconds or more. The unit
will start test operation.
 The test operation is automatically carried out, the outdoor unit display will indicate t01 and
the indication "Test operation" and "Under centralized control" will display on the user
interface of indoor units.
Steps during the automatic system test run procedure:
t01: control before start up (pressure equalization)
t02: cooling start up control
t03: cooling stable condition
t04: communication check
t05: stop valve check
t06: pipe length check
t07: refrigerant amount check
t08: in case [2-88]=0, detailed refrigerant situation check (RXYMQ4AVMK only)
t09: pump down operation
t10: unit stop
 If the automatic refrigerant charge function has been used, t07 and t08 will not be displayed
during the test operation, as they have already been checked during automatic refrigerant
charge operation.
 During the test operation, it is not possible to stop the unit operation from a user interface. To
abort the operation, press BS3. The unit will stop after ±30 seconds.
5. Check the test operation results on the outdoor unit segment display.
Normal completion: no indication on the segment display (idle)
Abnormal completion: indication of error code on the segment display
Take actions for correcting the abnormality. When the test operation is fully completed, normal
operation will be possible after 5 minutes.
6. Be sure to attach the front panel of the outdoor unit after test operation is completed.

SiME332106E Test Operation
About test operation

 In order to ensure uniform refrigerant distribution, it may take up to around 10 minutes for the
compressor to start up after the unit starting operation. This is not an error.
 Meaning of operation check is not to check individual indoor unit. After completing operation
check, operate the system normally with the remote controller.
 Test operation cannot be performed when the unit is in other modes such as refrigerant
recycling mode.
 Never perform test operation with discharge pipe thermistor (R2T), suction pipe thermistor
(R3T) and pressure sensor (S1NPH, S1NPL) removed. Doing so will result in compressor
damaged.
For Normal Operation

Set the master unit (the indoor unit)
For wired remote controller
 After test operation is completed, symbol MASTER CONTROLLED blinks on all connected
remote controllers.
 Set the master unit as customer's request.
(It is recommended to set the indoor unit with highest frequency of use as the master unit.)
 Press the operation mode changeover button on the remote controller of the master unit.
 Conduct cool/heat changeover with this remote controller and the symbol MASTER
CONTROLLED vanishes.
 For other remote controllers excluding the above, the symbol MASTER CONTROLLED
lights up.
For wireless remote controller
 After test operation is completed, timer lamps blink on all indoor units connected.
 Set the master unit as customer's request.
(It is recommended to set the indoor unit with highest frequency of use as the master unit.)
 Press the operation mode changeover button on the remote controller of the master unit.
Then a sound of beeps can be heard and the timer lamps on all indoor units go out.
 The indoor unit has the option to change over between cooling/heating operation.
For details, refer to the installation manual included with the indoor unit.
 After test operation is completed, operate the unit normally.
(1) Check the indoor and outdoor units are in normal operation.
(If a knocking sound can be heard produced by liquid compression of the compressor,
stop the unit immediately.)
(2) Operate each indoor unit one by one and check the corresponding outdoor unit is also in
operation.
(3) Check to see if cold (or hot) air is coming out from the indoor unit.
(4) Press the fan direction and strength buttons of the indoor unit to see if they operate
properly.
About normal operation check
 The compressor will not restart in about 5 minutes even if the ON/OFF button of the remote
controller is pressed.
 When the system operation is stopped by the remote controller, the outdoor unit may
continue operating for further 1 minute at maximum.
 If any check operation was not performed through test operation at first installation, the error
code U3 will be displayed. In this case, perform check operation in accordance with
Powering ON to Test Operation on page 136.

Test Operation SiME332106E
3.4 Turn Power ON

Turn outdoor unit and indoor • Be sure to turn the power ON 6 hours before starting operation to protect
unit power ON. compressors.
Check the 7 segment display of • Check to be sure the transmission is normal.

the outdoor unit PCB. In a normal condition, the 7-segment display is OFF. Please refer to the
following figure for other states.
OFF
Light up
SEG1 SEG2 SEG3

Blinking
Power switched ON
initial check
Normal Abnormal
Initialization in
progress
Main error code Switching

alternative
1 second
Initialization
terminated
(normal)
Sub error code
(∗) The master unit is the outdoor unit to which the transmission wiring for
the indoor units is connected.
The other outdoor units are slave units.
• Make field settings if needed.

Make field settings with outdoor
(For the setting procedure, refer to information in "Field Settings for
unit PCB.
Outdoor Unit".)
For the outdoor-multi system, make field settings with the master unit.
(Field settings made with the slave unit will be all invalid.)
The check operations shown below will be automatically initiated.

Conduct check operations.
• Check for erroneous wirings
• Check for failure to open stop valves
• Check for excessive refrigerant refilling
• Automatic judgment of piping length
• Before starting the normal operation after the completion of check

Check for normal operation. operations, make sure indoor and outdoor units normally operate.

SiME332106E
Part 6
Service Diagnosis
1. Servicing Items to be Confirmed .........................................................142

1.1 Troubleshooting....................................................................................142
1.2 Precautions for Maintenance................................................................142
1.3 Refrigerant Properties (R-410A)...........................................................143
2. Symptom-based Troubleshooting .......................................................144
2.1 With Optional Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor.....................................147
2.2 For All Outdoor Units............................................................................148
3. Error Code via Remote Controller.......................................................149
3.1 BRC1E63 .............................................................................................149
3.2 BRC1H81 Series ..................................................................................150
3.3 BRC4M Series......................................................................................151
4. Error Code via Outdoor Unit PCB .......................................................152
5. Troubleshooting by Error Code ...........................................................153
5.1 Error Codes and Descriptions ..............................................................153
5.2 Error Codes (Sub Codes).....................................................................155
5.3 External Protection Device Abnormality ...............................................160
5.5 Drain Level Control System Abnormality..............................................162
5.6 Indoor Fan Motor Lock, Overload.........................................................164
5.7 Indoor Fan Motor Abnormality..............................................................166
5.8 Power Supply Voltage Abnormality ......................................................172
5.9 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality, Dust Clogging ..............175
5.10 Humidifier System Abnormality ............................................................176
5.11 Auto Grille Unit Error ............................................................................177
5.12 Defective Capacity Setting ...................................................................178
5.13 Transmission Abnormality (between Indoor Unit PCB and
Fan PCB)..............................................................................................179
5.14 Transmission Error ...............................................................................181
5.15 Transmission Error (between Indoor Unit PCB and Auto Grille
Control PCB) ........................................................................................182
5.17 Combination Abnormality (between Indoor Unit PCB and Fan PCB)...185
5.18 Capacity Setting Abnormality ...............................................................186
5.20 Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor Error ..................................................188
5.21 Remote Controller Thermistor Abnormality ..........................................193
5.22 Outdoor Unit Main PCB Abnormality....................................................194
5.23 Current Leakage Detection ..................................................................195
5.24 Missing of Leakage Detection Core .....................................................196
5.25 Activation of High Pressure Switch ......................................................197
5.26 Activation of Low Pressure Sensor ......................................................199
5.27 Compressor Motor Lock .......................................................................200
Part 6 Service Diagnosis 139

SiME332106E
5.28 Outdoor Fan Motor Abnormality ...........................................................202

5.29 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality.......................................205
5.30 Discharge Pipe Temperature Abnormality ...........................................206
5.31 Wet Alarm.............................................................................................208
5.32 Refrigerant Overcharged......................................................................210
5.33 Harness Abnormality (between Outdoor Unit Main PCB and
Inverter PCB)........................................................................................211
5.34 OL Activation (Compressor Overload) .................................................212
5.35 Outdoor Fan PCB Abnormality.............................................................214
5.37 High Pressure Sensor Abnormality ......................................................217
5.38 Low Pressure Sensor Abnormality .......................................................218
5.39 Inverter Circuit Abnormality ..................................................................219
5.40 Momentary Power Failure during Test Operation ................................221
5.41 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Rise Abnormality .........................222
5.42 Compressor Instantaneous Overcurrent ..............................................224
5.43 Compressor Overcurrent......................................................................226
5.44 Compressor Startup Abnormality .........................................................228
5.45 Transmission Error between Microcomputers on Outdoor Unit
Main PCB .............................................................................................230
5.46 Transmission Error between Inverter PCB and Outdoor Unit
Main PCB .............................................................................................231
5.47 Inverter Circuit Capacitor High Voltage ................................................233
5.48 Power Supply Voltage Imbalance ........................................................234
5.49 Reactor Temperature Abnormality .......................................................236
5.50 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Abnormality .................................237
5.51 Field Setting after Replacing Outdoor Unit Main PCB Abnormality or
Combination of PCB Abnormality.........................................................239
5.52 Refrigerant Shortage Warning (Cooling) ..............................................240
5.53 Refrigerant Shortage Warning (Heating)..............................................241
5.54 Refrigerant Shortage Abnormality (Heating Only)................................243
5.55 Open Phase .........................................................................................246
5.56 Power Supply Insufficient or Instantaneous Abnormality .....................247
5.57 Check Operation Not Executed............................................................251
5.58 Transmission Error between Indoor Units and Outdoor Units..............252
5.59 Transmission Error between Remote Controller and Indoor Unit.........255
5.60 Transmission Error between Outdoor Units .........................................256
5.61 Transmission Error between Main and Sub Remote Controllers .........260
5.62 Other Indoor Units and Outdoor Unit Abnormality................................261
Indoor Unit and Remote Controller.......................................................262
5.64 Address Duplication of Centralized Controller......................................265
5.65 Transmission Error between Centralized Controller and Indoor Unit ...266
5.66 System Not Set Yet ..............................................................................269
5.67 System Abnormality, Refrigerant System Address Undefined .............270
6. Check ..................................................................................................271
6.1 High Pressure Check ...........................................................................271
6.2 Low Pressure Check ............................................................................272
6.3 Superheat Operation Check.................................................................273
6.4 Power Transistor Check .......................................................................275
6.5 Refrigerant Overcharge Check.............................................................278
6.6 Refrigerant Shortage Check.................................................................279
140 Part 6 Service Diagnosis

SiME332106E
6.7 Vacuuming and Dehydration Procedure ..............................................280

6.8 Thermistor Check .................................................................................281
6.9 Pressure Sensor Check .......................................................................284
6.10 Broken Wire Check of the Relay Wires ................................................285
6.11 Fan Motor Connector Check (Power Supply Cable) ............................285
6.12 Fan Motor Connector Check (Signal Cable) ........................................287
6.13 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Check ...............................................288

Servicing Items to be Confirmed SiME332106E
1. Servicing Items to be Confirmed

1.1 Troubleshooting
1. Initial verification and troubleshooting
(1) Properly understand the end user's needs and issues.
(2) Check the cause of errors according to the description provided by the end user.
(3) Check if the remote controller displays any error codes.
(Or use the outdoor unit monitor mode to check for errors).
If there is no display of error codes, refer to Symptom-Based Troubleshooting on page
144 for diagnosis.
If an error code is displayed, refer to troubleshooting flowchart for diagnosis.
2. Take appropriate measures.

(1) Repair the defect or replace the parts according to the troubleshooting results.
(2) Turn off the power supply for 10 minutes before disassembling.
(3) The refrigerant has to be collected before refrigerant system components are replaced.
3. Verification after taking appropriate measures

(1) Run the unit after repairing the defect to confirm normal unit operation.
(2) Record the check results and inform the client.
1.2 Precautions for Maintenance

Pay attention to the following matters in servicing.
1. Precaution for maintenance

Touch the paint-free metal part of the product (electrical box lid of the standard model; tap
bolts of electrical box of anti-corrosion and heavy anti-corrosion models) to release static
electricity before starting work.
2. Precautions for maintaining the service cover

After maintenance, make sure to close the service cover.
(Otherwise, leakage of water or contamination by foreign matter may cause defects)
3. Precautions for maintaining the electrical box

(1) Turn off the power for 10 minutes before opening the cover of the electrical box.
(2) After opening the cover, use the tester to measure the terminal voltage of the power
supply terminal to make sure that the power has been cut.
Then check if the circuit capacitor voltage is under 50 VDC.
(3) To avoid PCB defects, touch the earth terminal of the electrical box with your hand when
unplugging the connector to release static electricity.
(4) Unplug the connector X106A (RXYMQ4AVMK) or X1A (RXYMQ4-6AYFK) of the outdoor
fan motor.
When unplugging the connectors, do not touch the live parts.
(When the outdoor fan is rotating because of strong wind, there is a risk of electric shock
due to main circuit board capacitor power storage.)
(5) After maintenance, reconnect the connectors of the outdoor fan in their original positions.
Otherwise, the remote controller will display error code E7, preventing normal operation.
4. Precautions for piping work and refrigerant charging:

This unit uses R-410A refrigerant. Pay attention to the following conditions.
(1) The charging pipe and the manifold tube use R-410A products for pressure maintenance
and avoiding contamination by impurities (SUNISO oil, etc.).
(2) Be sure to purge with nitrogen when brazing.
(3) Properly perform airtightness test and vacuum drying. (Airtight test pressure: 4.0 MPa)
(4) Charge refrigerant in liquid state.
5. Precautions for operating in servicing mode (field setting):

When a test operation is interrupted or after exiting service mode, please wait for at least one

SiME332106E Servicing Items to be Confirmed
minute before entering service mode again. In case of continuous execution, the outdoor unit
PCB may sometimes display an error code. If any error codes are displayed, press the
RETURN (BS3) button. If performing the above operation still does not eliminate the error,
reconnect the unit to the power supply.
1.3 Refrigerant Properties (R-410A)

4.00 3.90
3.80 3.70
3.60 3.50
3.40 3.30
3.20 3.10
3.00 2.90
2.80 2.70
2.60 2.50
Pressure gauge value (MPa G)

Absolute pressure (MPa)
2.40 2.30
2.20 2.10
2.00 1.90
1.80 1.70
1.60 1.50
1.40 1.30
1.20 1.10
1.00 0.90
0.80 0.70
0.60 0.50
0.40 0.30
0.20 0.10
0.00 –0.10
–50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Temperature ˚C
Temperature Absolute Temperature Absolute Temperature Absolute Temperature Absolute

Pressure Pressure Pressure Pressure
(°C) (°C) (°C) (°C)
(MPa) (MPa) (MPa) (MPa)
–50 0.11 –20 0.40 10 1.09 40 2.42
–48 0.12 –18 0.43 12 1.15 42 2.54
–46 0.13 –16 0.46 14 1.22 44 2.67
–44 0.15 –14 0.50 16 1.29 46 2.80
–42 0.16 –12 0.54 18 1.37 48 2.93
–40 0.18 –10 0.57 20 1.45 50 3.07
–38 0.19 –8 0.61 22 1.53 52 3.21
–36 0.21 –6 0.66 24 1.61 54 3.36
–34 0.23 –4 0.70 26 1.70 56 3.51
–32 0.25 –2 0.75 28 1.79 58 3.64
–30 0.27 0 0.80 30 1.89 60 3.83
–28 0.29 2 0.85 32 1.99 62 4.00
–26 0.32 4 0.91 34 2.09 64 4.17
–24 0.34 6 0.96 36 2.20 ― ―
–22 0.37 8 1.02 38 2.31 ― ―

Symptom-based Troubleshooting SiME332106E
2. Symptom-based Troubleshooting
Symptom Supposed Cause Countermeasure
1 The system does not start operation at all. Blowout of fuse(s) Turn Off the power supply and then
replace the fuse(s).
Cutout of breaker(s) • If the knob of any breaker is in its
OFF position, turn ON the power
supply.
• If the knob of any circuit breaker is
in its tripped position, do not turn
ON the power supply.
ON
Knob
Tripped
OFF
Circuit breaker
Power failure After the power failure is reset,

restart the system.
The connector loose or not fully Turn off the power supply to verify
plugged in the connection of the connector.
2 The system starts operation but makes an Blocked air inlet or outlet of indoor Remove obstacle(s).
immediate stop. or outdoor unit
Clogged air filter(s) Clean the air filter(s).
3 The system does not cool or heat air well. Blocked air inlet or outlet of indoor Remove obstacle(s).
or outdoor unit
Clogged air filter(s) Clean the air filter(s).
Enclosed outdoor unit(s) Remove the enclosure.
Improper set temperature Set the temperature to a proper
degree.
Airflow rate set to LOW Set it to a proper airflow rate.
Improper direction of air diffusion Set it to a proper direction.
Open window(s) or door(s) Shut it tightly.
Cooling operation Hang curtains or shades on
Direct sunlight received windows.
Cooling operation The model must be selected to
Too many people staying in a room match the air conditioning load.
Cooling operation
Too many heat sources (e.g. OA
equipment) located in a room
Dry operation Change the system to cooling
The reason is that the dry operation operation.
serves not to reduce the room
temperature where possible.
4 The system does The system stops and If the operation lamp on the remote Normal operation. The system will
not operate. immediately restarts controller turns ON, the system will automatically start operation after a
operation. be normal. These symptoms lapse of five minutes.
indicate that the system is
Pressing the temperature controlled so as not to put
setting button immediately unreasonable loads on the system.
resets the system.
The remote controller displays The system is controlled with Operate the system using the
the mark for centralized centralized controller. Blinking COOL/HEAT central remote
control which blinks for a display indicates that the system controller.
period of several seconds cannot be operated using the
when the OPERATION button remote controller.
is depressed.
The system stops immediately The system is in preparation mode Wait for a period of approximately
after turning ON the power of microcomputer operation. one minute.
supply.
5 The system The remote controller displays The system stops due to an Remove causes of electrical noises.
makes error codes U4 or U5, and the interruption in communication If these causes are removed, the
intermittent system stops but restarts after between units caused by electrical system will automatically restart
stops. a lapse of several minutes. noises coming from equipment operation.
other than air conditioners.

SiME332106E Symptom-based Troubleshooting

6 COOL/HEAT The remote controller displays This remote controller has no option Use a remote controller with option
selection is the mark for centralized to select cooling operation. to select cooling operation.
disabled. control.
The remote controller displays COOL/HEAT selection is made Use the COOL/HEAT selection
the mark for centralized using the COOL/HEAT selection remote controller to select cool or
control and the COOL/HEAT remote controller. heat.
selection remote controller is
provided.
7 The system This symptom occurs The system is in preparation mode Wait for a period of approximately
conducts fan immediately after turning ON of operation. 10 minutes.
operation but not the power supply.
cooling or
heating The remote controller displays In thermal storage operation, the Normal operation.
operation. the mark for centralized unit is set to fan operation in cooling
control; no cooling or heating or heating operation, and the
operation is performed. Switch remote controller shows the mark
to fan operation. for centralized control.
8 The airflow rate Even pressing the airflow rate In heating operation, when the room Normal operation.
is not reproduced setting button makes no temperature reaches the set
according to the changes to the airflow rate. degree, the outdoor unit will stop
setting. while the indoor unit is brought to
fan LL operation so that no one gets
cold air.
Furthermore, if fan operation mode
is selected when other indoor unit is
in heating operation, the system will
be brought to fan LL operation.
9 The airflow The airflow direction is not Automatic control Normal operation.
direction is not corresponding to that
reproduced displayed on the remote
according to the controller.
setting. The flap does not swing.
10 A white mist Indoor unit Uneven temperature distribution Clean the inside of the indoor unit.
comes out from In cooling operation, the due to heavy stain of the inside of
the system. ambient humidity is high. the indoor unit
(This indoor unit is installed in
a place with much oil or dust.)
Indoor unit Hot gas (refrigerant) that has flowed Normal operation.
Immediately after cooling in the indoor unit results to be vapor
operation stopping, the from the unit.
ambient temperature and
humidity are low.
Indoor and outdoor units Defrosted moisture turns to be Normal operation.
After the completion of defrost vapor and comes out from the units.
control, the system is switched
to heating operation.
11 The system Indoor unit These are operating sounds of the Normal operation.
produces Immediately after turning ON electronic expansion valve of the This sound becomes low after a
sounds. the power supply, indoor unit indoor unit. lapse of approximately one minute.
produces ringing sounds.
Indoor and outdoor units These sounds are produced from Normal operation.
Hissing sounds are gas (refrigerant) flowing
continuously produced while respectively through the indoor and
in cooling or defrost control. outdoor units.
Indoor and outdoor units These sounds are produced when Normal operation.
Hissing sounds are produced the gas (refrigerant) stops or
immediately after the startup changes flowing.
or stop of the system, or the
startup or stop of defrost
control.
Indoor unit These sounds are produced from Normal operation.
Faint sounds are continuously the drain discharge device in
produced while in cooling operation.
operation or after stopping the
operation.
Indoor unit These sounds are produced from Normal operation.
Creaking sounds are resin parts expanding and
produced while in heating contracting with temperature
operation or changes.
after stopping the operation.
Indoor unit On VRV systems, these sounds are Normal operation.
Sounds like trickling or the like produced when other indoor units in
are produced from indoor operation. The reason is that the
units in the stopped state. system runs in order to prevent oil
or refrigerant from dwelling.
Outdoor unit The reason is that the compressor Normal operation.
Pitch of operating sounds changes the operating frequency.
changes.


12 Dust comes out Dust comes out from the Dust, which has deposited on the Normal operation.
from the system. system when it restarts after inside of indoor unit, is blown out
the stop for an extended from the system.
period of time.
13 Odors come out In operation Odors of room, cigarettes or else The inside of the indoor unit should
from the system. adsorbed to the inside of indoor unit be cleaned.
are blown out.
14 Outdoor fan does In operation The reason is that fan revolutions Normal operation.
not rotate. are controlled to put the operation to
the optimum state.
15 LCD display 88 Immediately after turning ON The reason is that the system is Normal operation.
or Checking the the power supply checking to be sure the remote This code is displayed for a period
connection. controller is normal. of approximately one minute at
Please stand by maximum.
appears on the
remote controller.
16 The outdoor unit After stopping operation It stops in order to prevent oil or Normal operation.
compressor or refrigerant from dwelling. It stops after a lapse of
the outdoor fan approximately 5 to 10 minutes.
does not stop.
17 The outdoor gets While stopping operation The reason is that the compressor Normal operation.
hot. is warmed up to provide smooth
startup of the system.
18 Hot air comes out Hot air is felt while the system On VRV systems, small quantity of Normal operation.
from the system stops. refrigerant is fed to indoor units in
even though it the stopped state when other indoor
stops. units are in operation.

SiME332106E Symptom-based Troubleshooting
2.1 With Optional Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor

Problem Measure
"Louver operation different from setting" or "No downward Refer to the flowchart below.
1
airflow in heating operation"
2 Individual airflow direction setting different from the actual Check the "Louver operation different from setting" error
airflow direction diagnosis.
3 While not operating, the louver does not close completely. Turn off the circuit breaker and then turn it on again.
The remote controller menu does not display energy saving
operating mode for when people are not present.
Refer to "Infrared presence/floor sensor error (CE)" in
The remote controller menu does not display the stop function troubleshooting.
4
for when people are not present.
The remote controller menu does not display the automatic
draft prevention function.
The menu does not display the eco-friendly display function. No defect.
5
Set the clock.
During cooling and dry operation, the louver automatically No defect.
6 switches from horizontal (P0) to one-level downward (P1). When relative ambient humidity is higher, automatic louver
control will be activated.
During heating operation, the use of an airflow block will not No defect.
7 cause other louvers to turn downward (P4). In heating operation, if an airflow block is set, then the air outlet
control outside the airflow block will be within the range P0-P3.
When using airflow block, the airflow block will be routinely No defect.
8
lifted (become horizontal) during heating operation. Set louver to horizontal (P0) during thermostat OFF.
Although people are not present, the infrared presence sensor Check if there are any objects that generate temperature
detects human presence. change when moving.
For example:
· An electric heater with swing function
9
· Doors, curtains, blind switches
· Output of paper from a fax machine or a printer
· Turning on/off of incandescent lights
· Moving objects
Although people are present, the infrared presence sensor fails Check for the following conditions.
to determine their presence. · Lack of movement
10 · Facing away from the sensor
· Little skin exposed
· Slight movement in a place far from the sensor
Large difference between floor temperature and actual Check for the following conditions.
temperature · Sensor detection zone affected by solar radiation
· High or low temperature objects in the sensor detection zone
11 · Large difference between floor temperature and temperature
of the living space
· Sensors installed near walls may be affected by wall
temperature.
Error diagnosis of "Louver operation different from setting"
Is the individual YES

Normal
airflow set? Reset (Cancel)
individual airflow.
NO
Is the Is the
YES automatic draft prevention YES
airflow direction set to Normal
automatic? function "enabled"? Automatic draft
NO NO prevention function
switches flap to
horizontal position
when human
presence is detected.
Is the connection YES Is the YES

of the step motor wire harness Replace the wire
connector normal? broken? harness.
NO
Replace the step
NO motor. (Motor failure)
Connect to the
connector
correctly before
action verification.

2.2 For All Outdoor Units

Problem Measure
Decrease of main circuit power supply insulation Define the measure using the flowchart below.
resistance (Less than 1 M)
Decrease of main circuit power supply

insulation resistance
Cut the power supply.
Remove the compressor wiring from the

power supply terminal. Isolate the wiring
and be careful not to touch the live parts.
Measure the insulation resistance of the

main circuit power supply.
NO
1 MΩ or more? Defective local power supply
YES Check the local power supply.

Turn the power supply on and leave it on
for 6 hours (keep the compressor wiring
disconnected).
Cut the power supply.
Connect the compressor wiring to the

terminal, or to the noise filter PCB and
measure the insulation resistance.
NO
1 MΩ or more? Compressor abnormality
YES Replace the compressor.

Normal

SiME332106E Error Code via Remote Controller
3. Error Code via Remote Controller

3.1 BRC1E63
The following message is displayed on the screen when an error (or a warning) occurs during
operation.
Check the error code and take the corrective action specified for the particular model.
Screen
Operation lamp
Menu/Enter button
(1) Check if it is error or warning.

Operation Status Display
Abnormal The system stops The operation lamp (green)
shutdown operating. starts to blink. The message
Error: Push Menu button
blinks at the bottom of the
screen.
Warning The system The operation lamp (green)

continues its remains on. The message
operation. Warning: Push Menu button
blinks at the bottom of the
screen.
(2) Take corrective action.

Press the Menu/Enter button to check the
error code. Error code
FXFSQ25ARV1
Take the corrective action specific to the RXYMQ4AVMK Applicable
model names
model.

Error Code via Remote Controller SiME332106E
3.2 BRC1H81 Series

When the system is in error and the controller presents you with an error screen from as soon
as you try to enter the main menu, consult your dealer.
Error screen (example)
3.2.1 Refrigerant Leak Detection

When the system detects a refrigerant leak, an alarm goes off. Stop the alarm and consult your
dealer.
To stop the leak detection alarm
1 Press for 3 seconds to stop the alarm.

Result: The alarm stops.
2 Consult your dealer.

SiME332106E Error Code via Remote Controller
3.3 BRC4M Series

When the air conditioner stops in emergency, the operating indicator lamp on the indoor unit
starts blinking.
Take the following steps yourself to read the error code that appears on the display. Contact
your local dealer with this code. It will help pinpoint the cause of the trouble, speeding up the
repair.
35
7
24
6
1
1. Press the INSPECTION button to select the inspection mode “ ”.
0 appears on display and blinks.
“UNIT No.” appears.
2. Press PROGRAMMING TIMER button and change the unit number.
Press to change the unit number until the indoor unit beeps and perform the following
operation according to the number of beeps.
Number of beeps
3 short beeps.............Perform all steps from 3 to 6.
1 short beep .............Perform 3 and 6 steps.
1 long beep .............Normal state
3. Press OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button.
0 on the left-hand of the error code blinks.
4. Press PROGRAMMING TIMER button and change the error code.
Press until the indoor unit beeps twice.
5. Press OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button.
0 on the right-hand of the error code blinks.
6. Press PROGRAMMING TIMER button and change the error code.
Press until the indoor unit makes a long beep.
The error code is fixed when the indoor unit makes a long beep.
7. Reset of the display
Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button to get the display back to the normal
state.

Error Code via Outdoor Unit PCB SiME332106E
4. Error Code via Outdoor Unit PCB

Error code descriptions are accessible on monitor mode (Mode 1). Refer to page 115 for
monitor mode.
The error codes for forced stop outdoor or retry are item:
 17, 18, 19: description of error (outdoor system stopped operation).
 23, 24, 25: description of retry.
SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
Normal
To enter monitor mode, press the MODE

(BS1) button while in normal mode. BS1
MODE
Selecting error/retry item
Press the SET (BS2) button to set the 7 BS2

segment display to show one of 17-19
or 23-25. SET
Displaying check 1
Press the RETURN (BS3) button. BS3

Error (Retry) codes will appear on the
7 segment display.
RETURN
BS2 Press
SET (BS2)
button. Displaying check 2
SET
Press the SET (BS2) button. BS2
Detailed error (retry) codes will appear
on the 7 segment display. SET
BS3
Press the RETURN (BS3) button to return RETURN

to the initial state of monitor mode.
BS1
Press the MODE (BS1) button to return MODE

to normal mode.
Normal
 The tables on the following pages show a full list of possible error codes displayed on the 3
digit 7 segment display of the outdoor unit. The error code contains an upper and lower digit.
To scroll between upper and lower error digit, use the SET (BS2) button.
 The errors cover problems detected in the outdoor unit or the communication.
 Errors detected on the indoor unit are not shown on the outdoor display. For inspecting error
code on indoor unit, please consult:
 Display of the remote controller connected to the indoor units.
 If there are no remote controllers, there should be a central control device set up. Prior to
start up, make the necessary group number settings on each indoor unit.

SiME332106E Troubleshooting by Error Code
5. Troubleshooting by Error Code

5.1 Error Codes and Descriptions
k: ON h: OFF l: Blink
Operation Reference
Error code Description
lamp page
Indoor Unit A0 l External protection device abnormality 160
A1 l Indoor unit PCB abnormality 161
A3 l Drain level control system abnormality 162
Indoor fan motor lock, overload 164
A6 l Indoor fan motor abnormality 166
A8 l Power supply voltage abnormality 172
A9 l Electronic expansion valve coil abnormality, dust clogging 175
AF k Humidifier system abnormality 176
AH l Auto grille unit error 177
AJ l Defective capacity setting 178
Transmission abnormality (between indoor unit PCB and fan PCB) 179
C1 l Transmission error 181
Transmission error (between indoor unit PCB and auto grille control PCB) 182
C4 l Indoor heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor abnormality 184
C5 l Indoor heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor abnormality 184
Combination abnormality (between indoor unit PCB and fan PCB) 185
C6 l Capacity setting abnormality 186
Indoor unit PCB abnormality 187
C9 l Suction air thermistor abnormality 184
CE k Infrared presence/floor sensor error 188
CJ k Remote controller thermistor abnormality 193

Troubleshooting by Error Code SiME332106E
Operation Reference
Error code Description
lamp page
Outdoor Unit E1 l Outdoor unit main PCB abnormality 194
Current leakage detection 195
E2 l
Missing of leakage detection core 196
E3 l Activation of high pressure switch 197
E4 l Activation of low pressure sensor 199
E5 l Compressor motor lock 200
E7 l Outdoor fan motor abnormality 202
E9 l Electronic expansion valve coil abnormality 205
F3 l Discharge pipe temperature abnormality 206
F4 l Wet alarm 208
F6 l Refrigerant overcharged 210
H3 l Harness abnormality (between outdoor unit main PCB and inverter PCB) 211
H5 l OL activation (compressor overload) 212
H7 l Outdoor fan PCB abnormality 214
H9 l Outdoor air thermistor (R1T) abnormality 215
J3 l Discharge pipe thermistor (R21T) abnormality 215
J5 l Suction pipe thermistor (R3T) abnormality 215
J6 l Heat exchanger deicer thermistor (R7T) abnormality 215
J7 l Subcooling heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor (R5T) abnormality 215
J8 l Heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor (R4T) abnormality 215
J9 l Subcooling heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor (R6T) abnormality 215
JA l High pressure sensor abnormality 217
JC l Low pressure sensor abnormality 218
L1 l Inverter circuit abnormality 219
L2 l Momentary power failure during test operation 221
L4 l Inverter radiation fin temperature rise abnormality 222
L5 l Compressor instantaneous overcurrent 224
L8 l Compressor overcurrent 226
L9 l Compressor startup abnormality 228
LC l Transmission error between microcomputers on outdoor unit main PCB 230

Transmission error between inverter PCB and outdoor unit main PCB 231
Inverter circuit capacitor high voltage 233
P1 l
Power supply voltage imbalance 234
P3 l Reactor temperature abnormality 236
P4 l Inverter radiation fin temperature abnormality 237
Field setting after replacing outdoor unit main PCB abnormality or
PJ l 239
combination of PCB abnormality
System Refrigerant shortage warning (Cooling) 240
U0 k Refrigerant shortage warning (Heating) 241
Refrigerant shortage abnormality (Heating only) 243
U1 l Open phase 246
U2 l Power supply insufficient or instantaneous abnormality 247
U3 l Check operation not executed 251
U4 l Transmission error between indoor units and outdoor units 252
U5 l Transmission error between remote controller and indoor unit 255
U7 l Transmission error between outdoor units 256
U8 l Transmission error between main and sub remote controllers 260
U9 l Other indoor units and outdoor unit abnormality 261
Improper combination of indoor unit and outdoor unit, indoor unit and remote
UA l 262
controller
UC k Address duplication of centralized controller 265
UE l Transmission error between centralized controller and indoor unit 266
UF l System not set yet 269
UH l System abnormality, refrigerant system address undefined 270
The system operates for error codes indicated, however, be sure to check and repair.

5.2 Error Codes (Sub Codes)

If an error code like the one shown below is displayed when the navigation remote controller
(BRC1E series) is in use, make a detailed diagnosis or a diagnosis of the relevant unit referring
to the attached list of detailed error codes.
5.2.1 Indoor Unit

Troubleshooting
Error code
Description of error Diagnosis
Fan motor locked A locked fan motor current has been detected.
A6 - 01
Turn the fan by hand to check for the connection of connectors.
Fan overcurrent error A fan motor overcurrent has been detected.
Check for the connection of the connector between the fan motor and
A6 - 10
the PCB for the fan. If the connection is normal, replace the fan motor. If
this still cannot solve the error, replace the PCB for the fan.
Fan position detection error An error in the detection of position of the fan motor. Check for the
connection of the connector between the fan motor and the PCB for the
A6 - 11 fan. If the connection is normal, replace the fan motor. If this still cannot
solve the error, replace the PCB for the fan.
A8 - 01 Power supply voltage error Check for the input voltage of the fan motor.
Electronic expansion valve error There is an error in the electronic expansion valve coil or a connector
A9 - 01 disconnected.
Refrigerant leakage detection error Refrigerant leaks even if the electronic expansion valve is closed.
A9 - 02
Replace the electronic expansion valve.
Transmission error (between the Check for the connection of the harness connector between the panel
self-cleaning decoration panel and the PCB and the indoor unit PCB.
AH - 03 indoor unit)
(when the self-cleaning decoration panel is
mounted)
Dust detection sensor error Check for the connections of the connector X12A on the panel PCB and
AH - 04 (when the self-cleaning decoration panel is the connectors X18A and X19A on the sensor PCB.
mounted)
Dust collection sign error Check for clogging with dust at the dust collection port as well as in the
AH - 05 (when the self-cleaning decoration panel is brush unit, S-shaped pipe, and dust box. Furthermore, check for any
mounted) stains of the light receiving and emitting parts of the infrared unit.
Air filter rotation error Check for anything getting in the way of rotating the filter (e.g. the filter
AH - 06 (when the self-cleaning decoration panel is comes off or the drive gear is clogged with foreign matter).
mounted)
Damper rotation error The damper does not rotate normally. Check for any foreign matter
AH - 07 (when the self-cleaning decoration panel is around the damper and for the operation of the gear and limit switch.
mounted)
Filter self-cleaning operation error The unit has not yet completed the filter self-cleaning operation even
AH - 08 (when the self-cleaning decoration panel is after the lapse of specified period of time. Check for any external noise,
mounted) etc.
Filter self-cleaning operation start disabled The unit has been put into a state in which the filter self-cleaning
AH - 09 error (when the self-cleaning decoration operation is disabled. Check the unit for the operating conditions.
panel is mounted)
Auto grille unit error It is detected that the grille does not operate properly. Check whether
AH - 12
(when the auto grille unit is mounted) the grille does not contact with something or the wire does not snaggle.
AJ - 01 Capacity setting error There is an error in the capacity setting of the indoor unit PCB.
Electronic expansion valve setting error There is a fault in the setting of the gear type electronic expansion
AJ - 02 valve/direct acting type electronic expansion valve.
Transmission error (between indoor unit Check for the conditions of transmission between the indoor unit PCB
C1 - 01 PCB and the PCB for the fan) and the PCB for the fan.
Transmission error (between indoor unit Refer to C1-06 flowchart.
C1 - 06
PCB and auto grille control PCB)
Defective combination of indoor unit PCB A combination of indoor unit PCB and the PCB for the fan is defective.
C6 - 01 and the PCB for the fan Check whether the capacity setting adaptor is correct and the type of
the PCB for the fan is correct.
C6 - 05 Indoor unit PCB abnormality Refer to C6-05 flowchart.
Infrared presence sensor error The output of the infrared presence sensor is not detected.
CE - 01 Check if the connector is properly connected, and if the harness
is not broken
Infrared floor sensor error A disconnection of the temperature correction circuit
CE - 02 (thermistor) of the infrared floor sensor has been detected.
Check if the connector is properly connected.
Infrared floor sensor error A short-circuit of the temperature correction circuit (thermistor) of the
CE - 03 infrared floor sensor has been detected. Check if the pins of the
connector are touching each other, and if any foreign matter on the
PCB is causing a short-circuit.

Troubleshooting
Error code
Infrared floor sensor error An abnormality other than the ones mentioned above has been
detected.
CE - 04
Check if the temperature nearby the sensor is too high, and if there is
any foreign matter that may cause noise.
U4 - 01 Indoor-Outdoor transmission error Refer to the U4 flowchart.
UA - 13 Refrigerant type error The type of refrigerant used for the indoor unit is different from that
used for the outdoor unit.
Not applicable for self-cleaning decoration An outdoor unit is not applicable for the self-cleaning decoration panel
UA - 15 panel (when the self-cleaning decoration is connected.
panel is mounted)
As there are various combinations of indoor and outdoor units, the sub codes of A0 - A3 are not
shown in this table.

5.2.2 Outdoor Unit, System

Troubleshooting
Error code
E1 - 01 Outdoor unit PCB error Refer to the E1 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
E1 - 02 Defective outdoor unit PCB on the Error code shown to the left.
E2 - 01 Earth leakage detection error Refer to the E2 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
E2 - 06 Missing of earth leakage detection core on the Error code shown to the left.
E3 - 01 High pressure switch activated
Refer to the E3 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
E3 - 07 High pressure switch activated (Batch)
on the Error code shown to the left.
E3 - 13 Liquid stop valve check error
Low pressure error Refer to the E4 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
E4 - 01
Compressor M1C lock Refer to the E5 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
E5 - 01
E7 - 01 Fan motor M1F lock
Refer to the E7 flowchart and make a diagnosis
E7 - 05 Fan motor M1F instantaneous overcurrent of the fan motor based
E7 - 09 Fan motor M1F IPM error
E9 - 01 Electronic expansion valve coil Y1E error
E9 - 03 Electronic expansion valve coil Y2E error
E9 - 04 Electronic expansion valve coil Y3E error Refer to the E9 flowchart and make a diagnosis
of the relevant electronic expansion valve based
E9 - 26 Electronic expansion valve coil Y4E error on the Error code shown to the left.
E9 - 48 Electronic expansion valve overcurrent
E9 - 54 Defective circuit
F3 - 01 Discharge pipe high temperature error Refer to the F3 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
F3 - 23 Overload protector activated (Q1M) on the Error code shown to the left.
F4 - 01 Wet alarm for compressor M1C
F4 - 08 Wet error for compressor M1C Refer to the F4 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
F4 - 14 Indoor unit failure alarm
F6 - 02 Excess refrigerant charge error Excess refrigerant charge was detected during test run.
Excess refrigerant charge warning Excess refrigerant charge was detected
F6 - 03 during operation other than test run.
H3 - 02 Connection error between main PCB and inverter PCB Refer to the H3 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
Defective overload protector for M1C (Q1M) Refer to the H5 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
H5 - 01
Defective fan PCB for M1F Refer to the H7 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
H7 - 21
H9 - 01 Defective outdoor air thermistor (R1T) Refer to the H9 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
J3 - 16 Defective discharge pipe thermistor (R21T): Open
Refer to the J3 flowchart and make a diagnosis
J3 - 17 Defective discharge pipe thermistor (R21T): Short
based on the Error code shown to the left.
J3 - 56 Discharge pipe warning
Defective suction pipe thermistor (R3T) Refer to the J5 flowchart and make a diagnosis
J5 - 01 of the thermistor based
Defective heat exchanger deicer thermistor (R7T) Refer to the J6 flowchart and make a diagnosis
Defective subcooling heat exchanger liquid pipe Refer to the J7 flowchart and make a diagnosis
J7 - 06 thermistor (R5T) of the thermistor based
Defective heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor (R4T) Refer to the J8 flowchart and make a diagnosis
Defective subcooling heat exchanger gas pipe
J9 - 01 Refer to the J9 flowchart and make a diagnosis
thermistor (R6T)
of the thermistor based
Error detection of subcooling heat exchanger gas pipe on the Error code shown to the left.
J9 - 08 thermistor (R6T)

Troubleshooting
Error code
JA - 06 Defective high pressure sensor: Open Refer to the JA flowchart and make a diagnosis
of the sensor based
JA - 07 Defective high pressure sensor: Short on the Error code shown to the left.
JC - 06 Defective low pressure sensor: Open Refer to the JC flowchart and make a diagnosis
of the sensor based
JC - 07 Defective low pressure sensor: Short on the Error code shown to the left.
L1 - 01 IPM error: Compressor M1C
L1 - 02 Defective current sensor: Compressor M1C
L1 - 03 Current offset: Compressor M1C The inverter PCB may be defective or a PCB other than
the specified is mounted.
L1 - 04 IGBT error: Compressor M1C
Refer to the L1 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
L1 - 05 Jumper settings error: Compressor M1C on the Error code shown to the left.
L1 - 36 EEPROM abnormality: Compressor M1C
L1 - 47 Power supply voltage abnormality: Compressor M1C
L2 - 01 Momentary power failure Refer to the L2 flowchart and make a diagnosis based on
L2 - 04 Power ON the Error code shown to the left.
L4 - 01 Radiation fin temperature rise: Inverter for M1C Refer to the L4 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
L4 - 06 Radiation fin temperature rise: Inverter fan M1F on the Error code shown to the left.
Current offset error Refer to the L5 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
L5 - 03
Compressor M1C overcurrent error Refer to the L8 flowchart and make a diagnosis
L8 - 03 of the compressor based
L9 - 01 Compressor M1C startup error Refer to the L9 flowchart and make a diagnosis
of the compressor based
L9 - 13 Compressor M1C output open phase on the Error code shown to the left.
LC - 14 PCB inverter error (Compressor M1C) Refer to the LC flowchart and make a diagnosis based
LC - 19 PCB inverter error (Fan M1F) on the Error code shown to the left.
Inverter circuit capacitor high voltage Refer to the P1 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
P1 - 01
Unbalanced power supply voltage on the Error code shown to the left.
P3 - 01 Defective reactor thermistor 1 Refer to the P3 flowchart and make a diagnosis based on
P3 - 04 Defective reactor thermistor 2 the Error code shown to the left.
P4 - 01 Defective radiation fin thermistor Refer to the P4 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
P4 - 02 Defective fan M1F fin sensor on the Error code shown to the left.
PJ - 04 Incorrect type of compressor Refer to the PJ flowchart and make a diagnosis based
PJ - 09 Incorrect type of fan on the Error code shown to the left.
U0 - 05 Refrigerant shortage warning (cooling)
Refer to the U0 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
U0 - 06 Refrigerant shortage warning (heating)
U0 - 08 Refrigerant shortage
U1 - 16 Open phase for power supply Refer to the U1 flowchart and make a diagnosis based on
U1 - 19 Hz error for power supply the Error code shown to the left.
U2 - 01 Shortage of inverter power supply voltage Refer to the U2 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
U2 - 02 Power phase loss on the Error code shown to the left.
Initial installation alarm / Test operation failed due to
U3 - 02
indoor unit error
U3 - 03 Test operation not conducted
U3 - 04 Abnormal end of test operation
Premature end of test operation during initial
U3 - 05
transmission error – check indoor unit error U4 / U9
Premature end of test operation during normal Refer to the U3 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
U3 - 06 transmission error on the Error code shown to the left.
Premature end of test operation due to transmission
U3 - 07 error
Premature end of test operation due to transmission
U3 - 08
error of all units
U3 - 10 System refrigerant auto charge operation not yet

executed
Transmission error between indoor unit and outdoor
U4 - 01
unit Refer to the U4 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
Transmission error between indoor unit and system: on the Error code shown to the left.
U4 - 03 check indoor unit error

Troubleshooting
Error code
Error when external control adaptor for outdoor unit is
U7 - 01
installed
U7 - 02 Alarm when external control adaptor for outdoor unit is Refer to the U7 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
installed on the Error code shown to the left.
U7 - 11 Error in indoor unit connection capacity for test

operation
Other indoor units and outdoor unit abnormality Refer to the U9 flowchart and make a diagnosis based
U9 - 01
TSS plus unit field settings error, CT
UA - 00 address duplication warning
UA - 03 Connection of excessive indoor units
UA - 17 Connection of excess indoor units Refer to the UA flowchart and make a diagnosis based
UA - 18 Connection of incorrect models of indoor units
UA - 20 Improper combination of outdoor units
UA - 21 Wrong connection
UF - 01 Wrong wiring check error Refer to the UF flowchart and make a diagnosis based
UF - 05 Defective stop valve for test operation on the Error code shown to the left.
UH - 01 Wiring error Refer to the UH flowchart.

5.3 External Protection Device Abnormality

Applicable All indoor unit models
Models
Error Code A0
Method of Error Detects open or short circuit between external input terminals in indoor unit.
Detection
Error Decision An open circuit occurs between external input terminals with the remote controller set for
Conditions external ON/OFF input.
Supposed  Activation of external protection device

Causes  Improper field setting
 Defective indoor unit PCB
Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.
External
protection device is
connected to terminals T1 and YES Activation of external
T2 of the indoor unit protection device.
terminal block.
NO
Check the setting state of the

ON/OFF input from outside by remote
controller.
External
ON/OFF input (mode
No. 12, first code No. 1) has
YES Change the second code
been set to external protection
device input (second code No. to 01 or 02.
No. 03) by remote
controller.
NO
Replace the indoor unit

control PCB (A1P).

5.4 Indoor Unit PCB Abnormality

Models
Error Code A1
Method of Error Data from EEPROM is checked.
Detection
Error Decision Data cannot be correctly received from the EEPROM

Conditions EEPROM: Type of nonvolatile memory. Maintains memory contents even when the power
supply is turned OFF.
Supposed  Defective indoor unit control PCB

Causes  External factor (Noise etc.)
Troubleshooting
Turn the power supply OFF,

then the power ON again.
Does the YES

system return to The indoor unit control
normal? PCB (A1P) is normal.
External factor other than
NO error (for example, noise
etc.).
control PCB (A1P).

5.5 Drain Level Control System Abnormality

Applicable FXFSQ-AR, FXDQ-PD, FXDQ-ND, FXMQ-PB, FXMQ-AR
Models
Error Code A3
Method of Error By float switch OFF detection
Detection
Error Decision Float switch goes OFF when the conditions for water level rise are not met
Conditions
Supposed  220-240 V power supply is not provided.

Causes  Defective float switch or short circuit connector
 Defective drain pump
 Drain clogging, upward slope, etc.
 Defective indoor unit control PCB
 Loose connection of connector
Troubleshooting
Is power supply NO
220-240 V provided? Provide 220-240 V power
supply.
YES
The float
switch is NO A short circuit NO
connected to the indoor connector is Connect either a short circuit
unit PCB. (∗1) connected. (∗1) connector or float switch and
turn ON again.
YES YES
The
float switch Becomes
contact is forming a YES normal when the NO
short circuit (continuity check connector (∗1) of the indoor Replace the indoor unit
with the connector (∗1) unit PCB is short control PCB (A1P).
disconnected) circuited.
NO YES
Defective connection of
connector.
NO The float switch NO
Water builds up
in the drain pan. functions normally. Replace the float switch (S1L).
YES YES
Modify the float switch's
connection and turn ON again.
The
drain pump is NO
connected to the Connect the drain pump and
indoor unit PCB. turn ON again.
(∗2)
YES
A Go to the next page.

The drain
pump works when the YES
power supply is reset for the Check the drain piping for
indoor unit. clogging or upward slope, etc.
NO
The
voltage of
drain pump
terminals (∗2) is in NO
accordance to the criteria Replace the indoor unit control
(∗3) (within 5 minutes of PCB (A1P).
resetting the power
supply).
YES
Replace the drain pump or
check for dirt, etc.
Note(s)
1: Float switch (S1L) / 2: Drain pump (M1P) 3: Drain pump (M1P)
Model Note
short circuit connector connector voltage
FXFSQ-AR X15A X25A 13 VDC –
FXDQ-PD X8A X25A 220-240 VAC –
FXDQ-ND X8A X25A 220-240 VAC –
FXMQ-PB X15A X25A 13 VDC –
FXMQ-AR X8A Y1, Y2 220-240 VAC –

5.6 Indoor Fan Motor Lock, Overload

Applicable FXMQ40PB, FXAQ-AR
Models
Error Code A6
Method of Error Abnormal fan revolutions are detected by a signal output from the fan motor.
Detection
Error Decision The fan revolutions do not increase.

Conditions
Supposed  Broken wires in, short circuit of, or disconnection of connectors from the fan motor harness
Causes  Defective fan motor
(Broken wires or defective insulation)
 Abnormal signal output from the fan motor (defective circuit)
 Instantaneous disturbance in the power supply voltage
 Fan motor lock
(Due to motor or external causes)
 The fan does not rotate due to foreign matter blocking the fan.
 Disconnection of the connector between the high-power PCB and the low-power PCB

Troubleshooting

Turn OFF the power

supply, and then wait for
a period of 10 minutes.
Are there
any foreign matter YES
Remove the foreign matter.
around the fan?
NO
Is the
connector properly NO
connected to the indoor Properly connect the connector.
unit control PCB?
(∗1)
YES
By
disconnecting the
connector, the fan can be NO Replace the fan motor (M1F).
lightly rotated by
hand.
YES
CHECK 17
Disconnect the connector
from the fan motor, and then
make measurement of
resistance between pins.
Is the
resistance NO
between the pins less than Replace the indoor unit control
the judgment PCB (A1P).
criteria?
YES
Replace the fan motor and the
indoor unit control PCB (A1P).
Note(s) 1: Check the following connectors.

Model Connector
FXMQ40PB X8A
FXAQ-AR X20A
Reference CHECK 17 Refer to page 287.

5.7 Indoor Fan Motor Abnormality

5.7.1 Indoor Fan Motor Abnormality (FXDQ-PD, FXDQ-ND)
Applicable FXDQ-PD, FXDQ-ND
Models
Error Code A6
Method of Error This error is detected if there is no revolution detection signal output from the fan motor.
Detection
Error Decision When no revolutions can be detected even at the maximum output voltage to the fan
Conditions
Supposed  Defective indoor fan motor

Causes  Broken wires
 Defective contact
Troubleshooting
Are the
X4A and X27A NO
connectors securely Properly connect the connectors.
connected? (At this time, check for any
defective connector contact or
YES broken wires.)
Is
the
power of 12
VDC supplied
between the Pins 1
and 3 when the X27A is YES CHECK 16
disconnected and the Check the indoor fan motor and
power supply turns
the wiring circuits of the fan
ON?
motor.
NO
Replace the indoor unit control

PCB (A1P).

5.7.2 Indoor Fan Motor Abnormality (FXMQ50-140PB)

Applicable FXMQ50-140PB
Models
Error Code A6
Method of Error  Error from the current flow on the fan PCB
Detection  Error from the rotation speed of the fan motor in operation
 Error from the position signal of the fan motor
 Error from the current flow on the fan PCB when the fan motor starting operation
Error Decision  An overcurrent flows.

Conditions  The rotation speed is less than a certain level for 6 seconds.
 A position error in the fan rotor continues for 5 seconds or more.
Supposed  Clogging of a foreign matter

Causes  Disconnection of the fan motor connectors (X1A and X2A)
 Disconnection of the connectors between the indoor unit control PCB (A1P) and fan PCB
(A2P)
 Defective fan PCB (A2P)
 Defective fan motor

Troubleshooting
Turn off the power and wait for

10 minutes.
There is a YES
foreign matter around the Remove the foreign matter.
fan.
NO
The fan
motor connectors
(X1A and X2A) of the fan PCB YES
(A2P) are disconnected.
Connect the connector
properly.
NO
The connectors
between the indoor unit YES
PCB (A1P) and the fan Connect the connector
PCB (A2P) are properly.
disconnected.
NO
The fuse (F3U, white) NO

on the fan PCB (A2P) Replace the fan PCB (A2P).
has continuity.
YES
The fan
can be moved lightly
by hand after the fan motor NO
connector of the fan PCB Replace the indoor fan
(A2P) is removed. motor (M1F).
YES
The
resistance between
the power wire terminals of YES
the fan motor and motor frame Replace the indoor fan
(metal part) is 1 M or motor (M1F).
below.
NO
CHECK 16
Remove the power wire
connector from the fan motor
and measure the resistance
between U and V, V and W, and
W and U phases.

The resistance YES

among U, V, and W are unbalanced Replace the indoor fan
or below 1 Ω. motor (M1F).
NO
CHECK 17
Remove the signal connector
from the fan motor and check
the resistance.
Between
VCC and GND
terminals, and between GND YES
and HW, HV, or HU terminals Replace the indoor fan
are below 1 Ω. motor (M1F).
NO
Turn on the power.
The HAP
lamp of the indoor
unit PCB (A1P) blinks and the YES
Replace the fan PCB (A2P).
HAP lamp of the fan PCB
(A2P) is off.
NO
Replace the indoor fan
motor (M1F).

5.7.3 Indoor Fan Motor Abnormality (FXFSQ-AR)

Applicable FXFSQ-AR
Models
Error Code A6-10

Method of Error  Detection from the current flow on the fan PCB (A1P)
Detection  Detection from the rotation speed of the fan motor in operation
 Detection from the position signal of the fan motor
 Detection from the current flow on the fan PCB when the fan motor starting operation
Error Decision  An overcurrent flows

Conditions  The rotation speed is less than a certain level for 6 seconds.
 A position error in the fan rotor continues for 5 seconds or more.
Supposed  Clogged foreign matter

Causes  Disconnection of fan motor connectors
 Fan motor lock
Troubleshooting
Caution Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
connectors, or parts may be damaged.
Turn OFF the power supply and
wait for 10 minutes.
There is a foreign YES Remove the foreign matter.

matter around the fan.
NO
The fan
motor connector (∗1) is NO
connected to the indoor unit Connect the connector correctly.
control PCB
(A1P).
YES
It is
possible to rotate
the fan manually when the
fan motor connector is NO Replace the fan motor (M1F).
disconnected from the indoor
unit control PCB
(A1P).
YES
Resistance
between UVW of fan YES
motor is unbalanced, or Replace the fan motor (M1F).
short-circuited.
NO
Turn ON the power supply and
check the HAP lamp on the indoor
unit control PCB (A1P).

The HAP
lamp on the indoor unit NO Replace the indoor unit control
control PCB is
blinking. PCB (A1P).
YES
Replace the fan motor (M1F).
1 Check also if the relay connector between the indoor unit control PCB and the fan motor are
correctly connected.

5.8 Power Supply Voltage Abnormality

5.8.1 Power Supply Voltage Abnormality (FXMQ-PB)
Applicable FXMQ-PB
Models
Error Code A8
Method of Error Error is detected by checking the input voltage of the fan motor.
Detection
Error Decision When the input voltage of fan motor is 150 V or less, or 386 V or more.
Conditions
Supposed  Defective power supply voltage.

Causes  Defective connection on signal line.
 Defective wiring.
 Instantaneous power failure, others.
Troubleshooting
Check the condition of the power

supply.
(1) Check if power supply voltage is
220-240 V ± 10%.
(2) Check if there is power open
phase or defective wiring.
(3) Check if power supply voltage
unbalance is within 6 V.
There are
problems on the YES
condition of power supply Correct any fault.
described above.
NO
A8 YES
Reoccurrence of Check and correct each wiring.
error.
NO
It is possible there was an

external cause, such as
brownout or instantaneous
power failure.

5.8.2 Power Supply Voltage Abnormality (FXFSQ-AR)

Applicable FXFSQ-AR
Models
Error Code A8-01

Method of Error This error is detected by checking the voltage status with the microcomputer.
Detection
Error Decision Overvoltage or voltage drop is detected on the fan driver.

Conditions
Supposed  Defective connection of power supply connector

Causes  Defective indoor unit PCB (A1P)
 External factors (e.g. noise)

Troubleshooting
Check the condition of the power

supply.
Check if power supply voltage is
220-240 V±10%.
There are
problems YES
on the condition of power Correct any fault.
supply described
above.
NO
Is the X27A
connector on the main NO
Properly connect the connector.
PCB properly connected?
YES
Is the
harness connecting YES
the X27A and the terminal block Replace the harness.
(X2M) disconnected?
NO
Is there any external YES

factor such as noise? Remove the external factor.
NO
Turn OFF the power once and turn
ON again. Then, start operation
with remote controller.
Does the error NO

A8 reoccur? Normal.
YES
Replace the indoor unit PCB
(A1P).

5.9 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality, Dust

Clogging
Models
Error Code A9, A9-02

Method of Error Electronic expansion valve coil conditions are checked via microcomputer.
Detection The electronic expansion valve main body is checked for dust clogging via microcomputer.
Error Decision Pin input for electronic expansion valve coil is abnormal when initializing microcomputer.
Conditions Either of the following conditions is seen/caused/occurs while the unit stops operation.
 Temperature of suction air (R1T) – temperature of liquid pipe (R2T) > 8°C.
 Temperature of liquid pipe of heat exchanger (R2T) shows fixed degrees or below.
Supposed  Defective electronic expansion valve coil

Causes  Defective indoor unit control PCB
 Defective relay cables
Troubleshooting
NO
Power is supplied. Replace the electronic expansion
valve main body.
YES
NO
valve is connected to Shut the power supply OFF after
X5A/X7A of indoor connection and then restart.
unit PCB.
YES
CHECK 18
Check of electronic NO
expansion valve coil Replace the electronic expansion
indicates normal. valve coil.
YES
Relay cables short YES

circuit or Replace the relay cables.
disconnected.
NO
When restarting the operation

after shutting the power supply
OFF does not work, replace the
indoor unit control PCB (A1P).

5.10 Humidifier System Abnormality

Applicable FXFSQ-AR, FXDQ-PD, FXDQ-ND, FXMQ-PB, FXMQ-AR
Models
Error Code AF
Method of Error Water leakage from the humidifier system is detected based on float switch ON/OFF operation
Detection while the compressor is not in operation.
Error Decision The float switch changes from ON to OFF while the compressor is not in operation.
Conditions  Error code is displayed but the system operates continuously.
Supposed  Humidifier unit (optional accessory) leaking

Causes  Defective drain piping (upward slope, etc.)
Troubleshooting
Field drain
piping has a defect such as YES
Modify the drain piping.
upward sloping.
NO
A humidifier
unit (optional accessory) is YES
installed on the Check if the humidifier unit is
indoor unit. leaking.
NO
Defective indoor unit
control PCB (A1P).

5.11 Auto Grille Unit Error

Applicable FXFSQ-AR (when auto grille panel BYCQ125EBSF is installed)
Models
Error Code AH-12

Method of Error This error is determined when an abnormal signal from the auto grille kit is detected.
Detection
Error Decision Any of the following conditions is established while the grille is elevating.
Conditions  The storage detection limit switch does not detect anything for a prescribed time while the
grille is moving upward.
 The position detection limit switch does not detect anything for a prescribed time while the
grille is moving upward.
 The position detection limit switch detects a position for less than one second while the grille
is moving downward.
Supposed  A large load on the grille

Causes  Tangled wire
 Defective motor
 Defective limit switch
Troubleshooting
Is there any YES

abnormality on appearance of Check the items below.
the grille? • The grille is elevating while
tilted in a horizontal direction.
NO • The grille is caught by
something.
• The grille is not mounted.
After correcting any of the
items above, perform
elevating operation again.
A large load YES

is applied to the grille. Eliminate the load on the grille.
Perform elevating operation
again.
NO
YES
A wire is tangled. Correct the winding of wire.
NO
YES
Is the drive unit normal? Normal.
NO
Check the limit switch, gear,
motor of the drive unit.

5.12 Defective Capacity Setting

Models
Error Code AJ
Method of Error Capacity is determined according to resistance of the capacity setting adaptor and the memory
Detection inside the IC memory on the indoor unit PCB, and whether the value is normal or abnormal is
determined.
Error Decision The capacity code is not saved to the PCB, and the capacity setting adaptor is not connected.
Conditions A capacity that does not exist for that unit is set.
Supposed  The capacity setting adaptor was not installed.

Causes  Defective indoor unit PCB
Troubleshooting
The NO
indoor unit PCB was replaced Replace the indoor unit control
with a spare PCB. PCB (A1P).
YES
The
capacity setting NO
adaptor was installed when Install a capacity setting
replacing the PCB. adaptor.
YES Replace the indoor unit control

PCB (A1P).

5.13 Transmission Abnormality (between Indoor Unit PCB

and Fan PCB)
Applicable FXMQ-PB
Models
Error Code C1
Method of Error Transmission conditions between the indoor unit control PCB (A1P) and fan PCB (A2P) are
Detection checked via microcomputer.
Error Decision When normal transmission is not carried out for a certain duration.
Conditions
Supposed  Defective connection of the connector between indoor unit control PCB (A1P) and fan PCB
Causes (A2P)
 Defective indoor unit control PCB (A1P)
 Defective fan PCB (A2P)
 External factor, such as instantaneous power failure

Troubleshooting
Is the
connector between
indoor unit PCB (A1P) and fan NO Connect the connector accurately.
PCB (A2P) accurately
connected? (∗1)
YES
Confirm the condition of
transmission on indoor unit
PCB using field setting mode.
(∗2)
Under above
field setting mode, NO Replace the indoor unit control
second code No. is 01. PCB (A1P).
YES
Connect the connector X70A
and turn ON the power again.
C1
YES Replace the fan PCB (A2P).
Reoccurrence
of error.
NO
Continue the operation (It is

possible to have a cause, such
as instantaneous power failure).
Note(s) 1. Pull out and insert the connector once and check if it is absolutely connected.
2. Method to check transmission part of indoor unit control PCB.
(1) Turn OFF the power and remove the connector X70A of indoor unit control PCB (A1P).
(2) Short circuit X70A.
(3) After turning ON the power, check below numbers under field setting from remote controller.
(Confirmation: Second code No. at the condition of first code No. 21 on mode No. 41)
Determination 01: Normal
Other than 01: Transmission error on indoor unit control PCB
 After confirmation, turn OFF the power, take off the short circuit and connect X70A back to
original condition.

5.14 Transmission Error

Applicable FXFSQ-AR
Models
Error Code C1-01

Method of Error Check the condition of transmission using microcomputer.
Detection
Error Decision Error is decided when transmission has been lost for 15 seconds and the error code is
Conditions displayed on the remote controller 60 seconds later.
Supposed  Defective connection of the transmission connector (X70A)

Causes  Defective indoor unit control PCB
 External factor such as noise
Troubleshooting
Is the
connector X70A on the NO
indoor unit control PCB Connect the connector correctly.
connected correctly?
YES
Is there any YES

external factor such as Remove the external factor.
noise other than failure?
NO
Turn OFF the power supply and
then turn it ON again. Then, start
operation with remote controller.
Error is displayed NO
again. Normal.
YES
Check the indoor unit control
PCB (A1P).

5.15 Transmission Error (between Indoor Unit PCB and Auto

Grille Control PCB)
Applicable FXFSQ-AR (when auto grille panel BYCQ125EBSF is installed)
Models
Error Code C1-06

Method of Error The status of communication between the indoor unit PCB (X70A) and the auto grille control
Detection PCB (X12A) is checked with the microcomputer.
Error Decision When transmission communication between the indoor unit PCB and the auto grille control PCB
Conditions is not normally performed for a certain period of time or more.
Supposed  Defective connection of the transmission communication connector between the indoor unit
Causes PCB and the auto grille control PCB
 Defective auto grille control PCB

Troubleshooting
Is the X70A
connector on the indoor NO
unit PCB properly
connected?
YES
Is the X12A NO
connector on the auto grille Properly connect the connector.
control PCB properly
connected?
YES
Is the harness YES

disconnected? Replace the harness.
NO
Is there any YES

external factor such as Remove the external factor.
noise?
NO
Turn OFF the power once and turn
ON again. Then, start grille
operation with remote controller.
Is
"Auto grille
elevation operation" NO
displayed in the remote Check the indoor unit PCB and
controller menu? the auto grille control PCB.
YES
Can NO
the target unit be Check the indoor unit PCB and
selected? the auto grille control PCB.
YES
Normal.

5.16 Thermistor Abnormality

Models
Error Code C4, C5, C9

Method of Error The error is determined by the temperature detected by the thermistor.
Detection
Error Decision The thermistor becomes disconnected or shorted while the unit is running.
Conditions
Supposed  Defective thermistor

 Disconnection of connector
Troubleshooting
Remove the thermistor from

the indoor unit PCB. Then,
insert the connector again.
Does the unit YES

operate normally? Normal (The error is caused by
defective contact.)
NO
Remove the thermistor from
the indoor unit PCB, and then
measure the resistance of the
thermistor using a multimeter.
CHECK 11 NO
Normal? Replace the thermistor.
YES
control PCB (A1P).
Note(s) Error code and thermistor

Error Code Thermistor Electric Symbol
C4 Indoor heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor R2T
C5 Indoor heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor R3T
C9 Suction air thermistor R1T

5.17 Combination Abnormality (between Indoor Unit PCB and

Fan PCB)
Applicable FXMQ-PB
Models
Error Code C6
Method of Error Transmission conditions with the fan PCB (A2P) are checked using the indoor unit PCB (A1P).
Detection
Error Decision Fan PCB (A2P) communication data is determined to be incorrect.

Conditions
Supposed  Defective fan PCB (A2P)

Causes  Defective connection of capacity setting adaptor
 Field setting error
Troubleshooting
Does the
fan PCB part No. NO
match that of the spare Replace it with the correct
parts list? fan PCB (A2P).
YES
Has the
indoor unit control PCB NO After establishing
(A1P) been replaced with a
spare PCB? transmission for indoor and
outdoor, diagnose the
operation again.
YES
Was
the correct
capacity setting
adaptor installed when NO
Install the correct capacity
replacing it with a spare setting adaptor.
PCB?
YES
After establishing
transmission for indoor and
outdoor, diagnose the
operation again.

5.18 Capacity Setting Abnormality

Applicable FXFSQ-AR
Models
Error Code C6-01

Method of Error This error is detected by checking communication between the PCB (A1P) and the fan
Detection microcomputer.
Error Decision Based on the communication data, decide whether the combination of capacity setting and the
Conditions type of fan driver is correct.
Supposed  Defective connection of the capacity setting adaptor

Causes  Wrong field setting
Troubleshooting
Is the indoor
NO
unit PCB (A1P) replaced by After transmission between
the spare PCB? the indoor and the outdoor
PCBs is established, perform
operation again and then
YES
perform diagnosis again.
Is a proper
capacity setting adaptor NO
installed when replaced by the Install a proper capacity
space PCB? setting adaptor.
YES
After transmission between

the indoor and the outdoor
PCBs is established, perform
operation again and then
perform diagnosis again.

5.19 Indoor Unit PCB Abnormality

Applicable FXFSQ-AR
Models
Error Code C6-05

Method of Error This error is detected by checking the current sensor value.
Detection
Error Decision When an abnormal signal is detected at the start of operation of the fan motor.
Conditions
Supposed  Disconnection of the connector of the fan motor lead wire

Causes  Defective fan motor (Broken wires or defective insulation)
 Defective PCB (A1P)
Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power supply, and then

wait for a period of 10 minutes.
Is the fan
motor connector (X901A) NO
connected properly?
YES
Resistances
between UVW phases of
YES
the fan motor are imbalanced, or Replace the fan motor.
there is a short circuit
between UVW.
NO

(A1P).

5.20 Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor Error

Applicable FXFSQ-AR
Models
Error Code CE
Method of Error The contents of a failure vary with the detailed error code. Check the code and proceed with the
Detection flowchart.
Error Decision Error is detected based on sensor output signals

Conditions
Supposed  Defective or disconnected infrared presence sensor connector: CE-01

Causes  Defective infrared floor sensor (Temperature compensation circuit disconnection): CE-02
 Defective infrared floor sensor (Temperature compensation short circuit): CE-03
 Defective infrared floor sensor element: CE-04
Troubleshooting
Error type varies according

to error code. Check the
error code and take the
following steps.
Error code
See diagnosis procedure 1.
CE-01
Error code
CE-02
Error code
CE-03
Error code
CE-04

Troubleshooting
Diagnosis procedure 1
Infrared presence sensor
error (Error code CE-01)
Is the
connection
of the connector
on infrared presence NO
sensor PCB (A3P) and Connect the connector correctly.
the connector
X81A on A1P
normal?
YES
Is the
connection of the NO
Connect the connector correctly.
sensor connector
normal?
YES
Check infrared presence sensor output; refer to

sensor and address data No. 22-25.
Displays
15 by the above NO
Normal.
verification method.
YES
Turn off the power and then reconnect.
Displays CE-01
again or 15 for NO
Normal.
sensor and
address data.
YES
Replace the sensor.

Troubleshooting
Infrared floor sensor error
(Error code CE-02)
Is the
connection
of the connector
on infrared floor NO
the connector
X81A on A1P
normal?
YES
Is the
sensor connector
normal?
YES
Check infrared floor sensor output; refer to sensor

and address data No. 26.
Displays
"--" by the above NO
Normal.
YES
Displays CE-02
again or "--" for NO
Normal.
sensor and
address data.
YES
Replace the sensor.

Troubleshooting
(Error code CE-03)
Is the
connection
of the connector
the connector
X81A on A1P
normal?
YES
Is the
sensor connector
normal?
YES
Check infrared floor sensor output; refer to

sensor and address data No. 26.
Displays
Normal.
YES
Displays
CE-03 again or "--" NO
for sensor and address Normal.
data.
YES
Replace the sensor.

Troubleshooting
(Error code CE-04)
Is the
connection
of the connector
the connector
X81A on A1P
normal?
YES
Is the
sensor connector
normal?
YES
Check infrared floor sensor output; refer to

sensor and address data No. 26.
Displays
Normal.
verification
method.
YES
Displays
CE-04 again or "--" NO
for sensor and address Normal.
data.
YES
Replace the sensor.

5.21 Remote Controller Thermistor Abnormality

Models
Error Code CJ
Method of Error Error detection is carried out by the temperature detected by the remote controller thermistor.
Detection
Error Decision When the remote controller thermistor becomes disconnected or shorted while the unit is
Conditions running.
 Error code is displayed but the system operates continuously.
Supposed  Defective remote controller thermistor

Causes  Defective remote controller PCB
Troubleshooting
Clear the error code history.

(While in inspection mode,
press and hold the ON/OFF
button for a period of 4
seconds or more.)
Is CJ YES
displayed on the remote Replace the remote
controller? controller.
NO
External factor other than
equipment error.
(for example, noise etc.)
Note(s) 1: How to delete “history of error codes”.

Press the ON/OFF button for 4 seconds and more while the error code is displayed in the
inspection mode.

5.22 Outdoor Unit Main PCB Abnormality

Applicable All outdoor unit models
Models
Error Code E1
Method of Error Abnormality is detected under the communication conditions in the hardware section between
Detection the indoor unit and outdoor unit.
Error Decision When the communication conditions in the hardware section between the indoor unit and the
Conditions outdoor unit are not normal.
Supposed  Defective outdoor unit main PCB

Causes  Disconnection of the inside/outside relay wires
Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power once and

turn ON again.
YES
Return to normal? External factor other than
error (for example, noise
etc.).
NO
Check if
inside / outside
YES
relay wires of outdoor Connect the inside/outside
unit main PCB is relay wires correctly.
disconnected.
NO
Replace the outdoor unit

main PCB (A1P).

5.23 Current Leakage Detection

Applicable RXYMQ4-6AYFK
Models
Error Code E2
Sub code: 01
Method of Error Current leakage is detected in the earth leakage detection circuit. Error is detected on the
Detection outdoor unit main PCB.
Error Decision When leakage current is detected.

Conditions
Supposed  Earth fault

Causes  Defective wiring with the current sensor
 Temporary liquid back or refrigerant stagnation
Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power supply,

and then disconnect the
compressor lead wire.
Check
if the
connection to the NO
current sensor (T1A) is Correct the wiring.
correctly wired.
YES
Defective compressor YES

insulation Replace the compressor.
(1)
NO
Defective
insulation of parts YES
other than the Replace the corresponding
parts.
compressor
NO
Reconnect the wires, and
then reconnect the unit to the Normal
power supply. (Keep operating)
It is possibly caused by
temporary oil return or
refrigerant stagnation.
(Perform maintenance
during long-term
shutdown such as a
power outage.)
Note(s) 1. M1C

5.24 Missing of Leakage Detection Core

Models
Error Code E2
Sub code: 06
Method of Error Detect error according to whether or not there is continuity across the connector (X101A).
Detection
Error Decision When no current flows at the time of turning ON the power supply.
Conditions
Supposed  Disconnection of connector (X101A)

Causes  Wiring disconnection
 Defective outdoor unit main PCB
Troubleshooting

and then disconnect
compressor leads.
Is the system reset to YES The error is considered to have

normal? resulted from external factors
other than failures (e.g. noise).
NO
Is X101A connected? NO Properly connect the connector.
YES
Replace the outdoor unit main

PCB (A1P).

5.25 Activation of High Pressure Switch

Models
Error Code E3
Method of Error Detect continuity across the high pressure switch in the protection device circuit.
Detection
Error Decision When part of the protection device circuit opens.

Conditions (Reference) Operating pressure of the high pressure switch:
 Operating pressure: 4.0 MPa
 Resetting pressure: 3.0 MPa
Supposed  Activation of high pressure switch

Causes  Defective high pressure switch
 Momentary power failure
 Defective high pressure sensor
Troubleshooting
Check for the following 3 points:

(1) Is the stop valve open?
(2) Is the high pressure switch connector properly
connected to the outdoor unit main PCB?
(3) Is there continuity across the high pressure switch?
Are the NO
above 3 points Remedy defective points.
OK?
YES
(1) Mount a pressure gauge on the high pressure
service port.
(2) Reset the operation using the remote controller,
and then restart the operation.
Is the
operating
Does the error E3 YES pressure of the NO
high pressure switch Replace the high pressure
recur?
normal switch. (S1PH)
(4.0 MPa)?
NO YES
CHECK 12
Compare the voltage
measurement of the connector
of the pressure sensor (1) with the NO Replace the high pressure sensor
measurement of the pressure gauge.
Are the characteristics (S1NPH).
of the high pressure
sensor normal? (1) Use the table on CHECK 12
to convert the voltage measurement
into pressure measurement.
YES
A Go to the next page

CHECK 12
Service Checker
Connect the service checker, and then compare the high pressure value
measured by the service checker with the voltage measurement of the
connector of the pressure sensor (1)
Are both
NO
pressure values the Replace the outdoor unit
same? main PCB (A1P).
YES
-The high pressure sensor is normal, and outdoor unit main PCB is also
normal.
-The high pressure has really become high.
CHECK 1 Eliminate factors that cause the high pressure to rise.

5.26 Activation of Low Pressure Sensor

Models
Error Code E4
Method of Error Make judgment of pressure detected by the low pressure sensor with the outdoor unit main
Detection PCB.
Error Decision When low pressure caused a drop while the compressor is in operation:
Conditions  Operating pressure: 0.07 MPa
Supposed  Abnormally drop in low pressure

Causes  Defective low pressure sensor
 The stop valve is not opened
Troubleshooting
Is the stop NO
Open the stop valve.
valve open?
YES
(1) Mount a pressure gauge on the low pressure
service port.
(2) Reset the operation using the remote
controller, and then restart the operation.
CHECK 12
Compare the
voltage measurement of
the connector of the pressure NO
sensor (1) with the measurement Replace the low pressure sensor.
of the pressure gauge. (S1NPL)
Are the characteristics of the
low pressure sensor (1) Use the table on CHECK 12 to
normal?
convert the voltage measurement into
pressure measurement.
YES
CHECK 12
Service Checker
Connect the service checker, and then compare the low pressure value
measured by the service checker with the voltage measurement of the
connector of the pressure sensor (1)
Are both
NO
pressure values the Replace the outdoor unit main
same? PCB (A1P).
YES
- The low pressure sensor is normal, and outdoor unit main PCB is
also normal.
- The low pressure has really become low.
CHECK 2 Eliminate factors that cause the low pressure to decrease.

5.27 Compressor Motor Lock

Models
Error Code E5
Method of Error Outdoor unit main PCB takes the position signal from UVW line connected between the inverter
Detection and compressor, and the error is detected when any abnormality is observed in the
phase-current waveform.
Error Decision When the compressor motor does not operate even by starting it in forced startup mode.
Conditions
Supposed  Compressor lock

Causes  High differential pressure (0.5 MPa or more)
 UVW connection error
 Defective inverter circuit
 The stop valve is not opened.
Troubleshooting
Is the stop NO
valve open? Field factor
YES
Check the connection wiring for
compressor M1C.
Is the
connection line NO
of the compressor Replace the connection line,
normal? and then securely connect the
connector.
YES
Power OFF
Are wire
connections
made to phases U, V NO Make proper wire connections.
and W in the proper
order and W
manner?
U
YES
V
Are wire
connections NO
made according Make proper wire connections.
to the wiring
diagram?
YES
A

The insulation
resistance of the YES
Replace the compressor (M1C).
compressor is low
(< 100 k )
Power OFF NO
The
internal wiring of YES
the compressor coil is
defective.
NO
Restart the
compressor, and then NO
check for the operation. Quit work.
Does the error Pressure equalization failure
recur? may have occurred. Check for
the refrigerant system.
Power ON YES
Has the
compressor
started up at high YES
differential pressure Pressure equalization failure.
(0.5 MPa or Check for the refrigerant
more)? system.
NO
CHECK 4
NO
Power OFF Is the power Replace the relevant PCB (1).
transistor
normal?
YES
RXYMQ4-6AYFK only
The error recurs at NO

Power ON Continue operation.
startup. The error could have
resulted from instantaneous
power failure.
YES
Replace the inverter

Power OFF
PCB (A3P).
The error recurs at NO

Power ON Continue operation.
startup.
YES
Replace the compressor (M1C).
This is not a failure of the
PCB. Reinstall the PCB.
Note(s) 1. RXYMQ4AVMK: outdoor unit main PCB (A1P)

RXYMQ4-6AYFK: inverter PCB (A3P)

5.28 Outdoor Fan Motor Abnormality

Models
Error Code E7
Method of Error  Detect according to the value of current flowing through the PCB.
Detection  Detect error of the fan motor system according to the fan revolutions detected by the Hall IC
during the fan motor runs.
Error Decision  When overcurrent is detected (Detecting overcurrent 4 times will shut down the system).
Conditions  When the fan revolutions fall below a given level for a period of 6 seconds while in fan motor
rotation mode (Detecting shortage of revolutions will shut down the system).
Supposed  Fan motor failure

Causes  Disconnection of harness/connector between the fan motor and the PCB
 Fan does not rotate due to foreign matter caught in it
 Clearing condition: fan motor performs normal operation for a period of 5 minutes

Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power supply, and then wait for a period of 10 minutes.
There is
foreign matter around the YES
Remove the foreign matter.
applicable fan.
NO
Check for Connection of Connector

Check for the connections of fan motor connector.
Connector is YES
Insert the connector.
disconnected.
NO
The fuse (1) on the YES

relevant PCB (2) has Replace the relevant PCB (2).
continuity.
NO
The fan
can be rotated
by hand when NO
disconnecting the Replace the fan motor (M1F).
connector from the
fan motor.
YES
Resistance
between the fan
motor power supply cable YES
terminal and the motor frame Replace the fan motor (M1F).
(metallic part) is less
than 1 M .
NO
A

RXYMQ4AVMK
CHECK 16
Check for the connector
(power supply cable) of the
fan motor.
Resistance
between U, V, W
phases of the fan motor
power supply cable has lost YES
balance or short circuit is
caused between U, V,
W phases.
NO
Turn ON the power supply to
check for the HAP lamp on
the outdoor main PCB (A1P)
The HAP NO
lamp on A1P blinks. Replace the outdoor main PCB
(A1P).
YES
RXYMQ4-6AYFK
A
CHECK 16
Check for the connector
(power supply cable) of the
fan motor.
Resistance
between U, V, W
phases of the fan motor
power supply cable has lost balance YES Replace the fan motor (M1F).
or short circuit is caused
between U, V, W
phases.
NO
Turn ON the power supply to check for the following LED lamps.
(1) LED lamp on the inverter PCB (A3P)
(2) LED lamp on the fan PCB (A4P)
The LED lamp

on A3P blinks, but that YES Replace the fan PCB (A4P).
on A4P does not blink.
NO
Note(s) 1. RXYMQ4AVMK: F6U

RXYMQ4-6AYFK: F101U
2. RXYMQ4AVMK: outdoor unit main PCB (A1P)
RXYMQ4-6AYFK: fan PCB (A4P)

5.29 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality

Models
Error Code E9
Method of Error Detect according to whether or not there is continuity across the electronic expansion valve
Detection coils (Y1E, Y2E, Y3E, Y4E).
Error Decision When no current flows through common (COM+) at the time of turning ON the power supply.
Conditions
Supposed  Disconnection of connectors from electronic expansion valves (Y1E, Y2E, Y3E, Y4E)
Causes  Defective electronic expansion valve coil
Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power supply

once, and then turn it ON again.
YES Investigate external causes other than

Return to normal?
failures (e.g. noise).
NO
CHECK 18
Is sub code one of YES The resistance of NO
the following? the electronic expansion Replace the defective electronic
E9-48, 54 valve coil is expansion valve coil.
normal.
NO YES
Replace the outdoor unit main PCB
(A1P).
Check for electronic
expansion valves applicable
to the error code E9 while in
monitor mode.
• Sub code
Y1E: E9-01
Y2E: E9-03
Y3E: E9-04
Y4E: E9-26
Connector for
the electronic expansion NO
valve of the outdoor unit main Properly and securely connect the
PCB (A1P) is connector.
connected.
YES
CHECK 18
The resistance of the NO
electronic expansion Replace the electronic expansion
valve coil is valve coil.
normal.
YES
(A1P).

5.30 Discharge Pipe Temperature Abnormality

Models
Error Code F3
Method of Error Detect according to temperature detected with the discharge pipe or compressor body
Detection thermistor.
Error Decision  When discharge pipe temperature becomes abnormally high (i.e., 135°C or more)
Conditions  When discharge pipe temperature sharply rises (remains at 120°C or more for a period of
consecutive 10 minutes)
Supposed  Abnormal discharge pipe temperature

Causes  Defective discharge pipe thermistor
 Closed stop valve

Troubleshooting
NO
Is the stop valve open? Open the stop valve.
YES
Connect the Service Checker.

Reset the system operation,
and then restart it.
CHECK 11
Are
the characteristics NO
Replace the discharge pipe
of the discharge pipe
thermistor normal? thermistor (R21T).
YES
Service Checker
Connect the Service Checker, and then compare the
discharge pipe temperature measured by the Service
Checker and the measurement of discharge pipe
surface temperature.
Is the
temperature
checked by the NO
Service Checker same as Replace the outdoor unit main
the measurement of the PCB (A1P).
temperature?
YES
• Thermistor is normal, and temperature detection with
the outdoor unit main PCB is also normal.
• The discharge pipe temperature has really become
high.
CHECK 3 Eliminate the causes of superheat operation.

5.31 Wet Alarm

Models
Error Code F4
Method of Error In cooling operation, detect the condition under which liquid refrigerant returns to the
Detection compressor, according to the temperature and pressure of each part.
Error Decision When the following wet state continues for a period of 180 minutes, an alert is issued.
Conditions An error is defined for 240 minutes.
 Wet state in outdoor units
When the following wet state continues for a period of 180 minutes, an alert is issued.
 Wet state in some of indoor units
Supposed  Defective suction pipe thermistor

 Defective high pressure sensor
 Defective indoor unit electronic expansion valve
 Dirty air filter

Troubleshooting
Connect the Service Checker.

Mount a pressure gauge on the
high pressure service port.
Reset the operation, and then
restart the operation.
Are the
characteristics of the NO
Replace the suction pipe
suction pipe thermistor thermistor.
normal?
YES
Are the
discharge pipe NO
thermistor characteristics Replace the discharge
normal? pipe thermistor.
YES
Are the high
pressure sensor NO
Replace the high
characteristics pressure sensor
normal?
(S1NPH).
YES
Service Checker
Use the Service Checker to find indoor units
operating under the following conditions:
& • Gas pipe temperature (R3T) - Liquid pipe temperature (R2T) < 2.5°C
• Electronic expansion valve opening < 300 pulse
Stop the relevant indoor units while

the system is in cooling operation,
and then check for the liquid pipe
temperature of these indoor units
after the system is stabilized.
The liquid pipe

temperature is low YES
(equivalent to the evaporating Replace the indoor
temperature). electronic expansion
valve.
NO
Clean the air filters
of the indoor units.

5.32 Refrigerant Overcharged

Models
Error Code F6
Method of Error Detect overcharged refrigerant according to outdoor air temperature, heat exchanger liquid pipe
Detection temperature, and subcooling liquid pipe temperature during test operation.
Error Decision When the amount of refrigerant, which is calculated using outdoor air temperature, heat
Conditions exchanger liquid pipe temperature, and subcooling liquid pipe temperature during test
operation, exceeds the regular charge amount by 30% or more
(If refrigerant is charged slightly over the regular charge amount, F6 may be displayed on the
remote controller.)
Supposed  Refrigerant overcharged

Causes  Disconnection of outdoor air thermistor
 Disconnection of heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor
 Disconnection of subcooling liquid pipe thermistor
Troubleshooting
Check for the conditions of

mounting of the temperature
sensors of the outdoor air
thermistor, the heat exchanger
liquid pipe thermistor, and
subcooling liquid pipe thermistor
to the piping.
Are the temperature NO

sensors properly Properly connect the thermistors,
mounted? and then operate the system.
YES
Disconnect the outdoor air
thermistor, the heat exchanger
liquid pipe thermistor, and
subcooling liquid pipe
thermistor from the outdoor
unit main PCB, and then make
measurement of resistance
using a multimeter.
CHECK 11 NO
Replace abnormal thermistors,
Normal? and then operate the system.
YES
Remedy refrigerant overcharging.

5.33 Harness Abnormality (between Outdoor Unit Main PCB

and Inverter PCB)
Models
Error Code H3
Method of Error Check for the transmission conditions of the harnesses between the PCBs (X28A (A1P) and
Detection X6A (A3P)), and relay connector, if any, using microcomputer.
Error Decision When normal transmission between PCBs is disabled during the compressor stops running.
Conditions
Supposed  Defective connection of harnesses between PCBs

Causes  Defective outdoor unit main PCB
 Defective inverter PCB
Troubleshooting
Check for the transmission

conditions of the jumpers
between the PCBs.
YES
Harness error Return the relevant harness to
normal.
NO

PCB.
NO
H3 error recurs. Complete countermeasures.
YES
Replace the inverter PCB. (1)
Note(s) 1. A3P

5.34 OL Activation (Compressor Overload)

Models
Error Code H5
Method of Error A compressor overload is detected through compressor OL.
Detection
Error Decision  If the error occurs, the system is shut down.

Conditions  Reset condition: Continuous run for about 60 minutes without any other error
Supposed  Disconnection of discharge pipe thermistor

 Disconnection of connector X3A (RXYMQ4AVMK)
 Disconnection of connector X5A (RXYMQ4-6AYFK)
 Disconnection of 2 terminals of OL (Q1M)
 Defective OL (Q1M)
 Broken OL harness
 Defective outdoor unit PCB

Troubleshooting
Discharge pipe YES

thermistor disconnected? Insert the thermistor in
position.
NO
CHECK 11 NG
Check the discharge pipe Replace the discharge pipe
thermistor. thermistor.
OK
Is the OL connector NO
(1) properly connected? Connect the connector (1)
properly.
YES
Disconnect the connector (1)
from the PCB.
Check the
resistance between Nearly 0
the 2 terminals on the Replace the outdoor unit
connector (1). main PCB (A1P).
Resistance
Disconnect the 2 terminals of
the OL (Q1M).
Check the Nearly 0

resistance between the Replace the OL harness.
2 terminals of the OL
(Q1M).
Resistance
Replace the OL (Q1M).
Note(s) OL (Q1M) activating temperature: 125°C

OL (Q1M) recovery temperature: 110°C
1. RXYMQ4AVMK: X3A
RXYMQ4-6AYFK: X5A

5.35 Outdoor Fan PCB Abnormality

Models
Error Code H7-21

Method of Error Detect according to values detected with current sensor.
Detection
Error Decision When the current sensor is abnormal.

Conditions
Supposed  Disconnection/Short circuit in fan motor leads or disconnection of connector

Causes  Defective fan PCB
Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power supply

and wait for 10 minutes.
Is
resistance
between Vcc-UVW
and between GND-UVW NO Replace the fan motor (M1F).
of the fan motor lead in
balance?
YES

5.36 Thermistor Abnormality

Models
Error Code H9, J3, J5, J6, J7, J8, J9

Method of Error Detect according to temperature detected with individual thermistors.
Detection
Error Decision When the system is in operation and the thermistor causes wiring disconnection or short circuit
Conditions in it.
Supposed  Defective connection of thermistor

Causes  Defective thermistor
Troubleshooting
Thermistor is NO
connected to the Connect the connector and turn
connector. ON again.
YES
CHECK 11
Resistance is
normal when
measured after NO
disconnecting the Replace the thermistor (1).
thermistor from the
outdoor unit
main PCB.
YES
PCB (A1P).

Note(s) 1. Error codes and thermistors
Error RXYMQ-A
Code Applicable Thermistor
Electric symbol Connector
H9 Outdoor air thermistor R1T X18A
J3 Discharge pipe thermistor R21T X19A
J5 Suction pipe thermistor R3T
J6 Heat exchanger deicer thermistor R7T
J7 Subcooling heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor R5T X30A (Group
connector)
J8 Heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor R4T
J9 Subcooling heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor R6T

5.37 High Pressure Sensor Abnormality

Models
Error Code JA
Method of Error Detect according to temperature detected with the high pressure sensor.
Detection
Error Decision The high pressure sensor is short circuit or open circuit.
Conditions (Pressure range: 0-4.3 MPa)
Supposed  Defective high pressure sensor

Causes  Connection of low pressure sensor in mistake for high pressure sensor
 Defective connection of high pressure sensor
Troubleshooting
(1) Mount a pressure gauge on the

high pressure service port.
(2) Connect the Service Checker for
VRV systems.
Are the
characteristics of the
high pressure sensor
normal? (Make a comparison NO
between voltage characteristics Replace the high pressure sensor
and gauge pressure.) (S1NPH).
CHECK 12
YES
Is the outdoor
unit main PCB
detection pressure normal?
Make a comparison between data NO
on pressure checked by the Service Replace the outdoor unit main
Checker and the voltage PCB (A1P).
characteristics.
CHECK 12
YES
restart it.
Are the
characteristics of the high NO
pressure sensor normal? Replace the high pressure sensor
(S1NPH).
YES
PCB (A1P).

5.38 Low Pressure Sensor Abnormality

Models
Error Code JC
Method of Error Detect according to temperature detected with the low pressure sensor.
Detection
Error Decision The low pressure sensor is short circuit or open circuit.
Conditions (Pressure range: 0-1.7 MPa)
Supposed  Defective low pressure sensor

Causes  Connection of high pressure sensor in mistake for low pressure sensor
 Defective connection of low pressure sensor
Troubleshooting
(1) Mount a pressure gauge on the

low pressure service port.
(2) Connect the Service Checker for
VRV systems.
Are the
characteristics of
the low pressure
sensor normal? (Make a NO
comparison between voltage Replace the low pressure sensor
characteristics and gauge (S1NPL).
pressure.)
CHECK 12
YES
Is the
outdoor unit main
PCB detection pressure
normal? Make a comparison NO
between data on pressure checked by Replace the outdoor unit main
the Service Checker and the PCB (A1P).
voltage characteristics.
CHECK 12
YES
restart it.
Are the
characteristics of the low NO
pressure sensor Replace the low pressure sensor
normal? (S1NPL).
YES
PCB (A1P).

5.39 Inverter Circuit Abnormality

Models
Error Code L1
Method of Error Error is detected based on the current value during waveform output before starting
Detection compressor.
Error is detected based on the value from current sensor during synchronous operation when
starting the unit.
Error Decision  Overcurrent flows during waveform output.

Conditions  Error of current sensor during synchronous operation.
 IPM failure.
Supposed  IPM failure

Causes  Current sensor failure
 Drive circuit failure

Troubleshooting RXYMQ4AVMK

Turn off the power. Then,

turn on the power again.
Does the power YES

supply normally come It is supposed that the error results
from external causes other than
back on?
failures (e.g. exogenous noises or
NO thunder).
PCB (A1P).
RXYMQ4-6AYFK

Turn off the power. Then,

turn on the power again.
YES
Return to normal? The error could have resulted from
external factors other than failures
(e.g. external noise or thunder).
NO
CHECK 4
Is the power NO
transistor normal?
Is the
YES insulation to
ground resistance of the NO
Replace both the compressor (M1C)
compressor 100 k or
more? and the inverter PCB (A3P).
YES
Replace the inverter PCB (A3P).
CHECK 4
Is the power NO
transistor of the fan Replace both the inverter PCB (A3P)
driver normal? and the fan PCB (A4P).
YES

5.40 Momentary Power Failure during Test Operation

Models
Error Code L2
Method of Error Momentary power failure is detected by the PCB.
Detection
Error Decision Judgment is made by AC power frequency detection circuit on the outdoor unit main PCB
Conditions
Supposed  Defective wiring

Troubleshooting
Error
recurs after NO
turning OFF the power Temporary problem
and ON again.
YES
Any
disconnection
of connectors, loose
contact or wiring disconnection YES
Correct any fault.
in the transmission wirings to
the outdoor unit main
PCB?
NO
main PCB (A1P).

5.41 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Rise Abnormality

Models
Error Code L4
Method of Error Detect temperature of power module of the inverter circuit.
Detection
Error Decision Thermistor located inside the power module of the inverter circuit for compressor and fan motor.
Conditions Cooling tube plate poor heat-exchange.
Supposed  Radiation fin temperature rise of fan circuit

Causes  Cooling tube plate not fixed with screws
 U0 error
 Defective inverter circuit
 High outdoor air temperature
 Closed stop valve
Troubleshooting  Subcode L4-01

NO
YES
Is the radiation fin

temperature greater than the YES
Defective radiation from the power
designed temperature? unit
• Blocked air suction port
• Stained radiation fin
NO • High outdoor air temperature
Does the
connector X111A of fin
thermistor connect to the NO
outdoor unit main PCB
correctly?
YES
Connect to the power and then press

the INSPECTION/TEST button on
remote controller.
Does the remote YES

controller display error Eliminate P4 error.
code P4?
NO
When the unit starts YES

operating, is the error code L4 Replace the relevant PCB (1).
displayed again?
NO
Keep operating.

 Subcode L4-06
Check the cooling conditions

of the inverter heat sink.
(1) Is the heat sink properly
fixed with screws?
(2) Error code U0 is displayed
on the Error History
screen.
Normal? NO
Rectify troubles.
YES
Turn
ON the power
supply. Does the error YES
Replace the relevant PCB (2).
recur when operation
starts?
NO
Continue operation.
Field factor. Heat sink radiation fin
temperature may have risen due to
high outdoor air temperature.


5.42 Compressor Instantaneous Overcurrent

Models
Error Code L5
Method of Error Detect current flowing through the power transistor.
Detection
Error Decision The current instantaneously exceeds A (A) in the power transistor.
Conditions Trigger point
Compressor model A (A)
2Y350APAX2N 48.1
2Y420AVAY1N 48.55
Supposed  Defective compressor coil (such as wiring disconnection or insulation failure)

Causes  Compressor startup failure (mechanical lock)
 Defective outdoor unit main PCB (RXYMQ4AVMK)
 Defective inverter PCB (RXYMQ4-6AYFK)
Troubleshooting
NO
YES
Check for the leads of the
compressor.
• For compressor M1C
Are the
Power OFF leads of the NO
compressor normal? Replace the leads of the
compressor.
YES
Are
wiring and wire NO
connections to the Rectify the wiring and
compressor wire connections.
normal?
YES

Power OFF The

insulation
compressor is Replace the compressor
100 k or less. (M1C).
NO
The internal
wiring of the YES
compressor coil is Replace the compressor
defective. (M1C).
NO
CHECK 4
Is the power NO
Replace the relevant
transistor normal? PCB (1).
YES
Restarting the NO
system results in the Continue operation.
recurrence of the
( )
The error could have
error. resulted from causes
YES such as instantaneous
power failure.
RXYMQ4-6AYFK Only
Power OFF Replace the inverter PCB (A3P).
Restarting the NO
recurrence of the
error.
YES
Replace the
compressor (M1C).


5.43 Compressor Overcurrent

Models
Error Code L8
Method of Error Detect current flowing through the power transistor.
Detection
Error Decision (1) The secondary-side inverter current exceeds A (A) for a period of 5 consecutive seconds.
Conditions (2) The secondary-side inverter current exceeds B (A) for a period of 260 consecutive seconds.
Trigger point
Compressor model A (A) B (A)
2Y350APAX2N 22.1 22.1
2Y420AVAY1N 22.5 18.6
Supposed  Compressor overloaded

Causes  Wiring disconnection in compressor coil
 Disconnection of compressor wiring
Troubleshooting
NO
YES
Check for the leads of the
compressor.
• For compressor M1C
Are the
Power OFF leads of the NO
compressor normal? Replace the leads of the
compressor.
YES
Are
wiring and wire NO
connections to the Rectify the wiring and
compressor wire connections.
normal?
YES

Power OFF The

insulation
compressor is 100 k or Replace the compressor
less to ground. (M1C).
NO
The internal
wiring of the YES
compressor coil is Replace the compressor
defective. (M1C).
NO
CHECK 4
NO
Is the power Replace the relevant
transistor normal? PCB (1).
YES
Connect the compressor lead
wires and restart.
NO
L8 recurs. Continue operation.
YES
The difference
between high and low pressure NO
Defective equalization of
before restarting is less than the refrigerant line.
0.2 MPa.
YES
RXYMQ4-6AYFK Only
Power OFF Replace the inverter PCB (A3P).
Restarting the NO
recurrence of the
error.
YES
Diagnose the
compressor (M1C).


5.44 Compressor Startup Abnormality

Models
Error Code L9
Method of Error Detect error according to the signal waveform of compressor.
Detection
Error Decision When compressor startup operation has not been completed.
Conditions
Supposed  The stop valve is not opened

Causes  Defective compressor
 Error in wire connections to compressor
 Large differential pressure before compressor startup
Troubleshooting
Startup for NO
the first time after Go to the next page.
installation? (Startup failure in aging operation)
YES
Is a proper NO
amount of refrigerant Charge a proper amount of
charged? refrigerant.
YES
Is the stop valve NO

open?
YES
Refrigerant
is stagnated. YES
(The unit is out of power Solve the refrigerant stagnation.
supply for more than 6 (Power should be supplied for more
hours.) than 6 hours.)
NO
Is the
insulation NO
resistance of the Replace the compressor (M1C).
compressor 100 k
or more?
YES
Are the
leads of the YES
compressor Connect the leads of the compressor.
disconnected?
NO
Apply power, and then restart
operation.

From the previous page

(Startup failure in aging
operation)
Refrigerant
is stagnated.
(The unit is out of power YES
Solve the refrigerant stagnation.
supply for more than (Power should be supplied for more
6 hours.) than 6 hours.)
NO
Is the
insulation
resistance of the NO
compressor 100 k Replace the compressor (M1C).
or more?
YES
The internal YES

wiring of the compressor coil is Replace the compressor (M1C).
defective.
NO
CHECK 4
Is the power NO
transistor normal?
YES
Recheck for the compressor and the
refrigerant system.


5.45 Transmission Error between Microcomputers on

Outdoor Unit Main PCB
Applicable RXYMQ4AVMK
Models
Error Code LC
Method of Error Check for the transmission conditions between microcomputers on the outdoor unit main PCB
Detection using a microcomputer.
Error Decision Normal transmission is disabled for a given period of time or more.
Conditions
Supposed  Connection error between microcomputers on the outdoor unit main PCB
Causes  Defective outdoor unit main PCB (transmission block)
 Defective noise filter
 Defective compressor
Troubleshooting
Is the harness
between terminal block NO
and outdoor unit main PCB Properly connect the harness.
securely connected?
(1)
YES
The insulation
resistance of the YES Replace the compressor.
compressor is less than
100 k .
NO
The insulation
resistance of the fan motor YES Replace the fan motor.
is less than
1M
NO
The
microcomputer normal
monitor (green) on the outdoor NO
unit main PCB (A1P) is (A1P).
blinking.
YES
YES Replace the outdoor unit main PCB
The LC error recurs.
(A1P).
NO
Continue operation.
The error could have resulted from
causes such as instantaneous
power failure.
Note(s)
1. Connect and disconnect the connector once to ensure that it is securely connected.

5.46 Transmission Error between Inverter PCB and Outdoor

Unit Main PCB
Models
Error Code LC
Method of Error Check for the transmission conditions between the inverter PCB and the outdoor unit main PCB
Detection using a microcomputer.
Error Decision Normal transmission is disabled for a given period of time or more.
Conditions
Supposed  Defective connection between the inverter PCB and the outdoor unit main PCB
Causes  Defective outdoor unit main PCB (transmission block)
 Defective noise filter
Troubleshooting
Is the
connector
between outdoor unit NO
main PCB and inverter PCB Properly connect the connector.
securely connected?
(1)
YES
Does the
inverter PCB part No. NO
match that of the spare Replace with a proper PCB.
parts list?
YES
The insulation
compressor is less Replace the compressor (M1C).
than 100 k .
NO
The insulation
resistance of the fan motor YES
is less than
1M
NO

The service
monitor (green) on the NO
outdoor unit main This is not the LC error.
PCB (A1P) is Recheck the error code.
blinking.
YES
The service
monitor (green) on the NO The fuse of the NO
inverter PCB (A3P) is noise filter PCB has blown Replace the inverter PCB (A3P).
blinking. out.
YES
YES Replace all of the inverter PCB (A3P),
the fan PCB (A4P) and the noise filter
Is the PCB (A2P).
connector between
the inverter PCB and the fan NO
PCB securely connected?
YES
The service
monitor (green) on the fan NO
PCB (A4P) is blinking.
YES
YES
The LC error recurs. Replace the outdoor unit main PCB
(A1P).
NO
Continue operation.
The error could have resulted from
causes such as instantaneous
power failure.
Note(s)
1. Connect and disconnect the connector once to ensure that it is securely connected.

5.47 Inverter Circuit Capacitor High Voltage

Applicable RXYMQ4AVMK
Models
Error Code P1
Method of Error The voltage waveform of the main circuit capacitor of the inverter is used to check for errors.
Detection
Error Decision The voltage waveform fluctuates greatly.

Conditions
Supposed  Defective main circuit capacitor

Causes  Incorrect main circuit wiring
Troubleshooting
Measure voltage between L and N.
Is power supply
voltage within NO
Correct the power supply
rated voltage ±10%? voltage.
YES

PCB (A1P).

5.48 Power Supply Voltage Imbalance

Models
Error Code P1
Method of Error Detect voltage imbalance through inverter PCB.
Detection
Error Decision Power supply voltage imbalance exceeds approximately 12 V.

Conditions
Error is not decided while the unit operation is continued.
P1 will be displayed by pressing the inspection button.
Supposed  Open phase

Causes  Interphase voltage imbalance
 Defective capacitor in the main circuit
 Defective wiring in the main circuit

Troubleshooting
Is supply
voltage imbalance over YES YES
Open phase? Correct the open phase of
approximately 12 V?
(1) power supply.
NO NO
Rectify the power supply
voltage imbalance.
Take countermeasures (listed
below).
Is the imbalance of
YES
voltage applied to the inverter Defective noise filter, inverter
over approximately PCB or wiring
12 V? (2)
and then check and repair
NO
wirings in the main circuit and
<If voltage can be monitored> defective components.
(1) Loose contact and wiring
Use equipment capable of constantly disconnection between the
recording power supply voltages (e.g. power supply and the
Memory Hi-Corder) to record power inverter
supply voltages between phases (2) Wiring disconnection in or
(R-S, S-T, and R-T) for a period of loose contact of noise filter
consecutive 1 week.
Even though the power Power supply voltage imbalance Even

supply voltage is normal, the though power supply voltage remains
error recurs. balanced when making measurement,
it often becomes imbalanced during
nighttime (from 06:00 PM to 10:00 PM).
Take countermeasures.
Replace the inverter PCB
(A3P).
Explanation to users Use the document “Notice of Inspection Results” attached to spare part.
Hand the “Notice of Inspection Results” to user to ask Be sure to explain user that “power supply
him/her to rectify the imbalance. voltage imbalance” will occur and Daikin
accepts no responsibility for the imbalance.
Note(s)
1. Make measurement of voltage at the power supply terminal block (X1M).
2. Make measurement of voltage at the L1, L2 and L3 terminals of diode module located on
the inverter PCB during the compressor is in operation.

5.49 Reactor Temperature Abnormality

Models
Error Code P3
Method of Error Detect according to the value detected with the reactor surface thermistor.
Detection
Error Decision When the system is in operation and the thermistor causes wiring disconnection or short circuit
Conditions in it.
Supposed  Defective connection of thermistor

Causes  Defective reactor surface thermistor
Troubleshooting
Make measurement of
resistance of the radiation
fin thermistor.
Is the
resistance of the NO
thermistor normal? Replace the inverter PCB (A3P).
YES
Turn ON the
power supply. YES
Does the error
recur?
NO
Continue operation.

5.50 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Abnormality

Models
Error Code P4
Method of Error Detect the resistance of the following thermistors during the compressor stops running:
Detection (1) Radiation fin thermistor
(2) Thermistor located in PCB circuit
Error Decision When the resistance of the thermistor comes to a value equivalent to open or short circuit.
Conditions
Error is not decided while the unit operation is continued.
P4 will be displayed by pressing the inspection button.
Supposed  Defective radiation fin temperature thermistor

Causes  Defective outdoor unit main PCB (RXYMQ4AVMK)
 Defective fan PCB (RXYMQ4-6AYFK)

Troubleshooting  Subcode P4-01

Make measurement of
resistance of the radiation
fin thermistor.
CHECK 11
Is the resistance of the NO
radiation fin thermistor Replace the relevant PCB (1).
normal?
YES
The
insulation resistance YES
of the compressor is Replace the compressor
less than 100 k . (M1C).
NO
The insulation
resistance of the fan motor YES
Replace the fan motor.
is less than 1 M .
NO
Turn ON the
power supply. YES
Does the error
recur?
NO
Continue operation.
 Subcode P4-02
The insulation
resistance of the fan YES
motor is
less than 1 M .
NO
Turn ON
the power supply. YES
Replace the relevant PCB
Does the error recur?
(2).
NO
Continue operation.


5.51 Field Setting after Replacing Outdoor Unit Main PCB

Abnormality or Combination of PCB Abnormality
Models
Error Code PJ
Method of Error This error is detected according to communications with the outdoor unit main PCB
Detection (RXYMQ4AVMK) or inverter PCB (RXYMQ4-6AYFK).
Error Decision Make judgment according to communication data on whether or not the type of the outdoor unit
Conditions main PCB (RXYMQ4AVMK) or inverter PCB (RXYMQ4-6AYFK) is correct.
Supposed  Mismatching of type of PCB

Causes  Improper (or no) field setting after replacing outdoor unit main PCB
Does the
outdoor unit main PCB NO
part No. match that of the Replace with a correct
spare parts list? outdoor unit main PCB
(A1P).
YES
Has the
DIP switch setting
been made properly to NO
Properly make DIP switch
replace the outdoor unit setting.
main PCB? (After completion of setting,
reset the power supply.)
YES
main PCB (A1P).
RXYMQ4-6AYFK

Does the
inverter PCB part NO
No. match that of the Replace with a correct
spare parts list? inverter PCB (A3P).
YES
Does the fan

PCB part No. match that NO
of the spare parts list? Replace with a correct fan
PCB (A4P).
YES
Has the
DIP switch setting
been made properly to NO
Properly make DIP switch
replace the outdoor unit
main PCB? setting.
(After completion of setting,
reset the power supply.)
YES
main PCB (A1P).

5.52 Refrigerant Shortage Warning (Cooling)

Models
Error Code U0
Sub code: 05
Method of Error Detects refrigerant shortage according to the ending conditions of cooling oil return control.
Detection
Error Decision Cooling oil return control does not finish according to the ending conditions, and the time is
Conditions up for 3 consecutive times.
 No abnormality is determined, and the operation continues.
Supposed  Refrigerant shortage and refrigerant clogging (wrong piping)

 Defective low pressure sensor
Troubleshooting
Are the
suction pipe thermistor Replace the thermistor
normal? (R3T).
YES
Are the
low pressure sensor Replace the low pressure
normal? sensor (S1NPL).
YES
CHECK 2 CHECK 2
NO YES
Is refrigerant shortage detected Is another cause detected as a Correct the abnormally low
as a cause of abnormally cause of abnormally low pressure.
low pressure? pressure?
YES NO
CHECK 3 CHECK 3
NO YES
Is refrigerant shortage detected Is another cause detected Correct the superheat
as a cause of superheat as a cause of superheat operation.
operation? operation?
YES NO
CHECK 7 YES
Is refrigerant Correct the insufficient low
insufficient? refrigerant condition.
NO
main PCB (A1P).

5.53 Refrigerant Shortage Warning (Heating)

Models
Error Code U0
Sub code: 06
Method of Error Detects refrigerant shortage according to the difference between low pressure equivalent
Detection saturation temperature and suction pipe temperature, opening degree of main electronic
expansion valve, or superheating operation.
Error Decision The following conditions are satisfied for 20 minutes or more.
Conditions  Suction pipe temperature – Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature > 30°C
 Opening degree of main electronic expansion valve (Y1E) > 480 pulses
 Discharge pipe temperature > 125°C, or low pressure < 0.15 MPa and high pressure < 2.1
MPa simultaneously.
 No abnormality is determined, and the operation continues.


Troubleshooting
Are the
suction pipe thermistor Replace the thermistor
normal? (R3T).
YES
Are the
low pressure sensor Replace the low pressure
normal? sensor (S1NPL).
YES
CHECK 2 CHECK 2
NO YES
YES NO
CHECK 3 CHECK 3
NO YES
Is refrigerant shortage detected Is another cause detected Correct the superheat
as a cause of superheat as a cause of superheat operation.
YES NO
CHECK 7 YES
NO
main PCB (A1P).

5.54 Refrigerant Shortage Abnormality (Heating Only)

Models
Error Code U0
Sub code: -08
Method of Error Detects refrigerant shortage according to the difference between low pressure equivalent
Detection saturation temperature and suction pipe temperature, opening degree of main electronic
expansion valve or indoor unit electronic expansion valve, inverter fin temperature, or outdoor
air temperature, etc.
Error Decision All of the following conditions are satisfied for 5 minutes or more, 4 times within 240 minutes.
Conditions  Suction pipe temperature – Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature > 15°C
 Opening degree of main electronic expansion valve (Y1E) > 480 pulses
 Inverter fin temperature < Outdoor air temperature
 Outdoor air temperature – Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature > 15°C
 Opening degree of the electronic expansion valve of all the indoor units that have thermostat
ON is 400 pulses or more
 High pressure equivalent saturation temperature – Thermostat ON indoor unit liquid pipe
temperature < 5°C
 Compressor operates in minimum step

 Defective inverter fin temperature thermistor
 Defective electronic expansion valve coil (Y3E)
Troubleshooting
CHECK 11
Are the NO
characteristics of the Replace the outdoor air
outdoor air thermistor thermistor (R1T).
(R1T) normal?
YES
CHECK 11
Are the NO
characteristics of the Replace the suction pipe
suction pipe thermistor (R3T).
thermistor (R3T)
normal?
YES
A Go to the next page

Are the
characteristics of
the inverter fin temperature NO
thermistor normal? Replace the relevant PCB
(Refer to L4 (1).
troubleshooting.)
YES
CHECK 12
NO
Are the characteristics Replace the low pressure
of the low pressure sensor (S1NPL).
sensor normal?
YES
CHECK 12
Are the characteristics NO
Replace the high pressure
of the high pressure sensor (S1NPH).
sensor normal?
YES
CHECK 18
Are the characteristics and NO
insulation of the electronic expansion Replace the electronic
valve (refrigerant jacket) expansion valve coil (Y3E).
(Y3E) normal?
YES
CHECK 2 CHECK 2
NO YES
YES NO
CHECK 3 CHECK 3
Is refrigerant shortage detected NO Is another cause detected YES
as a cause of superheating Correct the superheating
as a cause of superheating operation.
YES NO
CHECK 7 YES
NO
Replace the relevant
PCB(s) (2).
If the error recurs, replace
the electronic expansion
valve (refrigerant jacket)
(Y3E).

RXYMQ4-6AYFK: outdoor unit main PCB (A1P) and inverter PCB (A3P)


5.55 Open Phase

Models
Error Code U1
Method of Error The phase of each phase is detected by phase detection circuit and open phase is judged.
Detection
Error Decision When any phase is open phase.

Conditions
Supposed  Abnormal supply voltage

Causes  Open phase
Troubleshooting
Power supply
harness
(3-phase, 4 wires) is NO
Connect the harness properly.
properly connected to
the terminal
block.
YES
Power supply
voltage falls within NO
380 V to 415 V between Check the power supply for
L1-L2, L2-L3 and abnormalities.
L3-L1.
YES
The connectors
between the terminal
block, noise filter PCB and NO
inverter PCB are properly Connect the connectors properly.
connected.
YES
The fuse of the noise NO

filter PCB is blown out. Replace the inverter PCB. (A3P)
YES
Replace the noise filter PCB (A2P) and
the inverter PCB (A3P).

5.56 Power Supply Insufficient or Instantaneous Abnormality

Models
Error Code U2
Method of Error Detect the voltage of capacitor of the main circuit in the outdoor unit main PCB.
Detection
Error Decision When the voltage in the DC circuit (between diode module and power module) falls below
Conditions 220-240 VDC (RXYMQ4AVMK) or 380 VDC (RXYMQ4-6AYFK).
Supposed  Abnormal power supply voltage

Causes  Instantaneous power failure
 Open phase
 Defective main circuit wiring
 Defective connection of signal cable
Check for power supply

conditions.
Check if power supply voltage
falls within the range of
220-240 V.
There are some

defects in the power YES
supply conditions Remedy the defects.
aforementioned.
NO
The insulation
compressor is less than Replace the compressor
100 k . (M1C).
NO

The insulation
resistance of the fan YES
motor is less
than 1 M . If the motor gets severely
damaged, the outdoor
unit main PCB (A1P)
NO should also be replaced.
CHECK 4
NO
Is the power Replace the outdoor unit
transistor normal? main PCB (A1P).
The
outdoor unit main YES
PCB has damage.
main PCB (A1P).
If the outdoor unit main
NO PCB gets severely
damaged, the
compressor and the fan
Turn ON the power supply, motor may have been
and then press the ON button. damaged.
The
system enters
standby mode before the YES
outdoor fan starts main PCB (A1P).
rotating.
NO
The
system enters
standby mode before YES
completing the startup Replace the outdoor unit
operation of the main PCB (A1P).
compressor. If the outdoor unit main
PCB gets severely
NO damaged, check for the
compressor.
YES
The error U2 recurs. Check for wirings.
NO
Continue operation.
resulted from causes such
as instantaneous power
failure.

RXYMQ4-6AYFK

Check for power supply

conditions.
(1) Power supply voltage falls
within the range of 380 to
415 V?
(2) Any open phase in the
power supply wiring or any
wrong wiring?
(3) Imbalance in the power
supply voltage is
maintained within 12 V?
There are some

defects in the power YES
supply conditions Remedy the defects.
aforementioned.
NO
The
insulation resistance YES
of the compressor is less Replace the compressor
than 100 k . (M1C).
NO
The insulation
resistance of the fan motor YES Replace the fan motor
is less than (M1F).
1M . If the motor gets severely
damaged, the inverter
PCB (A3P) should also
NO be replaced.
CHECK 4
Is the power NO Replace the inverter PCB
transistor normal? (A3P).
YES
Connect and disconnect the A1P A3P

connectors as shown in the X20A X4A
table. X28A X6A
X40A X63A
The inverter YES

PCB has damage. Replace the inverter PCB
(A3P).
If the inverter PCB gets
NO severely damaged, the
compressor and the fan
motor may have been
damaged.

Turn ON the power supply,

and then press the ON button.
The
system enters
standby mode before the YES
Replace the inverter PCB
outdoor unit fan starts (A3P).
rotating.
NO
The system
enters standby
mode before completing YES Replace the inverter PCB
the startup operation of the (A3P).
compressor.
If the inverter PCB gets
severely damaged, check
NO for the compressor.
YES Check for wirings.

The error U2 recurs.
NO
Continue operation.
resulted from causes such
as instantaneous power
failure.

5.57 Check Operation Not Executed

Models
Error Code U3
Method of Error The check operation has not been executed.
Detection
Error Decision Error is decided when the unit starts operation without check operation.
Conditions
Supposed  Check operation not executed

Causes
Troubleshooting
The contents of individual

failures vary with sub code.
Ensure the sub code, and
then go to the following:
U3-02 Conduct the test operation.

(Test operation failed due
to indoor unit error.)
U3-03 Conduct the test operation.

(The test operation has not
been conducted.)
U3-04 Check for the refrigerant

piping, and then conduct
the test operation.
U3-05 Conduct the test operation

(due to the premature end
of the test operation).
U3-06 Conduct the test operation

(due to the premature end
of the test operation).
U3-07 Check for transmission

between indoor and
outdoor units, and then
conduct the test operation.
U3-08 Check for transmission

between indoor and
outdoor units, and then
conduct the test operation.
U3-10 Conduct the refrigerant

auto charge operation.
(The refrigerant auto
charge operation has not
been conducted.)

5.58 Transmission Error between Indoor Units and Outdoor

Units
Models All outdoor unit models
Error Code U4
Method of Error Microcomputer checks if transmission between indoor and outdoor units is normal.
Detection
Error Decision Transmission is not carried out normally for a certain amount of time.
Conditions
Supposed  Short circuit in indoor-outdoor transmission wiring (F1/F2), or wrong wiring

Causes  Outdoor unit power supply is OFF
 System address does not match

Troubleshooting
Check for details of error in

monitor mode.
NO
U4-01 Go to the next page.
U4-03
YES (Indoor unit system
transmission error)
Has the
indoor or
outdoor unit PCB
been replaced, or has YES
the indoor-outdoor Press and hold RETURN
transmission (BS3) on the master outdoor
wiring been unit main PCB (A1P) for a
modified? period of 5 seconds or more.
(The system will not operate
for a period of 12 minutes at
maximum.)
NO
Do all
indoor unit Are the
remote controllers in NO indoor-outdoor YES
the same refrigerant transmission wirings Replace the indoor unit PCB.
system display normal?
U4?
YES NO
Modify the transmission
wirings.
Reset the power supply once.
Correct the voltage.
Does the 1 :OFF :ON :BLINK

microcomputer Is voltage
normal monitor (HAP) on NO between terminals (2) NO (1) SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
the outdoor unit of the outdoor unit main
main PCB blink? PCB normal?
(2)
YES YES
Does the Fuse on the

seven-segment display NO YES
outdoor unit main PCB
show (1) or (2)? has blown out.
(1)
Replace the fuse.
YES NO
The lamp main PCB (A1P).
does not turn OFF YES
for a period of 12 minutes Press and hold RETURN
or more. (BS3) on the outdoor unit
main PCB (A1P) for a period
of 5 seconds or more.
NO
Are the
indoor-outdoor NO
transmission wirings Modify the transmission
normal? wirings.
YES
PCB (A1P).
Note(s) 2. RXYMQ4AVMK: 220-240V between L and N

RXYMQ4-6AYFK: 380-415V between L1 and N

U4-03
Indication YES
after launch test Check controller indoor units:
operation? (1) Some error about
thermistor, or fan motor,
electronic expansion
NO valve, or defective PCB.
(2) Test operation was
Operate all indoor units. interrupted by the MODE
(BS1) button.
NO
Do all units display U9? Check all indoor error
indication.
YES
Did 2 minutes or more NO

elapse after U9 is Carry out the diagnosis again
displayed? after a lapse of 2 minutes or
more.
YES
The PCBs of indoor units

displaying U9 are normal.
Check for indoor units of
other systems to troubleshoot
them according to relevant
error codes.

5.59 Transmission Error between Remote Controller and

Indoor Unit
Models
Error code U5
Method of Error Microcomputer checks if transmission between indoor unit and remote controller is normal.
Detection
Error Decision When transmission is not carried out normally for a certain amount of time.
Conditions
Supposed  Transmission error between indoor unit and remote controller

Causes  Connection of 2 main remote controllers (when using 2 remote controllers)
 Defective remote controller PCB
 Transmission error caused by noise
Troubleshooting
Main/Sub
Control by 2 YES setting of both YES
remote controllers remote controllers is Set one of the remote
set to Main. controllers to Sub, turn OFF
the power supply temporarily,
NO then restart operation.
NO
Resets
All indoor unit NO normally when NO
PCB microcomputer power supply is turned Replace the indoor unit
normal monitors OFF temporarily. PCB.
blinking
YES YES
The error could be produced by
Replace the remote controller noise. Check the surrounding
and restart operation. area and restart operation. (Ex.:
Heavy-duty wireless equipment,
etc.)
YES
Is operation normal? Normal.
NO

and restart operation.
YES
Is operation normal? Normal.
NO
The error could be produced by
noise. Check the surrounding
area and restart operation.
Reference Refer to page 34 for Main/Sub setting.

5.60 Transmission Error between Outdoor Units

Models
Error Code U7
Method of Error Microcomputer checks if transmission between outdoor units is normal.
Detection
Error Decision Transmission is not carried out normally for a certain amount of time
Conditions
Supposed  Connection error of transmission wirings between outdoor unit and external control adaptor
Causes for outdoor unit
 Cool/Heat selection setting error
 Cool/Heat unified address setting error (functional unit, external control adaptor for outdoor
unit)
 Defective external control adaptor for outdoor unit
Troubleshooting
Ensure the sub code or

the lamp display of
monitor mode, and then
go to the following:
U7-01
Error code Sub code
Go to Diagnosis Flowchart-1.
(Transmission error when the
external control adaptor is
mounted)
U7-02
Error code Sub code
external control adaptor is
mounted)
U7-11
Error code Sub code
(Connection of excess indoor
units for test operation)

Diagnosis Flowchart-1
U7-01
Error code Sub code

external control adaptor is mounted)
Is
there any
wiring
disconnection or wiring NO
error in the transmission Modify the transmission wirings
wirings to the external to the external control adaptor for
control adaptor for outdoor unit.
outdoor unit?
YES
Is the
microcomputer
normal monitor on the NO Is power supplied to NO
outdoor unit main PCB Supply power to the outdoor
the outdoor unit? unit.
blinking?
YES YES
PCB (A1P).
Is the
Is the power supply
microcomputer cable of the external
normal monitor on the NO NO
control adaptor for outdoor Connect the power supply cable
external control adaptor unit connected to the
for outdoor unit of the external control adaptor
16 VDC power for outdoor unit to the 16 VDC
blinking? supply line? power supply line.
YES YES
Replace the external control
adaptor PCB.
main PCB (A1P).

U7-02
Error code Sub code
(Transmission error when the external

control adaptor for outdoor unit is mounted)
Unified Cool/ Heat NO

Set Cool/Heat selection
selection for the external control
adaptor for outdoor unit
to “IND.”
YES
Cool/Heat
selection for the
external control adaptor YES
Unified Cool/Heat
for outdoor unit is set to addresses for outdoor
“Unified Master”. units in the
outdoor-outdoor
transmission are
NO duplicated. Make
address setting again.
Cool/Heat
selection for the
external control adaptor for NO
outdoor unit is set to main PCB (A1P).
“Unified Slave”.
YES
Is the
microcomputer
normal monitor on the NO Is power supplied NO
to the outdoor unit? Supply power to the
outdoor unit control outdoor unit.
PCB blinking?
YES
YES Replace the outdoor unit
main PCB (A1P).
Is the Is the power
microcomputer supply cable of the
normal monitor on the NO external control adaptor for NO
external control adaptor for Connect the power
outdoor unit connected to
outdoor unit supply cable of the
the 16 VDC power
blinking? external control adaptor
supply line?
for outdoor unit to the
16 VDC power supply
YES line.
YES
Does
the error
recur when setting
Cool/Heat selection for NO
the external control Replace the external control
adaptor for outdoor adaptor for outdoor unit main
unit to “IND”? PCB (A1P).
YES
main PCB (A1P).

U7-11
Error code Sub code
(Connection of excess indoor units

for test operation)
There
is an error in
the connection of YES
indoor-outdoor, indoor-indoor, Rectify the error in the connection
and outdoor multi of transmission wirings, and then
transmission reset the power supply.
wirings.
NO
The
capacity to
connect indoor units NO
Check the capacity to connect
falls within the specified
range. indoor units.
YES
PCB (A1P).

5.61 Transmission Error between Main and Sub Remote

Controllers
Models
Error code U8
Method of Error In case of controlling with 2 remote controllers, check the system using microcomputer if signal
Detection transmission between indoor unit and remote controller (main and sub remote controller) is
normal.
Error Decision Transmission is not carried out normally for a certain amount of time.
Conditions
Supposed  Transmission error between main and sub remote controller

Causes  Connection between sub remote controllers
 Defective remote controller PCB
Troubleshooting
Main/Sub
Using 2 remote NO setting of the remote NO
controllers control. Set Main/Sub setting of the
controller is set to remote controller to Main.
Main. Turn OFF the power supply,
YES YES and restart operation.
Main/Sub
setting of both remote NO
controllers are set to Turn the power OFF and
Sub. then restart. If an error
occurs, replace the remote
YES controller PCB.
Set Main/Sub setting of one
remote controller to Main.
and restart operation.
Reference Refer to page 34 for Main/Sub setting.

5.62 Other Indoor Units and Outdoor Unit Abnormality

Error Code U9
Method of Error Detect the error signal for the other indoor unit within the circuit by outdoor unit main PCB.
Detection
Error Decision The error decision is made on any other indoor units within the system concerned.
Conditions
Supposed  Transmission error between other indoor and outdoor units

Causes  Defective electronic expansion valve of other indoor unit
 Defective indoor unit PCB of other indoor unit
 Improper connection of transmission wiring between indoor and outdoor unit
Troubleshooting
Turn ON all indoor units.
All the units are NO

Continue the operation.
display U9.
YES
U9 has
been displayed for 2 NO
Re-diagnose by display after
minutes or more. passage of 2 minutes or more.
YES
The outdoor unit main PCB
indicated by the error code U9 is
normal.
Check for the indoor unit of other
system, and then conduct
troubleshooting by diagnosis
according to the Error Code
Flowchart.


Indoor Unit and Remote Controller
Error Code UA
Method of Error A difference occurs in data by the type of refrigerant between indoor and outdoor units.
Detection The number of indoor units connected is out of the allowable range.
Error Decision The error decision is made as soon as either of the abnormalities aforementioned is detected.
Conditions
Supposed  Excess of connected indoor units

 Mismatch of the refrigerant type of indoor and outdoor unit.
 Setting of outdoor unit main PCB was not carried out after replacing to spare PCB.
Troubleshooting
Ensure the sub code or

the lamp display of
monitor mode, and then
go to the following:
UA-17
Error code Sub code
(Connection of excess indoor
units)
UA-18
Error code Sub code
(Connection of incorrect models
of indoor units)
UA-20
Error code Sub code
(Improper combination of outdoor
units)
UA-21
Error code Sub code
(Wrong connection)

UA-17
Error code Sub code
The number
of indoor units
connected to the same YES
system is less than 64. PCB (A1P).
NO
Excess indoor units are
connected.
Diagnosis Flowchart-2 Check for the connection to
connect the proper number of
UA-18 indoor units.
Error code Sub code
Check if
the refrigerant
type of the outdoor YES
unit corresponds to that Replace the outdoor unit main
of the indoor unit. PCB (A1P).
NO
Match the refrigerant types of the
outdoor unit and the indoor unit.
UA-20
Error code Sub code
NO
Multi connection? Replace the outdoor unit main
PCB (A1P).
YES
Was the A
outdoor unit NO different model NO
main PCB replaced with a of outdoor unit is Replace the outdoor unit main
spare PCB? connected. PCB (A1P).
YES YES
Check for the model of outdoor
unit.
NO
Was proper setting of Make setting again, and then
spare PCB made? reset the power supply.
YES
Replace the spare PCB.

UA-21
Error code Sub code
PCB (A1P).

5.64 Address Duplication of Centralized Controller

Models Centralized controller
Error Code UC
Method of Error The principal indoor unit detects the same address as that of its own on any other indoor unit.
Detection
Error Decision The error decision is made as soon as the abnormality aforementioned is detected.
Conditions
Supposed  Address duplication of centralized controller

Troubleshooting
The centralized address is

duplicated. Make setting change so that
the centralized address will
not be duplicated.

5.65 Transmission Error between Centralized Controller and

Indoor Unit
Models Schedule timer
Central remote controller
Error Code UE
Method of Error Microcomputer checks if transmission between indoor unit and centralized controller is normal.
Detection
Error Decision Transmission is not carried out normally for a certain amount of time
Conditions
Supposed  Transmission error between optional controllers for centralized controller and indoor unit
Causes  Connector for setting main controller is disconnected.
(or disconnection of connector for independent / combined use changeover switch.)
 Defective PCB for central remote controller

Troubleshooting
Check
the indoor
unit for which
UE is displayed. Is YES
A
the transmission error
UE caused on
all indoor
units?
NO
Is the
power supply of NO
the indoor unit, on which Make sure there are no
the UE occurred, hazardous situations, and
turned ON? then turn ON the power
supply.
YES
Has
the setting of
central control Can the
NO setting of central YES
group No. been made with Make correct setting of the
the indoor unit on control group No be
made? central control group No.
which the UE
occurred?
NO
YES For
VRV systems,
can the setting of NO
central control group No. be Check outdoor units to which
made in one and the the refrigerant system is
same refrigerant connected.
system?
YES
Was the Check whether or not there
central control NO are no problems with the
group No. for indoor transmission wiring length,
unit changed? types of cables and wires,
number of units connected,
YES and others. If no problems,
replace the indoor unit PCB.
Reset the power supplies of
every centralized controller.
For the intelligent Touch
controller, register the air
conditioner again while in
DIII-NET test run menu.

Check
the transmission
wiring between NG
centralized controller for Correct the wiring.
any broken wire.
CHECK 15
OK
Check the
transmission
wiring between main NG
centralized controller for Correct the wiring.
any broken wire.
CHECK 15
OK
Has the main

centralized controller setting NO
connector been Correct the connection of the
connected? connector.
YES
Disconnect the transmission
wiring of the main centralized
controller, and then check the
voltage between the
transmission terminals (F1 and
F2) of the master unit
transmission equipment using
a multimeter.
Is the
voltage
between the NO
terminals F1 (+) and F2 (-) Replace the centralized
in the range of 15.2 controller.
to 17.6 VDC?
YES
Centralized controller:
Normal
It is supposed that the error
results from external factors
(e.g. noises) from other
equipment.

5.66 System Not Set Yet

Error Code UF
Method of Error On check operation, the number of indoor units in terms of transmission is not corresponding to
Detection that of indoor units that have made changes in temperature.
Error Decision The error is determined as soon as the abnormality aforementioned is detected through
Conditions checking the system for any erroneous connection of units on the check operation.
Supposed  Improper connection of transmission wiring between indoor-outdoor units

Causes  Failure to execute check operation
 Stop valve is not opened
Troubleshooting
Are the stop NO

valves opened? Open the stop valve.
YES
Is
Is the check NO indoor-outdoor YES
operation unit transmission wiring Replace the indoor unit PCB.
carried out? normal?
YES
NO
Is
indoor-outdoor NO
unit transmission wiring After fixing incorrect wiring,
normal? press and hold the RETURN
(BS3) button on the outdoor
unit main PCB for 5 seconds.
YES The unit will not run for up to
12 minutes.
Wiring check operation may

not have been carried out
successfully.

5.67 System Abnormality, Refrigerant System Address

Undefined
Error Code UH
Method of Error Detect an indoor unit with no auto address setting.
Detection
Error Decision The error decision is made as soon as the abnormality aforementioned is detected.
Conditions
Supposed  Improper connection of transmission wiring between indoor-outdoor units

Troubleshooting
Is Does
electricity an error
being introduced occur even after
for the first time after YES 12 minutes elapses NO
installation or after an indoor from the time when electricity Normal
or outdoor unit main is introduced to indoor
PCB has been and outdoor units?
replaced?
NO YES
Is
indoor-outdoor unit NO
transmission After fixing incorrect wiring,
wiring normal? press and hold the RETURN
YES unit main PCB for 5 seconds.
The unit will not run for up to
Press and hold the RETURN 12 minutes.
unit main PCB for 5 seconds
NO
Does an error occur? Normal
YES
Does a UH
error occur for all NO
Replace the indoor unit PCB.
indoor units in the
system?
YES
PCB (A1P).

SiME332106E Check
6. Check
6.1 High Pressure Check
CHECK 1 Referring to the Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) shown below, probe the defective points.
Stop valve closed Check to be sure the stop valve is open.

Local
pressure High pipe Bent or crashed pipe Conduct visual checks for pipe conditions.
rise resistance
Clogging of foreign Is there any temperature difference caused before
materials and after the filter or branch pipe?
[In cooling]
If the outdoor unit electronic Defective outdoor Defective valve coil Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
expansion valve is throttled: unit electronic
(1) expansion valve Defective valve body
A temperature
Rise in high difference in excess of
pressure 10°C between the inlet
and the outlet is
deemed to be abnormal.
Defective high pressure sensor Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
Defective corresponding to the measurement value of the pressure sensor?
control Defective main
Are the voltage characteristics normal?
PCB
Defective
high pressure Defective valve coil Are the coil resistance and insulation
control Defective indoor
unit electronic normal?
expansion valve Defective valve body
Defective high pressure sensor Is the pressure value checked with the Service
Checker corresponding to the measurement value of
[In heating] the pressure sensor?
If the indoor unit electronic Defective Defective indoor unit
control liquid pipe thermistor Is the connector properly connected?
expansion valve excessively Are the thermistor resistance characteristics normal?
throttled: Defective main
(2) PCB Are the voltage characteristics normal?
[In cooling] Short circuit Is the suction air temperature more than 43C?
High suction air
temperature of
High suction outdoor unit High outdoor air Is the outdoor air temperature more than 43C?
air temperature
temperature
of the High suction Short circuit Is the suction air temperature more than 27C?
condenser air temperature
High room
of indoor unit
temperature Is the room temperature more than 27C?
Defective suction air thermistor of indoor unit Is the connector properly connected?
Are the thermistor resistance characteristics normal?
[In heating]
High suction air temperature of outdoor unit Is the outdoor air temperature more than 16CWB?
Defective outdoor air temperature thermistor of outdoor unit Is the connector properly connected?
Degradation Dirty condenser Is the heat exchanger clogged? (In cooling)
in condensing
capacity
Mixing of non-condensable gas Is air or else mixed in the refrigerant system?
Defective fan Can the fan motor be rotated with hands?

Decreased motor Are the motor coil resistance and
fan insulation normal?
Decreased output Defective main
airflow rate PCB (Including If a spare PCB is mounted, is the capacity
capacity setting) setting properly made?
High Dirty filter Is the air filter clogged?

airflow
passage
resistance Obstacle Is there any obstacle in the airflow passage?
Excessive refrigerant charging Refer to CHECK 6 .
Improper model selection [In heating] Is the indoor unit too small compared to
the large-sized outdoor unit?
Note(s)
1. In cooling, it is normal if the outdoor unit electronic expansion valve (main) is fully
open.
2. In heating, the indoor unit electronic expansion valve is used for subcooling
degree control.

Check SiME332106E
6.2 Low Pressure Check

CHECK 2 Referring to the Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) shown below, probe the defective points
[In cooling] Defective low pressure Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
(1) Defective sensor corresponding to the measurement value of the pressure sensor?
Defective compressor
capacity Defective main PCB Are the voltage characteristics normal?
low pressure
control control Defective low pressure Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker corresponding
sensor to the measurement value of the pressure sensor?
Defective Defective valve coil Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
low pressure Defective hot gas EV
protection
[In both cooling control Defective valve body
and heating]
Defective main PCB Are the voltage characteristics normal?
Abnormal drop in (2)
low pressure Defective indoor
[In cooling] unit electronic Defective valve coil Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
(Low evaporating
temperature) If the indoor unit expansion valve
electronic Defective valve body
expansion valve is
Defective gas pipe Check for the thermistor resistance and connection.
throttled too much:
Defective thermistor of indoor unit
(3)
control
Defective electronic Defective liquid pipe Check for the thermistor resistance and connection.
expansion valve thermistor of indoor unit
control
Defective main PCB Are the voltage characteristics normal?
Defective outdoor Defective valve coil Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
[In heating] unit electronic
If the outdoor unit expansion valve Defective valve body
electronic
expansion valve Defective low pressure Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker corresponding
excessively sensor to the measurement value of the pressure sensor?
throttled: Defective Defective suction pipe
thermistor Check for the thermistor resistance and connection.
(4) control
Defective main PCB
[In cooling] Low suction air Short circuit Is the suction air temperature less than 14°C?
temperature of
indoor unit Low room temperature Is the room temperature less than 14°C?
Low suction air
temperature of Defective suction air thermistor of indoor unit Is the connector properly connected?
the evaporator
Low suction air temperature of outdoor unit Is the outdoor air temperature less than –20°C?
Defective outdoor air temperature thermistor of outdoor unit Is the connector properly connected?
[In heating]
Abnormal piping length Does the piping length fall in the permissible range?
High pipe
Bent or crashed pipe Conduct visual checks for pipe conditions.
resistance
Clogging of foreign materials Is there any temperature difference caused before and after the filter or
branch pipe?
Stop valve closed Check to be sure the stop valve is open.
Less
circulation
quantity of Refrigerant shortage Refer to CHECK 7.
refrigerant Moisture choke Eliminate moisture by vacuum operation. (Refer to CHECK 8.)
Dirty evaporator Is the heat exchanger clogged?

Degradation Can the fan motor be rotated with hands?
in evaporating Decreased Defective fan motor
capacity Are the motor coil resistance and insulation normal?
Decreased
fan output Defective main PCB If a spare PCB is mounted, is the
(Including capacity setting) capacity setting properly made?
airflow rate High
airflow Dirty filter Is the air filter clogged?
passage
resistance Obstacle Is there any obstacle in the airflow passage?
Note(s)
1. For details of compressor capacity control while in cooling refer to Compressor
Capacity Control on page 56.
2. The “low pressure protection control” includes low pressure protection control and
hot gas bypass control.
3. In cooling, the indoor unit electronic expansion valve is used for “superheating
degree control”.
4. In heating, the outdoor unit electronic expansion valve is used for “superheating
degree control of outdoor heat exchanger”.

SiME332106E Check
6.3 Superheat Operation Check

CHECK 3 Referring to the Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) shown below, probe the defective points
Hot gas circuit clogging

Defective hot
Defective solenoid
gas bypass valve coil Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
control
Defective solenoid
(1) valve body
Defective main PCB
Defective valve coil Are the coil resistance and

Defective insulation normal?
Defective subcooling Defective valve
[In cooling only] electronic
discharge expansion body
pipe Defective valve Defective low Is the pressure value checked with the
temperature subcooling pressure sensor Service Checker corresponding to the
control electronic measurement value of the pressure sensor?
expansion Defective Defective subcooling
control heat exchanger outlet Is the connector properly connected?
valve control thermistor Are the thermistor resistance characteristics
normal?
Temperature Defective main Are the voltage characteristics normal?
increase of PCB
discharge
pipe Four way valve is in the
Defective four middle position. Check if the piping temperature connected
way valve to the four way valve is normal.
operation Leak from hot gas bypass
valve
Superheat due to
shaft damage
Compressor
overheat Superheat due to
defective compressor
Defective indoor Defective valve coil Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
unit electronic
[In cooling] expansion valve Defective valve body
If the indoor unit
electronic Defective gas pipe Is the connector properly connected?
expansion valve is thermistor of indoor unit Are the thermistor resistance characteristics normal?
throttled too much: Defective
(2) control Defective thermistor for
indoor unit liquid pipe Is the connector properly connected?
Defective Are the thermistor resistance characteristics normal?
superheating
degree Defective main
control. PCB
Defective Defective valve coil Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
outdoor unit
electronic
expansion valve Defective valve body
[In heating]
Defective low pressure Is the pressure value checked with the Service
If the outdoor unit Checker corresponding to the measurement
electronic sensor
value of the pressure sensor?
expansion valve Defective Defective suction pipe
control thermistor Is the connector properly connected?
excessively Are the thermistor resistance characteristics normal?
throttled: (3) Defective main Are the voltage characteristics normal?
PCB
Refrigerant
shortage Refer to CHECK 7 .
Abnormal piping length Does the piping length fall in the permissible range?
Bent or crashed pipe Conduct visual checks.
High pipe
resistance (Including moisture choke) Eliminate moisture by vacuum operation. (Refer to CHECK 8 .)
Stop valve closed. Check if the stop valve is open.
Note(s)
1. Refer to “Low pressure protection control” for hot gas bypass control.
2. “Superheating temperature control” in cooling is conducted by indoor unit electronic
expansion valve.
3. Superheating temperature control in heating is conducted by outdoor unit electronic
expansion valve (main).

Check SiME332106E
4. Judgment criteria of superheat operation:

(1) Suction gas superheating degree: 10°C and over.
(2) Discharge gas superheating degree: 45°C and over, except immediately after
compressor starts up or is running under dropping control.
(Use the above values as a guide. Depending on the other conditions, the unit may
be normal despite the values within the above range.)

SiME332106E Check
6.4 Power Transistor Check

CHECK 4 RXYMQ4AVMK
Use a multimeter to measure the resistance to determine if the power transistor is defective or
not.
1. Do not touch live parts (high voltage parts) within 10 minutes after turning off the power
supply.
2. Touch the earth terminal with your hand to release static electricity. (This is to avoid
damaging the PCB.)
3. Use a multimeter to measure the C+ and C- on the PCB to make sure that the residual
voltage of the power transistor is under 50 VDC.
4. After verifying the residual voltage, pull out the outdoor fan motor connector.
If a strong wind causes the outdoor fan to rotate, the capacitor may store electricity.
Therefore, make sure that the fan is still and then pull out the outdoor fan motor connector.
5. Disconnect the connection wire between the power transistor and the compressor.
Remove the connection wire from the compressor.
At this point, make sure that there is no deformation of the Faston terminal at the front end of
the connection wire.
6. Use a multimeter to measure the resistance listed in the table.
Among the three phases listed in the table, if there is one phase with unbalanced resistance
(with a value five times higher than the other values), then the power transistor is defective.
When normal, all phases have the same resistance value.
Multimeter Resistance Multimeter Resistance
Red (+) Black (–)  Red (+) Black (–) 
C+ U C– U
C+ V C– V
C+ W C– W
U C+ U C–
V C+ V C–
W C+ W C–
Outdoor unit PCB
Red White Blue
Compressor

Check SiME332106E
RXYMQ4-6AYFK
Perform the following procedures prior to check.
(1) Power OFF.
(2) Remove all the wiring connected to the PCB where power transistors are mounted on.
Preparation  Prepare the analog type of multimeter.

Multimeter For the digital type of multimeter, those with
diode check function are available for the
checking.
Point of Measurement and Judgment Criteria

Turn OFF the power supply. Then, after a lapse of 10 minutes or more, make measurement of
resistance.
When using the analog type of multimeter,

make measurement in resistance measurement mode in the x1 k range.
Measuring point Judgment
No. Remarks
+ – Criteria
1 P2 U
2 P2 V 2 ~ 15 k ―
3 P2 W
4 U P2 Due to
condenser
5 V P2 charge and so
6 W P2 15 k and on, resistance
more measurement
7 N32 U (including ∞ ) may require
8 N32 V some time.
9 N32 W
10 U N32
11 V N32 2 ~ 15 k ―
12 W N32
When using the digital type of multimeter, make measurement in diode check mode.
Measuring point Judgment
No. Remarks
+ – Criteria
1 P2 U Due to
condenser
2 P2 V charge and so
1.2 V and more on, resistance
measurement
3 P2 W may require
some time.
4 U P2
5 V P2
6 W P2
0.3 ~ 0.7 V ―
7 N32 U
8 N32 V
9 N32 W
10 U N32 Due to
condenser
11 V N32 charge and so
on, resistance
1.2 V and more measurement
12 W N32 may require
some time.

SiME332106E Check
PCB and Circuit Diagram
N32
P2
P1 L1B L2B L3B U V W

Check SiME332106E
6.5 Refrigerant Overcharge Check

CHECK 6 In case of VRV Systems, the only way to judge as the overcharge of refrigerant is with operating
conditions due to the relationship to pressure control and electronic expansion valve control.
As information for making a judgment, refer to the information below.
Diagnosis of refrigerant overcharge

1. High pressure rises. Consequently, overload control is conducted to cause insufficient
cooling capacity.
2. The superheating degree of suction gas lowers (or wet operation is performed).
Consequently, the compressor becomes lower in discharge pipe temperature despite of
pressure loads.
3. The subcooling degree of condensate rises. Consequently, in heating, the temperature of
discharge air through the subcooled section decreases.
Cooling
High pressure
dropping control
High pressure Frequency comes to
gradually rises with the minimum level.
increase in
frequency. Subcooling degree
becomes higher.
(Liquid connection
High pressure pipe temperature
lowers.)
(Low pressure is
maintained at a
constant level.)
Low pressure
Low pressure rises due
to decreased
compressor output.
Frequency
To maintain low pressure, frequency

increases under the capacity
control.
(Degree of overcharge)
Proper amount Higher degree of overcharge
The outdoor unit electronic expansion valve

Heating is closed due to the overload control.
Frequency comes to
the minimum level.
(High pressure is maintained
at a constant level.)
High pressure
High pressure drops or rises

immediately after the overload
control is complete.
Low pressure
Low pressure rises
due to decreased
frequency.
Low pressure drops due to
closed outdoor unit
electronic expansion valve.
Frequency Hot gas bypass is activated
for low pressure protection,
i.e., hunting at low pressure.
To maintain high pressure,
frequency decreases under the
capacity control.
(Degree of overcharge)
Proper amount Higher degree of overcharge

SiME332106E Check
6.6 Refrigerant Shortage Check

CHECK 7 In case of VRV Systems, the only way to judge as the shortage of refrigerant is with operating
conditions due to the relationship to pressure control and electronic expansion valve control.
As information for making a judgement, refer to the information below.
Diagnosis of shortage of refrigerant

1. The superheating degree of suction gas rises. Consequently, the compressor discharge gas
temperature becomes higher.
2. The superheating degree of suction gas rises. Consequently, the electronic expansion valve
turns open.
3. Low pressure drops to cause the unit not to demonstrate cooling/heating capacity.
Cooling
The opening degree of the indoor unit Fan control is activated for high
electronic expansion valve becomes pressure protection under
larger. cooling control at low outdoor
Either of the electronic expansion air temperature, i.e., the fan is
valves becomes fully open. hunting at high pressure.
Frequency comes to the minimum level.
High pressure
(Low pressure
is maintained at High pressure drops
a constant with decrease in
level.) compressor capacity.
Low pressure
Low pressure rises as the
opening degree of the indoor
unit electronic expansion
valve becomes larger.
Frequency slightly increases If frequency comes to the
under the capacity control. minimum level, low
Frequency pressure cannot be
maintained.
To maintain low
pressure,
frequency drops
due to the
capacity control.
Heating
The opening degree of the outdoor unit electronic expansion valve becomes larger.
The outdoor unit electronic expansion valve fully opens and frequency increases.
Discharge pipe or low pressure dropping control
Frequency comes to
High pressure the minimum level.
(High pressure
is maintained at
a constant
level.)
Low pressure
Frequency
To maintain low pressure, Frequency drops

frequency drops due to the due to the dropping
capacity control.
control.
(Degree of refrigerant shortage)

Proper amount Higher degree of shortage

Check SiME332106E
6.7 Vacuuming and Dehydration Procedure

CHECK 8 Conduct vacuuming and dehydration in the piping system following the procedure for Normal
vacuuming and dehydration described below.
Furthermore, if moisture may get mixed in the piping system, follow the procedure for Special
vacuuming and dehydration described below.
Normal vacuuming and dehydration

1. Vacuuming and dehydration
 Use a vacuum pump that enables vacuuming up to –100.7 kPaG (5 Torr, –755 mmHgG).
 Connect manifold gauges to the service ports of liquid pipe and gas pipe and run the
vacuum pump for a period of two or more hours to conduct evacuation to –100.7 kPaG or
less.
 If the degree of vacuum does not reach –100.7 kPaG or less even though evacuation is
conducted for a period of two hours, moisture will have entered the system or refrigerant
leakage will have been caused. In this case, conduct evacuation for a period of another
one hour.
 If the degree of vacuum does not reach –100.7 kPaG or less even though evacuation is
conducted for a period of three hours, conduct the leak tests.
2. Leaving in vacuum state
 Leave the compressor at the degree of vacuum of –100.7 kPaG or less for a period of
one hour or more, and then check to be sure that the vacuum gauge reading does not
rise. (If the reading rises, moisture may have remained in the system or refrigerant
leakage may have been caused.)
3. Additional refrigerant charge
 Purge air from the manifold gauge connection hoses, and then charge a necessary
amount of refrigerant.
Special vacuuming and dehydration

Use this procedure if moisture may get into the piping, such as construction during the rainy
season (dew condensation may occur, or rainwater may enter the piping during construction
work).
 Follow the same procedure as that for Normal vacuuming and dehydration described
above.
2. Vacuum break
 Pressurize with nitrogen gas up to 0.05 MPaG.
 Conduct vacuuming and dehydration for a period of one hour or more. If the degree of
vacuum does not reach –100.7 kPaG or less even though evacuation is conducted for a
period of two hours or more, repeat vacuum break - vacuuming and dehydration.
4. Leaving in vacuum state
 Leave the compressor at the degree of vacuum of –100.7 kPaG or less for a period of
one hour or more, and then check to be sure that the vacuum gauge reading does not
rise.
5. Additional refrigerant charge
 Purge air from the manifold gauge connection hoses, and then charge a necessary
amount of refrigerant.

SiME332106E Check
6.8 Thermistor Check

CHECK 11 Thermistor type of indoor units
R2T R3T
R1T
Model Indoor heat exchanger Indoor heat exchanger
Suction air thermistor
(liquid) thermistor (gas) thermistor
FXFSQ-AR Type C Type A
FXDQ-PD
FXDQ-ND
Type A
FXMQ-PB Type B Type J
FXMQ-AR
FXAQ-AR
Thermistor type of outdoor units

Thermistor Type
R1T Outdoor air thermistor E
R21T Discharge pipe thermistor H
R3T Suction pipe thermistor A
R4T Heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor A
R5T Subcooling heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor A
R6T Subcooling heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor A
R7T Heat exchanger deicer A
R10T Radiation fin thermistor K

Check SiME332106E
Thermistor Resistance (k)

temperature
(°C) Type A Type B Type C
–30 363.8 361.7719 —
–25 266.8 265.4704 —
–20 197.8 196.9198 —
–15 148.2 147.5687 —
–10 112.0 111.6578 111.8
–5 85.52 85.2610 85.42
0 65.84 65.6705 65.80
5 51.05 50.9947 51.07
10 39.91 39.9149 39.97
15 31.44 31.4796 31.51
20 24.95 25.0060 25.02
25 19.94 20.0000 20.00
30 16.04 16.1008 16.10
35 12.99 13.0426 13.04
40 10.58 10.6281 10.63
45 8.669 8.7097 8.711
50 7.143 7.1764 7.179
55 5.918 5.9407 —
60 4.928 4.9439 —
65 4.123 4.1352 —
70 3.467 3.4757 —
75 — 2.9349 —
80 — 2.4894 —
85 — 2.1205 —
90 — 1.8138 —
95 — 1.5575 —
100 — 1.3425 —
105 — 1.1614 —
3SA48002 3SA48016
3SA48001 (AD100008)
3SA48018
Drawing No. 3P283292 3S480014
3S480003 (AD87A001)
(AD94A045) (AD150384)
This data is for reference purposes only.

SiME332106E Check
Thermistor Resistance (k)

temperature
(°C) Type E Type H Type J Type K
–30 362.4862 3407 352.1 350.6
–25 265.9943 2540 261.2 257.4
–20 197.3083 1910 195.4 191.0
–15 147.8597 1449 147.3 143.2
–10 111.8780 1108 111.8 108.4
–5 85.4291 853.8 85.49 82.83
0 65.8000 662.7 65.80 63.80
5 51.0954 517.9 51.15 49.53
10 39.9938 407.4 40.08 38.75
15 31.5417 322.5 31.64 30.56
20 25.0554 256.9 25.16 24.26
25 20.0395 205.7 20.14 19.40
30 16.1326 165.7 16.23 15.62
35 13.0683 134.3 13.16 12.65
40 10.6490 109.4 10.73 10.31
45 8.7269 89.58 8.800 8.447
50 7.1905 73.73 7.255 6.962
55 5.9524 60.98 6.012 5.769
60 4.9536 50.67 5.010 4.805
65 4.1434 42.29 4.196 4.021
70 3.4825 35.45 3.532 3.381
75 2.9407 29.84 2.987 2.856
80 2.4943 25.21 2.538 2.422
85 2.1247 21.38 2.166 2.063
90 1.8173 18.21 1.857 1.764
95 1.5605 15.57 1.598 1.515
100 1.3451 13.36 1.380 1.305
105 1.1636 11.49 1.196 1.128
110 — 9.92 1.041 0.9781
115 — 8.594 0.908 0.8506
120 — 7.465 0.795 0.7420
125 — 6.499 0.698 0.6495
130 — 5.675 0.615 0.5700
135 — 4.968 0.543 —
140 — 4.360 0.481 —
145 — 3.836 0.428 —
150 — 3.384 0.381 —
3S480024
(AD180053) 3SA48006 3SA48005 3P204139
Drawing No. 3S480025 (AD190115) (AD190114) (AD070077)
(AD180054)
This data is for reference purposes only.

Check SiME332106E
6.9 Pressure Sensor Check

CHECK 12 Pressure Sensor and Voltage Characteristics
Detected Pressure
4.15 4.15
PH (MPa) = × VH – × 0.5
PH, PL 3.0 3.0
(kg/cm2)(MPa) 1.7 1.7
PL (MPa) = × VL – × 0.5
51.0 5.0 3.0 3.0
PH : High pressure (MPa)

45.9 4.5
High Pressure (PH) PL : Low pressure (MPa)
VH : Output Voltage (High Side) (VDC)
40.8 4.0 VL : Output Voltage (Low Side) (VDC)
35.7 3.5
30.6 3.0
25.5 2.5
20.4 2.0
Low Pressure (PL)
15.3 1.5
10.2 1.0
5.1 0.5
0 0
–5.1 –0.5
–0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4
Output Voltage VH, VL (VDC)
Voltage Measurement Point of the High Pressure Sensor

+5 V
X32A (Red)
(4) Red
Black High
(3)
pressure
sensor
(2)
Microcomputer
A/D input (1) White
Make measurement of DC
voltage between these wires.
Voltage Measurement Point of the Low Pressure Sensor

+5 V
X31A (Blue)
(4) Red
(3) Black Low

pressure
Microcomputer
(2) White sensor
A/D input
(1)
Make measurement of DC voltage between these wires.

SiME332106E Check
6.10 Broken Wire Check of the Relay Wires

CHECK 15 Procedure for checking indoor-outdoor unit transmission wiring for broken wires
Turn OFF the power supply to all equipment, short circuit between the indoor-outdoor unit
terminal F1 and F2 in outdoor unit, and then conduct continuity checks between the
transmission wiring F1 and F2 of "Indoor Unit a" farthest from outdoor unit using a multimeter. If
there is continuity between the transmission wiring, the indoor-outdoor unit transmission wiring
has no broken wires in it.
If there is no continuity, the transmission wiring may have broken wires. With the indoor-outdoor
unit terminal of outdoor unit short circuited, identify the areas with continuity in the transmission
wiring of "Indoor Unit b", transmission wiring of "Indoor Unit c", and transmission wiring of
"Indoor Unit d" in the order described.
If the areas with continuity can be identified, there may be broken wires in places before those
areas.
Short circuit between
Check the transmission the indoor-outdoor unit
wiring for continuity. Indoor-outdoor Unit terminal parts.
If there is continuity, the Transmission Wiring
indoor-outdoor unit
transmission has no
broken wires in it.
a b c d Outdoor
unit
6.11 Fan Motor Connector Check (Power Supply Cable)

CHECK 16 Check the fan motor connector according to the following procedure.
Outdoor unit 1. Turn OFF the power supply.

2. Measure the resistance between phases of U, V, W at the motor side connectors (3-core
wire) to check that the values are balanced and there is no short circuiting, while connector
or relay connector is disconnected.
Red U
White V
Black W

Check SiME332106E
Indoor unit FXDQ-PD, FXDQ-ND

1. Turn OFF the power supply.
2. Measure the resistance between phases of U, V, W at the motor side connectors (3-core
wire) to check that the values are balanced and there is no short circuiting, while connector
or relay connector is disconnected.
Red
White
Black
Judgment
Model
Black-Red Black-White
FXDQ20-32PD 81.0  ± 10% 102.0  ± 10%
FXDQ40ND 81.0  ± 10% 102.0  ± 10%
FXDQ50/63ND 44.0  ± 10% 44.0  ± 10%
FXMQ50-140PB
Measurement of power wire connector.
Remove the X1A connector from the fan PCB (A2P) and measure the resistance between the
U and V, V and W, and W and U phases of the motor connector (with five conductors) and
check that each phase are balanced (within a permissible dispersion range of ±20%)
Connector power wire use (X1A)
Red (5) U
— (4)
White (3) V
— (2)
Black (1) W

SiME332106E Check
6.12 Fan Motor Connector Check (Signal Cable)

CHECK 17 Resistance measuring points and judgment criteria.
FXMQ40PB, FXAQ-AR
White (1) FG
Orange (2) Vsp
Brown (3) Vcc
Blue (4) GND
— (5) —
— (6) —
Red (7) Vdc
Measuring points Judgment criteria

1-4 1  or more
2-4 1  or more
3-4 1  or more
7-4 1  or more
FXMQ50-140PB
Measurement of signal wire connector.
Remove the X2A connector and measure the resistance between GND and Vcc, Hw, Hv, or Hu
terminals of the motor connector (with five conductors).
Connector signal wire use (X2A)
Gray (5) GND
Pink (4) Vcc
Orange (3) Hw
Blue (2) HV
Yellow (1) HU

Check SiME332106E
6.13 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Check

CHECK 18 Remove the connector for electronic expansion valve from PCB. Measure the resistance value
between pins and check the continuity to judge the condition.
The normal products will show the following conditions.
Outdoor unit
X21A (Y1E)
X22A (Y2E) *2
X23A (Y3E)
X22A (Y2E) *1 X25A (Y4E)
(White) 1 (Orange) 1
(Yellow) 2 (Red) 2
Measuring points Judgment criteria
(Orange) 3 (Yellow) 3
1-6
(Blue) 4 (Black) 4 2-6
35-55
3-6
— 5 — 5 4-6
(Red) 6 COM+ (Gray) 6
*1. For RXYMQ4AVMK

*2. For RXYMQ4-6AYFK
Indoor unit FXFSQ-AR, FXMQ-PB

Orange (1) Measuring points Judgment criteria
1
1-2 No continuity
Gray (6) M
3 1-3 92
Yellow (3) 1-6 46
2-4 92
2 4
2-6 46
Red Black
(2) (4)
(1) Orange
(2) Red
(3) Yellow
(4) Black
(5) —
(6) Gray

SiME332106E Check
FXDQ-PD, FXDQ-ND
White (1)
φ1 Measuring points Judgment criteria
Red (6) M 1-2 No continuity
φ3
Orange (3) 1-3 92 Ω
1-6 46 Ω
φ2 φ4 2-4 92 Ω
2-6 46 Ω
Yellow Blue
(2) (4)
(1) White
(2) Yellow
(3) Orange
(4) Blue
(5) —
(6) Red
FXMQ-AR
White (1) Measuring points Judgment criteria
1
Red (6) M 1-2 No continuity
3 1-3 300
Orange (3)
1-6 150
2 4
2-4 300
2-6 150
Yellow Blue
(2) (4)
Blue — Orange
(4) (5) (3)
(2) (6) (1)

Yellow Red White
FXAQ-AR
White (1) Measuring points Judgment criteria
1
1-2 No continuity
Red (5) M
3 1-3 300
Orange (3) 1-5 150
2-4 300
2 4
2-6 150
Yellow Brown Blue
(2) (6) (4)
(1) White
(2) Yellow
(3) Orange
(4) Blue
(5) Red
(6) Brown

SiME332106E
Part 7
Appendix
1. Wiring Diagrams..................................................................................291
1.1 Outdoor Unit .........................................................................................291
1.2 VRV Indoor Unit ...................................................................................293
290 Part 7 Appendix

SiME332106E Wiring Diagrams
1. Wiring Diagrams
1.1 Outdoor Unit
RXYMQ4AVMK
C: 3D133942
Part 7 Appendix 291

Wiring Diagrams SiME332106E
RXYMQ4/5/6AYFK
C: 3D133944A
292 Part 7 Appendix

1.2 VRV Indoor Unit

1.2.1 Round Flow Cassette with Sensing
FXFSQ25/32/40/50/63/80/100/125/140ARV1
3D121473A
Part 7 Appendix 293

1.2.2 Auto Grille Panel

BYCQ125EBSF (Auto Grille Panel for FXFSQ-AR)
3D130909
294 Part 7 Appendix

1.2.3 Slim Duct (Standard Type)

FXDQ20/25/32PDVM, FXDQ40/50/63NDVM
3D124914B
Part 7 Appendix 295

1.2.4 Middle-high Static Pressure Duct

FXMQ40/50/63/80/100/125/140PBV1
3D110450B
296 Part 7 Appendix

FXMQ40/50/63/80/100ARV1
3D127112
);04$59
'
Part 7 Appendix 297

298
Wiring Diagrams

;$
1.2.5 Wall Mounted

FXAQ20/25/32/40/50/63ARVM
;$
32:(56833/< 02'(/1$0(
~ 9+] );$ 5 4$59(
~ 9+] );$4$59(*
~9 );$4$590
+]
')
3D118250G
SiME332106E
Part 7 Appendix
Warning z Daikin products are manufactured for export to numerous countries throughout the world. Prior to
purchase, please confirm with your local authorized importer, distributor and/or retailer whether this
product conforms to the applicable standards, and is suitable for use, in the region where the product
will be used. This statement does not purport to exclude, restrict or modify the application of any local
legislation.
z Ask a qualified installer or contractor to install this product. Do not try to install the product yourself.
Improper installation can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical shock, fire or explosion.
z Use only those parts and accessories supplied or specified by Daikin. Ask a qualified installer or
contractor to install those parts and accessories. Use of unauthorized parts and accessories or
improper installation of parts and accessories can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical
shock, fire or explosion.
z Read the user's manual carefully before using this product. The user's manual provides important
safety instructions and warnings. Be sure to follow these instructions and warnings.
If you have any inquiries, please contact your local importer, distributor and/or retailer.
Cautions on product corrosion

1. Air conditioners should not be installed in areas where corrosive gases, such as acid gas or alkaline gas, are produced.
2. If the outdoor unit is to be installed close to the sea shore, direct exposure to the sea breeze should be avoided. If you need to install
the outdoor unit close to the sea shore, contact your local distributor.
Head Office:
Umeda Center Bldg., 2-4-12, Nakazaki-Nishi,
Kita-ku, Osaka, 530-8323 Japan
Tokyo Office:
JR Shinagawa East Bldg., 2-18-1, Konan,
Minato-ku, Tokyo, 108-0075 Japan
https://www.daikin.com/products/ac/
© All rights reserved
Specifications, designs and other content appearing in this brochure are current as of September 2021 but subject to change without notice.
SiME332106E
09/2021 AK.K

RXYMQ-AVMK Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RXYMQ-AVMK Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

RXYMQ-AVMK Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SiME332106E

Part 1 General Information ............................................................ 8

Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit............................................................. 14

Part 3 Remote Controller ............................................................. 24

Part 4 Functions and Control ....................................................... 49

Part 5 Field Settings and Test Operation .................................... 83

1.5 Operation Control Mode .......................................................................106

Part 6 Service Diagnosis ............................................................ 139

iii Table of Contents

5.20 Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor Error ..................................................188

Part 7 Appendix .......................................................................... 290

1.1 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Workers

Be sure to disconnect the power cable from the socket before

When disconnecting the suction or discharge pipe of the

Be sure to discharge the capacitor completely before conducting

Be sure to wear a safety helmet, gloves, and a safety belt when

In case of R-32 / R-410A refrigerant models, be sure to use pipes,

Do not clean the air conditioner with water.

Be sure to provide an earth / grounding when repairing the

Be sure to conduct repair work with appropriate tools.

Be sure to check that the refrigerating cycle section has cooled

Conduct welding work in a well-ventilated place.

1.2 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Users

Do not use a joined power cable or extension cable, or share the

Be sure to use an exclusive power circuit for the equipment, and

Do not damage or modify the power cable.

When replacing the coin battery in the remote controller, be sure to

Do not install the equipment in a place where there is a possibility of

Check to see if parts and wires are mounted and connected

Check the earth / grounding, and repair it if the equipment is not

Be sure to measure insulation resistance after the repair, and make

Do not tilt the unit when removing it.

1. Model Names ..........................................................................................9

8 Part 1 General Information

VMK: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz (for Middle East)

1.2 VRV Indoor Unit

Power supply and standard symbols

Part 1 General Information 9

2.2 VRV Indoor Unit

Ceiling concealed duct

10 Part 1 General Information

Type Min. connection ratio Max. connection ratio

3.2 Outdoor Unit Combinations

Part 1 General Information 11

2. For detailed contents, see installation/operational manual.

12 Part 1 General Information

Model name RXYMQ5AYFK RXYMQ6AYFK

2. For detailed contents, see installation/operational manual.

Part 1 General Information 13

1. Refrigerant Circuit (Piping Diagrams) ...................................................15

14 Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit

1. Refrigerant Circuit (Piping Diagrams)

Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit 15

16 Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit

Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit 17

1.2 VRV Indoor Unit

 FXFSQ-AR  FXDQ-PD, FXDQ-ND

18 Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit

(1) (3) (1) (3)

Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit 19